PROPORTIONAL VALVES FOR ELECTROHYDRAULIC POSITION,
SPEED, PRESSURE AND FORCE CONTROL EVEN FOR HIGH DYNAMIC
REQUIREMENTS
Rev. -, May 2012
USER MANUAL FOR
PILOT-OPERATED
PROPORTIONAL VALVES
WITH INTEGRATED DIGITAL
ELECTRONICS
D67xK series
WHAT MOVES YOUR WORLD
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) A
copyright
© 2012 Moog GmbH
Hanns-Klemm-Strasse 28
71034 Böblingen
Germany
+49 7031 622-0-
Fax: +49 7031 622-100
E-Mail: Info.germany@moog.com
Internet: http://www.moog.com/industrial
All rights reserved.
No part of this user manual may be reproduced in any form (print, photocopies, microfilm, or by any other
means) or edited, duplicated, or distributed with electronic systems without the prior written consent of Moog.
Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages.
Subject to change without notice.
Table of Contents
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) ii
Table of Contents
Index of Tables ........................................................................................................................................ viii
Index of figures ...........................................................................................................................................x
1 General Information ..................................................................................1
1.1 Notes on user manual ................................................................................................................. 1
1.1.1 Subject to change without notice and validity................................................................. 2
1.1.2 Completeness ................................................................................................................ 2
1.1.3 Storage location ............................................................................................................. 2
1.1.4 Typographical conventions............................................................................................. 3
1.1.5 Structure of the warning notes ....................................................................................... 4
1.2 Supplemental documents........................................................................................................... 5
1.3 Intended operation ...................................................................................................................... 5
1.4 Selection and qualification of personnel .................................................................................. 7
1.5 Structural modifications ............................................................................................................. 8
1.6 Environmental protection ........................................................................................................... 9
1.6.1 Acoustical Emissions...................................................................................................... 9
1.6.2 Disposal.......................................................................................................................... 9
1.7 Responsibilities ......................................................................................................................... 10
1.8 Warranty and liability ................................................................................................................ 11
1.9 Declaration of conformity ......................................................................................................... 12
1.10 Registered marks and trademarks........................................................................................... 13
2 Safety .......................................................................................................14
2.1 Handling in accordance with safety requirements................................................................. 14
2.2 Occupational safety and health ...............................................................................................15
2.3 General safety instructions ...................................................................................................... 16
2.4 ESD ............................................................................................................................................. 16
2.5 Pressure limitation .................................................................................................................... 16
3 Product Description................................................................................17
3.1 Function and mode of operation.............................................................................................. 17
3.1.1 Pilot pressure ............................................................................................................... 17
3.1.2 Representative depiction of the valve .......................................................................... 18
3.1.3 Permanent magnet linear force motor.......................................................................... 19
3.1.4 Valve electronics and valve software ........................................................................... 20
3.1.4.1 Valve status............................................................................................. 21
3.1.5 Signal interfaces........................................................................................................... 22
3.1.5.1 Connector X1 .......................................................................................... 23
3.1.5.2 Fieldbus connectors X3 and X4 .............................................................. 24
3.1.5.3 Service connector X10 ............................................................................ 24
3.2 Safety function/fail-safe ............................................................................................................ 25
3.2.1 Mechanical fail-safe function........................................................................................ 26
3.2.1.1 Valves with fail-safe functions F, D and M .............................................. 26
3.2.1.2 Valves with fail-safe functions H and K ................................................... 27
3.2.1.3 Mechanical fail-safe state........................................................................ 27
3.2.1.4 Fail-safe identification.............................................................................. 27
3.2.1.5 spool identification................................................................................... 27
3.2.2 Electrical fail-safe function............................................................................................ 28
Table of Contents
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) iii
3.2.3 Fail-safe events............................................................................................................ 28
3.2.3.1 Shutdown/failure of the supply voltage.................................................... 29
3.2.3.2 Signals at the enable input ...................................................................... 29
3.2.3.3 Drop in the pilot pressure p
X
................................................................... 29
3.2.3.4 Settable fault reaction.............................................................................. 30
3.2.3.5 Control commands .................................................................................. 30
3.2.4 Restarting the valve...................................................................................................... 31
3.3 Hydraulics .................................................................................................................................. 32
3.3.1 Flow control (Q-control)................................................................................................ 33
3.3.2 Valve configurations and hydraulic symbols ................................................................ 34
3.3.2.1 2-way and 2/2-way operation .................................................................. 34
3.3.2.2 4-way and 3-way operation ..................................................................... 35
3.3.2.3 5-way operation....................................................................................... 36
3.3.3 Control type ports X and Y ........................................................................................... 37
3.3.3.1 Pilot pressure port X................................................................................ 37
3.3.3.2 Leakage port Y ........................................................................................ 37
3.3.3.3 Pilot identification .................................................................................... 37
3.3.4 Electrical and hydraulic zero positions ......................................................................... 38
3.4 Control........................................................................................................................................ 39
3.4.1 Signal types for set-point and actual value................................................................... 40
3.4.1.1 Signal type identification.......................................................................... 41
3.4.1.2 Flow control command inputs.................................................................. 42
3.4.2 Analog actual value output........................................................................................... 46
3.4.3 Digital enable input.......................................................................................................46
3.5 Configuration software ............................................................................................................. 47
3.6 Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software ..................................................................... 48
3.7 Nameplate .................................................................................................................................. 48
4 Characteristic curves..............................................................................49
4.1 Flow diagram (4-way operation)............................................................................................... 49
4.2 Flow signal characteristic curve .............................................................................................. 51
5 Transportation and Storage ...................................................................52
5.1 Checking/unpacking a delivery................................................................................................54
5.2 Scope of delivery of the valve .................................................................................................. 54
5.3 Storage ....................................................................................................................................... 55
6 Mounting and Connection to the Hydraulic System............................56
6.1 Dimensions (installation drawings) ......................................................................................... 57
6.2 Mounting surface....................................................................................................................... 57
6.2.1 Surface quality.............................................................................................................. 57
6.2.2 Holes in mounting surface............................................................................................ 57
6.3 Mounting the valve .................................................................................................................... 58
6.3.1 Tools and materials required........................................................................................ 58
6.3.2 Specification for installation screws for the valves ....................................................... 58
6.3.3 Procedure..................................................................................................................... 59
7 Electrical connection ..............................................................................61
7.1 Safety instructions for installation and maintenance ............................................................ 61
7.1.1 Protective grounding and electrical shielding............................................................... 63
7.1.2 Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software ........................................................... 65
7.2 Block diagram............................................................................................................................ 66
7.3 Arrangement of connectors ..................................................................................................... 67
Table of Contents
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) iv
7.4 Connector X1 ............................................................................................................................. 69
7.4.1 Pin assignment of connector X1................................................................................... 69
7.4.2 Mating connector for connector X1 .............................................................................. 69
7.4.3 Power supply................................................................................................................ 70
7.5 Analog inputs/outputs .............................................................................................................. 70
7.5.1 Analog inputs................................................................................................................ 70
7.5.1.1 Signal types............................................................................................. 71
7.5.2 Analog outputs .............................................................................................................73
7.6 Digital inputs/outputs................................................................................................................ 74
7.6.1 Digital input................................................................................................................... 74
7.6.2 Digital outputs............................................................................................................... 74
7.7 Digital signal interface .............................................................................................................. 75
7.7.1 SSI transducer.............................................................................................................. 75
7.7.1.1 Pin assignment SSI transducer connector X2......................................... 76
7.8 Fieldbus connectors X3 and X4 ............................................................................................... 77
7.8.1 CAN connectors ........................................................................................................... 77
7.8.1.1 Technical data for the CAN bus interface................................................ 77
7.8.1.2 Pin assignment, CAN connectors............................................................ 78
7.8.2 Profibus-DP connectors ............................................................................................... 78
7.8.2.1 Technical data for the Profibus-DP interface........................................... 79
7.8.2.2 Pin assignment, Profibus-DP connectors................................................ 80
7.8.3 EtherCAT connectors ................................................................................................... 80
7.8.3.1 Technical data for the EtherCAT interface .............................................. 81
7.8.3.2 Pin assignment, EtherCAT connectors ................................................... 82
7.9 Analog input connectors X5, X6 and X7.................................................................................. 83
7.9.1 Pin assignment, analog input connectors X5, X6 and X7 ............................................ 83
7.9.2 Signal types.................................................................................................................. 84
7.9.3 Input resistances ..........................................................................................................85
7.10 Service connector X10 .............................................................................................................. 86
7.11 General notes on wiring............................................................................................................ 88
7.11.1 Tools and materials required........................................................................................ 88
7.11.2 Procedure..................................................................................................................... 89
7.11.3 Wiring of supply lines, evaluation of digital and analog signals.................................... 89
7.12 Protective grounding, equipotential bonding, and shielding................................................ 90
7.12.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................... 90
7.12.2 Equipotential bonding and protective grounding .......................................................... 91
7.12.2.1 General principles ................................................................................... 92
7.12.2.2 Protective conductor................................................................................ 92
7.12.2.3 Ground loops........................................................................................... 93
7.12.3 Machines with deficient equipotential bonding ............................................................. 94
7.12.4 Electrical shielding........................................................................................................ 94
7.12.4.1 Cables ..................................................................................................... 94
7.12.4.2 Connecting the shield.............................................................................. 95
7.12.4.3 Insulated shielding................................................................................... 97
7.12.4.4 Cable routing ........................................................................................... 97
7.13 Permissible lengths for connection cables ............................................................................ 98
7.13.1 Introduction................................................................................................................... 98
7.13.2 Typical values for copper cables .................................................................................. 98
7.13.2.1 Resistance of cable ................................................................................. 98
7.13.2.2 Capacitance of cable............................................................................... 98
7.13.3 24 V supply cables ....................................................................................................... 99
7.13.3.1 Voltage drop per unit length .................................................................... 99
7.13.3.2 Examples of the voltage drop of supply cables ..................................... 100
7.13.4 Analog signal cables .................................................................................................. 101
Table of Contents
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) v
7.13.5 Digital signal cables.................................................................................................... 102
7.13.5.1 Digital signal input cables...................................................................... 102
7.13.5.2 Digital signal output cables.................................................................... 102
7.13.5.3 Fieldbus cables ..................................................................................... 102
7.14 Wiring connector X1................................................................................................................ 102
7.14.1 Single-ended command signals ................................................................................. 103
7.14.2 Conversion of actual value output signals I
out
............................................................ 104
7.14.2.1 Valves with 7-pin connector X1 ............................................................. 104
7.15 Wiring SSI transducers (X2) ................................................................................................... 105
7.15.1 SSI master mode........................................................................................................ 105
7.16 Wiring CAN networks.............................................................................................................. 106
7.16.1 Cable lengths and cable cross sections..................................................................... 109
7.16.1.1 Suitable cable types for CAN networks ................................................. 109
7.16.2 Permissible number of CAN bus nodes ..................................................................... 110
7.16.3 CAN module address (node ID) ................................................................................. 110
7.16.4 CAN transmission rate ............................................................................................... 110
7.17 Wiring Profibus-DP networks (X3, X4)................................................................................... 111
7.17.1 Cable lengths and cable cross sections..................................................................... 112
7.17.1.1 Suitable cable types for Profibus-DP networks ..................................... 113
7.17.2 Permissible number of Profibus nodes....................................................................... 113
7.17.3 Profibus-DP module address (node ID) ..................................................................... 113
7.17.4 Profibus-DP transmission rate.................................................................................... 113
7.18 Wiring EtherCAT networks (X3, X4)....................................................................................... 114
7.18.1 Suitable cable types for EtherCAT networks.............................................................. 115
7.18.2 Permissible number of EtherCAT nodes .................................................................... 116
7.18.3 EtherCAT module address (node ID)......................................................................... 116
7.18.4 EtherCAT transmission rate ....................................................................................... 116
7.19 Wiring analog inputs (X5, X6, X7) .......................................................................................... 117
7.20 Electrical start-up .................................................................................................................... 119
7.21 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) .................................................................................... 120
7.22 Communication via the Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software........................... 121
8 Start-up...................................................................................................123
8.1 Preparations............................................................................................................................. 126
8.2 Start-up of the valves .............................................................................................................. 127
8.3 Configuration of the valves .................................................................................................... 128
8.3.1 Configuration via the fieldbus interface ...................................................................... 128
8.3.1.1 Configuration with the machine controller ............................................. 128
8.3.1.2 Configuration with the
Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software .................................... 129
8.3.2 Configuration via the service interface ....................................................................... 130
8.3.3 Factory setting of the valves....................................................................................... 131
8.3.4 Storing of parameters................................................................................................. 131
8.4 Filling and flushing the hydraulic system............................................................................. 132
8.5 Start-up of the hydraulic system............................................................................................ 133
8.5.1 Venting the actuator ................................................................................................... 133
9 Operation ...............................................................................................134
9.1 Preparations for operation ..................................................................................................... 137
9.2 Operation of the valve............................................................................................................. 138
9.3 Shutting down the valve ......................................................................................................... 138
Table of Contents
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) vi
10 Service ...................................................................................................140
10.1 Removing of the valves .......................................................................................................... 143
10.1.1 Tools and materials required...................................................................................... 143
10.1.2 Removing ................................................................................................................... 145
10.2 Maintenance............................................................................................................................. 146
10.2.1 Checking and replacing the port O-rings.................................................................... 146
10.2.1.1 Tools and materials required................................................................. 146
10.2.1.2 checking and replacing the O-rings....................................................... 146
10.3 Troubleshooting ...................................................................................................................... 147
10.3.1 Leaks.......................................................................................................................... 147
10.3.1.1 Leak at the valve connecting surface .................................................... 147
10.3.1.2 Leak at the linear force motor screw plug ............................................. 148
10.3.2 No hydraulic response by the valve ........................................................................... 148
10.3.3 Instability of the external control loop ......................................................................... 149
10.3.4 Instability of the internal valve control loops............................................................... 149
10.3.4.1 Flow control ........................................................................................... 149
10.4 Repair ....................................................................................................................................... 150
11 Technical Data .......................................................................................152
11.1 Nameplates .............................................................................................................................. 154
11.1.1 Model number and type designation .......................................................................... 156
11.1.2 LSS address...............................................................................................................163
11.1.3 Data matrix code ........................................................................................................ 163
11.2 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) .................................................................................... 163
11.3 Technical data D671K – ISO 4401-05/NG10........................................................................... 164
11.3.1 Mounting surface........................................................................................................ 165
11.3.1.1 Mounting pattern of mounting surface................................................... 165
11.3.2 Data D671K with direct-operated pilot valve D633K ............................................... 166
11.4 Technical data D672K – ISO 4401-07/NG16........................................................................... 175
11.4.1 Mounting surface........................................................................................................ 176
11.4.1.1 Mounting pattern of mounting surface................................................... 176
11.4.2 Data D672K with direct-operated pilot valve D633K ............................................... 177
11.5 Technical data D673K – ISO 4401-08/NG25........................................................................... 186
11.5.1 Mounting surface........................................................................................................ 187
11.5.1.1 Mounting pattern of mounting surface................................................... 187
11.5.2 Data D673K with direct-operated pilot valve D633K ................................................ 188
11.6 Technical data D674K – ISO 4401-08/NG25........................................................................... 197
11.6.1 Mounting surface........................................................................................................ 198
11.6.1.1 Mounting pattern of mounting surface................................................... 198
11.6.2 Data D674K with direct-operated pilot valve D633K ................................................ 199
11.7 Technical data D675K – ISO 4401-10/NG32........................................................................... 208
11.7.1 Mounting surface........................................................................................................ 209
11.7.1.1 Mounting pattern of mounting surface................................................... 209
11.7.2 Data D675K with direct-operated pilot valve D633K ............................................... 210
12 Accessories, Spare Parts, and Tools...................................................222
12.1 Accessories for valves in the D67XK series ......................................................................... 222
12.2 Tools for valves in the D67XK series..................................................................................... 224
12.3 NG-dependent accessories and spare parts ........................................................................ 225
12.3.1 Proportional valves in the D671K series .................................................................... 225
12.3.2 Proportional valves in the D672K series .................................................................... 226
12.3.3 Proportional valves in the D673K and D674K series ................................................. 226
12.3.4 Proportional valves in the D675K series .................................................................... 227
Table of Contents
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) vii
13 Ordering Information ............................................................................228
14 Keyword index.......................................................................................230
15 Appendix................................................................................................247
15.1 Abbreviations, symbols and identification letters ............................................................... 247
15.2 Additional literature................................................................................................................. 249
15.2.1 Fundamentals of hydraulics ....................................................................................... 249
15.2.2 CAN fundamentals ..................................................................................................... 250
15.2.3 Profibus fundamentals................................................................................................ 250
15.2.4 EtherCAT fundamentals ............................................................................................. 250
15.2.5 Moog publications ...................................................................................................... 250
15.3 Quoted standards.................................................................................................................... 250
15.3.1 CiA DSP ..................................................................................................................... 250
15.3.2 TIA/EIA ....................................................................................................................... 251
15.3.3 IEC ............................................................................................................................. 251
15.3.4 IEEE ........................................................................................................................... 251
15.3.5 ISO, ISO/IEC..............................................................................................................251
15.3.6 DIN ............................................................................................................................. 251
15.3.7 EN .............................................................................................................................. 252
15.3.8 EN ISO ....................................................................................................................... 253
15.3.9 ISO ............................................................................................................................. 253
15.4 Quoted directives .................................................................................................................... 253
15.5 Explosion-proof connectors................................................................................................... 255
Index of Tables
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) viii
Index of Tables
Tab. 1: Marking of D67XK series................................................................................................................... 5
Tab. 2: Valve status ..................................................................................................................................... 21
Tab. 3: Existing signal interfaces ................................................................................................................. 23
Tab. 4: Fail-safe events ............................................................................................................................... 28
Tab. 5: Benefits of the different signal types for analog command inputs ................................................... 40
Tab. 6: Signal types command value and spool position signal in the type designation ............................. 41
Tab. 7: Specification for installation screws for the valves........................................................................... 58
Tab. 8: Allocation of interfaces to connectors .............................................................................................. 68
Tab. 9: Technical data for the CAN bus interface........................................................................................ 77
Tab. 10: Technical data for the Profibus-DP interface................................................................................... 79
Tab. 11: Technical data for the EtherCAT interface....................................................................................... 81
Tab. 12: Input resistances X5, X6, X7 ........................................................................................................... 85
Tab. 13: Benefits of the different signal types for analog inputs .................................................................... 89
Tab. 14: Examples of the voltage drop of supply cables as a function of the cable length for a cable
cross section of 0.75 m
2
................................................................................................................ 100
Tab. 15: Recommendation for maximum cable lengths
in CAN networks, depending on the transmission rate.................................................................. 109
Tab. 16: Recommendation for maximum cable lengths in CAN networks, depending on the cable cross
section and the number n of CAN bus nodes................................................................................ 109
Tab. 17: Maximum permissible stub cable lengths in CAN networks .......................................................... 109
Tab. 18: Specification of electrical data for CAN bus cables ....................................................................... 109
Tab. 19: Suitable cable types for CAN networks ......................................................................................... 109
Tab. 20: Recommendation for maximum cable lengths in Profibus-DP networks, depending on
the transmission rate ..................................................................................................................... 112
Tab. 21: Specification of electrical data for Profibus-DP cables (as per type A).......................................... 113
Tab. 22: Suitable cable types for Profibus-DP networks.............................................................................. 113
Tab. 23: Assignment of Ethernet/EtherCAT signals with mixed connector types........................................ 115
Tab. 24: Overview of technical data for the series and variants .................................................................. 152
Tab. 25: Spool type in the type designation................................................................................................. 156
Tab. 26: Rated flow variant in the type designation ..................................................................................... 157
Tab. 27: Maximum permissible operating pressure in the type designation................................................ 157
Tab. 28: Spool variant in the type designation............................................................................................. 158
Tab. 29: Pilot valve variant in the type designation...................................................................................... 158
Tab. 30: Spool position in case of failure, D67X with pilot valve D633K...................................................... 159
Tab. 31: Variant of pilot pressure and leakage port in the type designation ................................................ 160
Tab. 32: Seal material variant in the type designation................................................................................. 160
Tab. 33: Variant of the valve connector X1 in the type designation............................................................. 161
Tab. 34: Signal types command value and spool position signal in the type designation ........................... 161
Index of Tables
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) ix
Tab. 35: Variant of the fieldbus connector X3 and X4 in the type designation ............................................ 162
Tab. 36: Technical data D671K with direct-operated pilot valve D633K .................................................... 166
Tab. 37: Technical data D672K with direct-operated pilot valve D633K .................................................... 177
Tab. 38: Technical data D673K with direct-operated pilot valve ................................................................ 188
Tab. 39: Technical data D674K with direct-operated pilot valve D633K .................................................... 199
Tab. 40: Technical data D675K with direct-operated pilot valve D633K .................................................... 210
Tab. 41: Accessories and tools for all proportional valves in the D67XK series .......................................... 222
Tab. 42: Spare parts for valves in the D67XK series................................................................................... 224
Tab. 43: Spare parts and accessories in the D671K series with direct-operated pilot valve D633K ........... 225
Tab. 44: Spare parts and accessories in the D672K series with direct-operated pilot valve D633K ........... 226
Tab. 45: Spare parts and accessories in the D673K and D674K series with
direct-operated pilot valve D633K.................................................................................................. 226
Tab. 46: Spare parts and accessories in the D675K series with direct-operated pilot valve D633K ........... 227
Tab. 47: Abbreviations, symbols and identification letters ........................................................................... 247
Index of figures
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) x
Index of figures
Fig. 1: Representative depiction of a two-stage proportional valve with directly-operated
pilot valve D633K............................................................................................................................. 18
Fig. 2: Representative depiction of the permanent magnet linear motor (D633K)...................................... 19
Fig. 3: Flow control (Q-control) block diagram............................................................................................ 33
Fig. 4: 5-way operation with mechanical fail-safe function F (hydraulic symbol) ........................................ 36
Fig. 5: Examples of the electrical and hydraulic zero positions of different spools in the flow signal
characteristic curve.......................................................................................................................... 38
Fig. 6: Floating flow control command input ±10 V (circuit and characteristic curve) ................................. 42
Fig. 7: Floating flow control command input ±10 mA (circuit and characteristic curve) .............................. 42
Fig. 8: Floating flow control command input 4–20 mA (circuit and characteristic curve)............................ 44
Fig. 9: Flow diagram (4-way operation) D671K to D675K .......................................................................... 49
Fig. 10: Flow signal characteristic curve with equal electrical and hydraulic zero positions......................... 51
Fig. 11: Design for measuring the flow signal characteristic curve............................................................... 51
Fig. 12: Valve D671K, flow-signal characteristic curve................................................................................. 51
Fig. 13: Block diagram of the valve electronics ............................................................................................ 66
Fig. 14: Arrangement of connectors on the valve electronics housing (maximum equipment specification) 67
Fig. 15: Assignment of service connector X1 (7-pin).................................................................................... 69
Fig. 16: SSI transducer connector X2........................................................................................................... 76
Fig. 17: CAN connectors X3 and X4............................................................................................................. 78
Fig. 18: Profibus DP connectors X3 and X4 ................................................................................................. 80
Fig. 19: EtherCAT connectors X3 and X4..................................................................................................... 82
Fig. 20: Analog input connectors X5, X6 and X7.......................................................................................... 83
Fig. 21: Equivalent circuit diagram of analog input ....................................................................................... 85
Fig. 22: Service connector X10 (M8, 3-pin) .................................................................................................. 86
Fig. 23: Equipotential bonding and protective grounding of machines (see also EN 60204-1) and electrical
shielding of our valves with integrated electronics........................................................................... 91
Fig. 24: Connecting the shield to the control cabinet's wall (detail A from Fig. 23) ...................................... 95
Fig. 25: Connecting the cable shield via connector to the control cabinet's wall (detail A from Fig. 23) ...... 96
Fig. 26: Connecting the insulated shielding to the control cabinet's wall (detail A from Fig. 23) .................. 97
Fig. 27: Voltage drop on the supply cable .................................................................................................... 99
Fig. 28: Wiring of the 7-pin connector X1 ................................................................................................... 102
Fig. 29: Circuit for single-ended command signals..................................................................................... 103
Fig. 30: Circuit for converting the actual value output signals I
out
(for valves with 7-pin connector X1) ..... 104
Fig. 31: Wiring diagram with SSI transducer .............................................................................................. 105
Fig. 32: Signals between valve and a 16-bit SSI transducer (example) ..................................................... 105
Fig. 33: CAN wiring diagram....................................................................................................................... 107
Fig. 34: Connection of the CAN bus valve with terminal resistor................................................................ 107
Fig. 35: Connection of the valve to a PC via the CAN bus interface (fieldbus connector X3) .................... 108
Index of figures
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) xi
Fig. 36: Profibus-DP wiring diagram........................................................................................................... 112
Fig. 37: Connection valve Profibus with terminal resistor........................................................................... 112
Fig. 38: EtherCAT wiring diagram............................................................................................................... 115
Fig. 39: Twisted-pair litz wires in Ethernet/EtherCAT cables with M12 connectors.................................... 115
Fig. 40: Connecting a 2-wire transducer to analog input connectors X5, X6 or X7 .................................... 118
Fig. 41: Connecting a 3-wire transducer to analog input connectors X5, X6 or X7 .................................... 118
Fig. 42: Connecting a 4-wire transducer to analog input connectors X5, X6 or X7 .................................... 118
Fig. 43: Connection of the valve to a PC via the service interface (service connector X10) ...................... 130
Fig. 44: MOOG Global Support Logo ......................................................................................................... 150
Fig. 45: Nameplate (example) .................................................................................................................... 154
Fig. 46: Ex nameplate (example)................................................................................................................ 155
Fig. 47: Holes in the mounting surface for D671K series (dimensions in mm and (in)).............................. 165
Fig. 48: Installation drawing for D671K (dimensions in mm and (in)) ......................................................... 168
Fig. 49: Installation drawing for D671K (dimensions in mm and (in)) ......................................................... 170
Fig. 50: Valve D671K, flow-signal characteristic curve............................................................................... 172
Fig. 51: Step response for D671K valves, standard ................................................................................... 173
Fig. 52: Frequency response for D671K valves, standard.......................................................................... 173
Fig. 53: Step response for D671K valves, trimmed .................................................................................... 174
Fig. 54: Frequency response for D671K valves, trimmed........................................................................... 174
Fig. 55: Holes in the mounting surface for the D672K series (dimensions in mm and (in))........................ 176
Fig. 56: Installation drawing for D672K (dimensions in mm and (in)) ......................................................... 179
Fig. 57: Installation drawing for D672K (dimensions in mm and (in)) ......................................................... 181
Fig. 58: Valve D672K, flow-signal characteristic curve............................................................................... 183
Fig. 59: Step response for D672K valves, standard ................................................................................... 184
Fig. 60: Frequency response for D672K valves, standard.......................................................................... 184
Fig. 61: Step response for D672K valves, trimmed .................................................................................... 185
Fig. 62: Frequency response for D672K valves, trimmed........................................................................... 185
Fig. 63: Holes in the mounting surface for the D673K series (dimensions in mm and (in))........................ 187
Fig. 64: Installation drawing for D673K (dimensions in mm and (in)) ......................................................... 190
Fig. 65: Installation drawing for D673K (dimensions in mm and (in)) ......................................................... 192
Fig. 66: Valve D673K, flow-signal characteristic curve............................................................................... 194
Fig. 67: Step response for D673K valves, standard ................................................................................... 195
Fig. 68: Frequency response for D673K valves, standard.......................................................................... 195
Fig. 69: Step response for D673K valves, trimmed .................................................................................... 196
Fig. 70: Frequency response for D673K valves, trimmed........................................................................... 196
Fig. 71: Holes in the mounting surface for the D674K series (dimensions in mm and (in))........................ 198
Fig. 72: Installation drawing for D674K (dimensions in mm and (in)) ......................................................... 201
Fig. 73: Installation drawing for D674K (dimensions in mm and (in)) ......................................................... 203
Fig. 74: Valve D674K, flow-signal characteristic curve............................................................................... 205
Index of figures
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) xii
Fig. 75: Step response for D674K valves, standard ................................................................................... 206
Fig. 76: Frequency response for D674K valves, standard.......................................................................... 206
Fig. 77: Step response for D674K valves, trimmed .................................................................................... 207
Fig. 78: Frequency response for D674K valves, trimmed........................................................................... 207
Fig. 79: Holes in the mounting surface for the D675K series (dimensions in mm and (in))........................ 209
Fig. 80: Installation drawing for D675K (dimensions in mm and (in)) ......................................................... 212
Fig. 81: Installation drawing for D675K (dimensions in mm and (in)) ......................................................... 214
Fig. 82: Valve D675K, flow-signal characteristic curve 1000 l/min ............................................................. 216
Fig. 83: Valve D675K, flow-signal characteristic curve 1500 l/min ............................................................. 217
Fig. 84: Step response for D675K valves, standard, stub shaft spool K10................................................. 218
Fig. 85: Frequency response for D675K valves, standard, stub shaft spool K10 ....................................... 218
Fig. 86: Step response for D675K valves, trimmed, stub shaft spool K10.................................................. 219
Fig. 87: Frequency response for D675K valves, trimmed, stub shaft spool K10 ........................................ 219
Fig. 88: Step response for D675K valves, standard, stub shaft spool K15................................................. 220
Fig. 89: Frequency response for D675K valves, standard, stub shaft spool K15 ....................................... 220
Fig. 90: Step response for D675K valves, trimmed, stub shaft spool K15.................................................. 221
Fig. 91: Frequency response for D675K valves, trimmed, stub shaft spool K15 ........................................ 221
1 General Information Notes on user manual
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 1
1 General Information
1.1 Notes on user manual
Notes on user manualThis user manual refers exclusively to the standard models of the valves of the
Type series D671K to D675K. It includes the most important notes in order to
operate these valves properly and safely.
Ö Chap. "1.3 Intended operation", page 5
Ö Chap. "2.1 Handling in accordance with safety requirements", page 14
The contents of this user manual and the product-related hardware and soft-
ware documentation relevant to the particular application must be read,
understood and followed in all points by each person responsible for machine
planning, assembly and operation before work with and on the valves is
started. This requirement applies in particular to the safety instructions.
Ö Chap. "1.1.2 Completeness", page 2
Ö Chap. "1.4 Selection and qualification of personnel", page 7
Ö Chap. "1.7 Responsibilities", page 10
Ö Chap. "2.1 Handling in accordance with safety requirements", page 14
This user manual has been prepared with great care in compliance with the rel-
evant regulations, state-of-the-art technology and our many years of knowl-
edge and experience, and the full contents have been generated to the best of
the authors' knowledge.
However, the possibility of error remains and improvements are possible.
Please feel free to submit any comments about possible errors and incomplete
information to us.
Special models of the valves custom-made for specific customers,
such as for example valves with axis control function (ACV), are
not explained in this user manual.
Please contact Moog or one of its authorized service centers for in-
formation on these special models.
This user manual is also available in German.
On request, translation into other languages is possible.
1 General Information Notes on user manual
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 2
1.1.1 Subject to change without notice and validity
Subject to change without
notice and validity of
the user manual
The information contained in this user manual is valid and correct at the mo-
ment of release of this version of the user manual. The version number and re-
lease date of this user manual are indicated in the footer.
Changes may be made to this user manual at any time and without notice.
1.1.2 Completeness
Completeness of
the user manual
This user manual is only complete in conjunction with the product-related hard-
ware and software documentation required for the relevant application.
Available documentation:
Ö Chap. "1.2 Supplemental documents", page 5
1.1.3 Storage location
Storage location for
the user manual
This user manual together with all the product-related hardware and software
documentation relevant to the particular application must at all times be kept
close at hand to the valve or the higher-level machine.
1 General Information Notes on user manual
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 3
1.1.4 Typographical conventions
Typographical
conventions
Important
DANGER
warns about an immanent danger to health and life.
Failure to observe this warning can cause severe injuries or
even death.
f Make absolutely sure to heed the measures described to
prevent this danger
WARNING
warns about a possible situation dangerous to health.
Failure to observe this warning can cause severe injuries or
even death.
f Make absolutely sure to heed the measures described to
prevent this danger
CAUTION
warns about a possible situation dangerous to health.
Failure to observe this warning can cause slight injuries.
f Make absolutely sure to heed the measures described to
prevent this danger
CAUTION
warns about possible property and environmental damage.
Failure to observe this warning can cause damage to the prod-
uct, a machine or the environment.
f Make absolutely sure to heed the measures described to
prevent this danger
Identifies important notes that contain usage tips and special useful
information, but no warnings.
1 General Information Notes on user manual
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 4
1.1.5 Structure of the warning notes
In the present user manual, danger symbols draw attention to remaining dan-
gers in the handling of valves that cannot be constructively avoided. The ac-
tions for avoiding danger described must be adhered to.
The warning notes used are structured as follows:
Structure of warning
notes
Explanation structure
of warning notes
• Warning symbol: draws attention to the danger
• Signal word: indicates the severity of the danger
- Meaning of the signal words:
Ö Chap. "1.1.4 Typographical conventions", page 3
• Type of danger: names the type and source of danger
• Consequences: describes the consequences in case of non-observance
• Prevention: specifies the actions to prevent this danger.
• or - Identifies listings
f Identifies an action that must be taken
Ö Identifies references to another chapter, another table or figure
"…" Denotes headings to the chapters or titles of the documents
to which reference is being made
Blue text Identifies hyperlinks
1., 2., … Identifies steps in a procedure that must be performed in con-
secutive order
'...' Identifies parameters for valve software (e.g.: 'Node ID') or
the valve status (e.g.: 'ACTIVE')
SIGNAL WORD
Type of danger
Consequences
f Prevention
1 General Information Supplemental documents
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 5
1.2 Supplemental documents
Supplemental documents
1.3 Intended operation
Intended operation
The valves D671K, D672K, D673K, D674K, and D675K are combined in the
D67XK series. The valves are electrical operating resources for hazardous ar-
eas, protection type "de" (d flameproof enclosure according to IEC 60079-1, e
increased safety according to IEC 60079-7).
Identification of D67XK series:
The valves may only be operated as a component part of a higher-level overall
system, for example in a machine.
They may be used only as control elements to control flow and/or pressure in
hydraulic circuits that regulate position, speed, pressure and power.
The valves are intended for use with mineral-oil-based hydraulic oils. Use with
other media requires our prior approval.
Correct, reliable and safe operation of the valves requires qualified project
planning as well as proper utilization, transportation, storage, mounting, re-
moval, electric and hydraulic connection, start-up, configuration, operation,
cleaning and maintenance.
The supplemental documents mentioned here are not included in
the valves' scope of delivery. They are available as an accessory.
Ö Chap. "12 Accessories, Spare Parts, and Tools", page 222
The PDF files of the supplementing documents can be downloaded
from the following link:
http://www.moog.com/industrial/literature
The valves may be operated exclusively within the framework of
the data and applications specified in the user manual.
Any other or more extensive use is not permitted.
II 2G Ex d e IIC TX Gb D67XK
TX Temperature environment Temperature hydraulic fluid
Sealing material: FKM
T4 -20 °C 60 °C -20 °C 80 °C
T5 -20 °C 55 °C -20 °C 55 °C
T6 -20 °C 45 °C -20 °C 45 °C
Sealing material: HNBR
T4 -20°C 60°C -20°C 75°C
T5 -20°C 55°C -20°C 55°C
T6 -20°C 45°C -20°C 45°C
Sealing material:
T-ECOPUR
Temperature range
down to -40 °C on request
T6 -40 °C 35 °C -40 °C 35 °C
Tab. 1: Marking of D67XK series
1 General Information Intended operation
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 6
The valves may only be started up when the following is ensured:
• The higher-level machine with all its installed components complies with the
latest versions of the relevant national and international regulations, stan-
dards and guidelines (such as, for example, the EU Machinery Directive,
the regulations of the trade association and of TÜV or VDE).
• The valves and all the other installed components are in a technically
fault-free and operationally reliable state.
• No signals that can lead to uncontrolled movements in the machine are
transmitted to the valves.
Intended operation also includes the following:
• Observation of this user manual
• Handling of the valves in accordance with safety requirements
Ö Chap. "2.1 Handling in accordance with safety requirements", page 14
• Adherence to all the inspection and maintenance instructions of the manu-
facturer and the operator of the machine
• Observation of all product-related hardware and software documentation
relevant to the particular application
• Observation of all safety standards of the manufacturer and the operator
of the machine relevant to the particular application
• Observation of all the latest versions of the national and international reg-
ulations, standards and guidelines relevant to the particular application
(such as, the EU Machinery Directive, ATEX directive, the regulations of
the trade association and of TÜV or VDE)
1 General Information Selection and qualification of personnel
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 7
1.4 Selection and qualification of personnel
Selection and qualification
of personnel
Qualified users Qualified users are specialized personnel with the required knowledge and
experience who have been trained to carry out such work. The specialized per-
sonnel must be able to recognize and avert the dangers to which they are
exposed when working with and on the valves.
In particular, these specialized personnel must be authorized to operate,
earth/ground and mark hydraulic and electrical devices, systems and power
circuits in accordance with the standards of safety engineering. Project
planners must be fully conversant with automation safety concepts.
Warranty and liability claims in the event of personal injury or damage to
property are among others excluded if such injury or damage is caused when
the valves are worked on or handled by non-qualified personnel.
Ö Chap. "1.8 Warranty and liability", page 11
CAUTION
Danger of personal injury and damage to property!
Working with and on the valves without the required basic
mechanical, hydraulic, and electrical knowledge may cause
injuries or parts may be damaged.
f Only properly qualified and authorized users may work with
and on the valves.
f Ö Chap. "1.4 Selection and qualification of personnel",
page 7
Maintenance work by the user on explosion proof valves is not per-
mitted. Intervention by third parties will invalidate the ex certifica-
tion.
1 General Information Structural modifications
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 8
1.5 Structural modifications
Structural modifications
Warranty and liability claims for personal injury and damage to property are
excluded if they are caused by unauthorized or improperly performed structural
modifications or other interventions.
Ö Chap. "1.8 Warranty and liability", page 11
DANGER
Danger of explosion!
To guarantee safe operation in hazardous areas:
f Structural modifications of the valves or to accessories may
only be made by MOOG GmbH or by an authorized MOOG
service center.
f Intervention by third parties will invalidate the ex
certification.
CAUTION
Electrostatic discharge!
To guarantee safe operation in hazardous areas.
The additional painting of our explosion-proof valves by third
parties is a structural change. In case of additional painting,
due to the possible accumulation of electrostatic charges, the
corresponding provisions of the DIN EN 60079-0 standard
must be adhered to.
CAUTION
Risk of damage!
The valves and the accessories can be damaged due to struc-
tural changes.
f Due to the complexity of the internal components, structural
changes to the valves and to the accessories may only be
made by MOOG GmbH or an authorized MOOG service
center.
1 General Information Environmental protection
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 9
1.6 Environmental protection
1.6.1 Acoustical Emissions
Environmental protection:
Acoustical Emissions
Generally speaking, the valves do not generate harmful acoustic emissions
when they are used for their intended purpose.
1.6.2 Disposal
Environmental protection
Disposal
It is essential to comply with the relevant national waste disposal regulations
and environmental protection provisions when disposing of valves, spare parts
or accessories, packaging that is no longer needed, hydraulic fluid or auxiliary
materials and substances used for cleaning!
If necessary, the items to be disposed of must be expertly dismantled into indi-
vidual parts, separated into individual materials and placed in the correspond-
ing waste system or earmarked for recycling.
The valve contains among others the following materials:
• Electronic components
• Adhesives and casting compounds
• Parts with electro-plated surfaces
• Permanent-magnet materials
• Hydraulic fluid
• Assorted metals and plastics
WARNING
Damage to hearing!
Depending on the application, significant levels of noise may be
generated when the valves are operated.
f Always protect yourself with hearing protection when
working on the valves.
WARNING
Risk of injury!
In order to prevent injuries and other damage to health, please
observe the following recommendations.
f Wear appropriate safety clothing.
f Wear protective gloves and safety glasses.
f Ö Chap. "2.2 Occupational safety and health", page 15
1 General Information Responsibilities
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 10
1.7 Responsibilities
Responsibility of the
manufacturer and the
operator of the machine
The manufacturer and the operator of the machine are responsible for ensuring
that work with and on the valves and handling of the valves is planned and per-
formed in accordance with the directions given in this user manual and in the
product-related hardware and software documentation relevant to the
particular application.
The manufacturer and the operator of the machine are in particular responsible
for ensuring the following:
• Selection and training of personnel
Ö Chap. "1.4 Selection and qualification of personnel", page 7
• Intended operation
Ö Chap. "1.3 Intended operation", page 5
• Handling in accordance with safety requirements
Ö Chap. "2.1 Handling in accordance with safety requirements", page 14
• Taking and monitoring of the occupational safety and health measures
required for the particular application
Ö Chap. "2.2 Occupational safety and health", page 15
• Observation of all safety standards of the manufacturer and the operator
of the machine relevant to the particular application
• Observation of the latest versions of the relevant national and interna-
tional regulations, standards and guidelines (such as, for example, the
EU Machinery Directive, the regulations of the trade association and of
TÜV or VDE) in the configuration, construction and operation of the
machine with all its installed components
• Installation of suitable safety devices for limiting the pressure at the
hydraulic ports
Ö Chap. "2.5 Pressure limitation", page 16
• Compliance with the preconditions for satisfying the EMC protection
requirements
Ö Chap. "11.2 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)", page 163
• Use of the valves in a technically faultless and operationally safe state
• Prevention of unauthorized or improperly performed structural modifica-
tions, repairs or maintenance
Ö Chap. "1.5 Structural modifications", page 8
Ö Chap. "10 Service", page 140
• Definition and observation of the application-specific inspection and main-
tenance instructions
• Adherence to all the technical data relating to the storage, transportation,
installation, removal, connection, start-up, configuration, operation, clean-
ing, maintenance or elimination of any faults, in particular the ambient
conditions and the data pertaining to the hydraulic fluid used
Ö Chap. "11 Technical Data", page 152
• Proper storage, transportation, installation, removal, connection, start-up,
configuration, operation, cleaning, maintenance, elimination of any faults
or disposal
• Use of suitable and faultless accessories and of suitable and faultless
spare parts
Ö Chap. "12 Accessories, Spare Parts, and Tools", page 222
• Handy and accessible storage of this user manual and of the product-re-
lated hardware and software documentation relevant to the particular ap-
plication
Ö Chap. "1.1.3 Storage location", page 2
1 General Information Warranty and liability
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 11
1.8 Warranty and liability
Our General Terms and Conditions of Sale and Payment always apply. These
are made available to the buyer at the latest on conclusion of the contract.
Exclusion of warranty
and liability
Among other things, warranty and liability claims for personal injury and dam-
age to property are excluded if they are caused by one or more of the following:
• Work with and on the valves carried out by or the valves handled by non-
qualified personnel
Ö Chap. "1.4 Selection and qualification of personnel", page 7
• Non-intended operation
Ö Chap. "1.3 Intended operation", page 5
• Handling not in accordance with safety requirements
Ö Chap. "2.1 Handling in accordance with safety requirements", page 14
• Omission of the occupational safety and health measures required for the
particular application
Ö Chap. "2.2 Occupational safety and health", page 15
• Failure to observe this user manual or the product-related hardware and
software documentation relevant to the particular application
• Failure to observe the safety standards of the manufacturer and the oper-
ator of the machine relevant to the particular application
• Failure to observe the latest versions of the relevant national and interna-
tional regulations, standards and guidelines (such as, for example, the EU
Machinery Directive, the regulations of the trade association and of TÜV
or VDE) in the configuration, construction and operation of the machine
with all its installed components
• Omission of suitable safety devices for limiting the pressure at the hydrau-
lic ports
Ö Chap. "2.5 Pressure limitation", page 16
• Failure to comply with the preconditions for satisfying the EMC protection
requirements
Ö Chap. "11.2 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)", page 163
• Use of the valves in a state that is not technically faultless or not opera-
tionally safe
• Unauthorized or improperly performed structural modifications, repairs or
maintenance
Ö Chap. "1.5 Structural modifications", page 8
Ö Chap. "10 Service", page 140
• Failure to adhere to the inspection and maintenance instructions of the
manufacturer and the operator of machine
• Failure to adhere to all the technical data relating to the storage, transpor-
tation, installation, removal, connection, start-up, configuration, operation,
cleaning, maintenance or elimination of any faults, in particular the ambi-
ent conditions and the data pertaining to the hydraulic fluid used
Ö Chap. "11 Technical Data", page 152
• Improper storage, transportation, installation, removal, connection, start-
up, configuration, operation, cleaning, maintenance, elimination of any
faults or disposal
• Use of unsuitable or defective accessories or of unsuitable or defective
spare parts
Ö Chap. "12 Accessories, Spare Parts, and Tools", page 222
• Catastrophes caused by foreign objects or force majeure
1 General Information Declaration of conformity
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 12
1.9 Declaration of conformity
Declaration of conformity A declaration of conformity in accordance with IEC 60079 for the control valves
of the D67XK series has been created and is depicted in this user manual.
1 General Information Registered marks and trademarks
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 13
1.10 Registered marks and trademarks
Registered marks
and trademarks
Moog and Moog Global Support® are registered trademarks of Moog Inc. and
its subsidiaries.
Microsoft
®
and Windows
®
are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
the Microsoft
®
Corporation in the USA and/or other countries.
All the product and company names mentioned in this user manual
are possibly proprietary names or trademarks of the respective
manufacturers. The use of these names by third parties for their
own purposes may infringe the rights of the manufacturers.
The absence of the symbols ® or ™ does not indicate that the
name is free from trademark protection.
2 Safety Handling in accordance with safety requirements
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 14
2Safety
2.1 Handling in accordance with safety
requirements
Handling in accordance
with safety requirements
In order to ensure that the valves are handled in accordance with safety re-
quirements and operated without faults, it is essential to observe the following:
• All the safety instructions in the user manual
• All the safety instructions in the product-related hardware and software
documentation relevant to the particular application
• All the safety instructions in the safety standards of the manufacturer and
the operator of the machine relevant to the particular application
• All the relevant national and international safety and accident prevention
regulations, standards and guidelines, such as for example the safety reg-
ulations of the trade association, of TÜV or VDE and the ATEX Directive
94/9/EC and ATEX Directive 1999/92/EC, in particular the following stan-
dards pertaining to the safety of machinery:
- EN ISO 12100
- EN 982
- EN 563
- EN 60204
- EN 60079-0
- EN 60079-1
- EN 60079-7
Observing the safety instructions and the safety and accident prevention regu-
lations, standards and guidelines will help to prevent accidents, malfunctions
and damage to property!
It is the responsibility of the manufacturer and the operator of the
machine to ensure that the valves are handled in accordance with
safety requirements.
CAUTION
Danger of personal injury and damage to property due to
unexpected operation!
As in any electronic control system, the failure of certain com-
ponents in valves as well might lead to an uncontrolled and/or
unpredictable operational sequence.
f If automatic control technology is to be used, the user
should, in addition to all the potentially available standards
or guidelines on safety-engineering installations, consult the
manufacturers of the components used in great depth.
2 Safety Occupational safety and health
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 15
2.2 Occupational safety and health
Occupational safety
and health measures
and equipment
DANGER
Risk of poisoning and injury!
Contact with hydraulic fluids can damage your health (e.g. eye
injuries, skin and tissue damage, poisoning in case of inhaling).
f Wear protective gloves and safety glasses.
f If nevertheless hydraulic fluid gets into your eyes or on your
skin, consult a doctor immediately.
f When handling hydraulic fluids, observe the safety
provisions applicable to the hydraulic fluid used.
WARNING
Danger of injury due to falling objects!
Falling objects, such as valves, tools, or accessories, can
cause injury.
f Wear appropriate safety clothing, e.g. safety shoes.
WARNING
Danger of burning!
Valves and hydraulic port lines can become very hot during op-
eration. Fingers and hands can suffer severe burn injuries
when touching the valve or the connection cable.
f Allow the valve and the connection cable to cool off before
contact.
f Wear appropriate safety clothing, e.g. safety gloves.
WARNING
Damage to hearing!
Depending on the application, significant levels of noise may be
generated when the valves are operated.
f Always protect yourself with hearing protection when
working on the valves.
2 Safety General safety instructions
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 16
2.3 General safety instructions
General safety
instructions
2.4 ESD
ESD
2.5 Pressure limitation
Safety devices for
pressure limitation
CAUTION
Risk of damage!
In order to prevent damage to the valves or to the machine,
heed the following points:
f Values specified in the technical data must be adhered to.
f Values specified on the nameplate must be adhered to.
f Ö Chap. "11 Technical Data", page 152
This user manual and the product-related hardware and software
documentation relevant to the particular application must be in-
serted in the machine's operating instructions.
CAUTION
Risk of damage!
Electrical discharges can damage internal device components.
f Protect the valve, accessories and spare parts against static
charging. In particular, avoid touching the connector
contacts.
WARNING
Danger of personal injury and damage to property!
The operation of the valves at pressure that is too high on
the hydraulic connections can cause injuries and damage to
the machine.
f Pressure-limiting valves or other comparable safety
devices, for example, must be installed to limit the pressure
at all the hydraulic ports to the specified maximum operating
pressure. Maximum operating pressure:
Ö Chap. "11 Technical Data", page 152
3 Product Description Function and mode of operation
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 17
3 Product Description
3.1 Function and mode of operation
Function and mode of
operation of the valves
The valves in the D671K to D675K series are two-stage proportional valves
with a direct-operated pilot valve (Fig. 1, D633K with permanent linear motor).
The valves are throttle valves for 2-, 3-, 4-, 5- or even 2/2x2-way applications.
The valves are suitable for electrohydraulic position, speed, pressure and force
control even for high dynamic requirements. They control flow and/or control
pressure.
The valve electronics with a PWM driver end stage and a 24 V direct current
supply are integrated into the valve.
The digital valve electronics are installed in the electronic housing in vibration-
decoupled design so that they are not sensitive to shock and vibration.
For a detailed description of how these work, see
Ö Chap. "3.1.2 Representative depiction of the valve", page 18
Ö Chap. "3.3.1 Flow control (Q-control)", page 33
3.1.1 Pilot pressure
Pilot pressure If large flows are required with a high valve pressure difference, a correspond-
ingly high pilot pressure must be selected to overcome the flow forces.
For reliable function of the valves, we recommend the following pilot pressure
p
x
:
For valves with stub shaft spool p
x
≥ p
P
For valves with standard spool p
x
≥ 0.3 x p
P
whereby
p
P
= pressure on the P port of the valve (pressure supply)
The control pressure specified in the technical data must be adhered to.
Ö Chap. "11.1 Nameplates", Digit 3, Maximal permissible operating pressure,
page 157
Hydraulic safety devices for pressure limitation
Safety devices for
pressure limitation
Excessive pressure at the hydraulic ports damages the valve and can cause
unsafe states in the machine and personal injury.
Pressure-limiting valves or other comparable safety devices, for example, must
be installed to limit the pressure at all the hydraulic ports to the specified maxi-
mum operating pressure.
Ö Chap. "2.5 Pressure limitation"
3 Product Description Function and mode of operation
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 18
3.1.2 Representative depiction of the valve
Fig. 1: Representative depiction of a two-stage proportional valve with directly-operated pilot valve D633K
Item Designation Additional information
1 Analog input connector
X5...X7
The analog input connectors X5…X7 are optionally available.
2 Connector X2 for digital signal
interface
The X2 connector is optionally available.
3 Service connector X10 The X10 service connector is only present for valves without CAN bus interface.
By default, the X10 service connector is not approved for use in hazardous areas, how-
ever on request it is available for use in hazardous areas.
Tightening torque: tighten the screw plug of the service connector with tightening
torque 9.5 Nm / 7 lbf ft!
Ö Chap. "7.10 Service connector X10", page 86
4 Connector X1 Ö Chap. "7.4 Connector X1"
5 Pilot valve D633K Ö Chap. "3.1.3 Permanent magnet linear force motor", page 19
6 Main stage spool
7 Ports Mounting surface:
Mounting pattern D671K (NG10) series Ö Fig. 47, page 165
Mounting pattern D672K (NG16) series Ö Fig. 55, page 176
Mounting pattern D673K (NG25) series Ö Fig. 63, page 187
Mounting pattern D674K (NG25) series Ö Fig. 71, page 198
Mounting pattern D675K (NG32) series Ö Fig. 79, page 209
8LVDT Ö Chap. "3.3.1 Flow control (Q-control)", page 33
9 Digital valve electronics Ö Chap. "3.1.4 Valve electronics and valve software", page 20
10 Fieldbus X3 connector The fieldbus connectors X3 and X4 are only provided on valves with fieldbus interfaces.
Ö Chap. "7.8 Fieldbus connectors X3 and X4", page 77
Ö Chap. "8.3.1 Configuration via the fieldbus interface", page 128
11 Fieldbus X4 connector
12 Ground terminal Ö Chap. "7.12 Protective grounding, equipotential bonding, and shielding"
3 Product Description Function and mode of operation
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 19
3.1.3 Permanent magnet linear force motor
Representative depiction
of the pilot valve with
permanent magnet linear
force motor
Fig. 2: Representative depiction of the permanent magnet linear motor (D633K)
Permanent magnet linear
force motor
A permanent magnet linear force motor is used to drive the valve spool (item 1
in Fig. 2) of the pilot valve.
In contrast to proportional-solenoid drives, the permanent magnet linear force
motor can move the spool from the spring-set position in both working direc-
tions. This results in high actuating power for the spool while simultaneously
providing very good static and dynamic properties.
The permanent magnet linear force motor is a differential motor excited by
permanent magnets. Some of the magnetic force is already provided by the
permanent magnets. The linear force motor's power demand is thus signifi-
cantly lower than is the case with comparable proportional-magnet drives.
The linear force motor drives the valve's spool (item 1, Fig. 2). The spool start-
ing position is determined in the de-energized state by the centering springs
(item 5 in Fig. 2). The linear force motor enables the spool to be deflected from
the starting position in both directions. Here, the actuating power of the linear
force motor is proportional to the coil current.
The high forces of the linear force motor and centering springs effect precise
spool movement even against flow and frictional forces.
Item Designation
1 Spool
2 Bearing
3 Permanent magnet
4Coil
5 Centering springs
6 screw plug
7 Armature
3 Product Description Function and mode of operation
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 20
3.1.4 Valve electronics and valve software
Integrated digital valve
electronics and valve
software
The digital drive and control electronics are integrated in the valve.
These valve electronics contain a microprocessor system that executes all the
important functions via the valve software it contains. The digital electronics
enable valve control that is both precise and repeatable across the full working
range regardless of temperature.
The valve electronics can assume device- and drive-specific functions, such as
command signal ramps or dead band compensation.
This can relieve the strain on external machine control and if necessary field-
bus communication.
Ö Chap. "3.5 Configuration software", page 47
Ö Chap. "8.3 Configuration of the valves", page 128
3 Product Description Function and mode of operation
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 21
3.1.4.1 Valve status
Valve status The valve's device status is referred to as the valve status.
The valve status can be set or interrogated via the service or fieldbus interface
in the valve software. Setting and interrogation can be performed for example
with the Ö Chap. "3.6 Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software",
page 48.
Fail-safe states and fail-safe events:
Ö Chap. "3.2.1.3 Mechanical fail-safe state", page 27
Ö Chap. "3.2.3 Fail-safe events", page 28
Ö Chap. "11.1 Nameplates", Digit 6, Fail-safe variant, page 159
CAUTION
Danger of personal injury and damage to property!
The 'NOT READY' valve status is caused only by a serious,
non-rectifiable fault.
f If the 'NOT READY' valve status occurs, the valve must be
sent to MOOG GmbH or one of our authorized MOOG
service center for inspection.
Valve status Explanation
'ACTIVE' The valve is ready for operation and is in closed-loop control operation.
'HOLD' The valve is ready for operation and is in the electrical fail-safe state on
account of a control command.
The electrical fail-safe spool position is a closed loop parameterized
setting.
Ö Chap. "3.2.2 Electrical fail-safe function", page 28
'FAULT HOLD' The valve is ready for operation and is in the electrical fail-safe state on
account of a fault reaction.
The electrical fail-safe spool position is a closed loop parameterized set-
ting.
Ö Chap. "3.2.2 Electrical fail-safe function", page 28
'DISABLED' The valve electronics are ready for operation and the valve is in
the mechanical fail-safe state on account of a control command.
Ö Chap. "3.2.1.3 Mechanical fail-safe state", page 27
Internal parameters can be set and interrogated.
The current to the permanent magnet linear force motor is switched off.
'FAULT DISABLED' The valve electronics are ready for operation and the valve is in
the mechanical fail-safe state on account of a fault reaction.
Internal parameters can be set and interrogated.
Ö Chap. "3.2.1.3 Mechanical fail-safe state", page 27
The current to the permanent magnet linear force motor is switched off.
'INIT' The valve is switched off, is in the mechanical fail-safe state and can be
configured via the service or fieldbus interface.
Ö Chap. "3.2.1.3 Mechanical fail-safe state", page 27
'NOT READY' The valve is not ready for operation and is in the mechanical fail-safe
state on account of a serious non-rectifiable fault.
Ö Chap. "3.2.1.3 Mechanical fail-safe state", page 27
Tab. 2: Valve status
3 Product Description Function and mode of operation
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 22
3.1.5 Signal interfaces
The valves have a connector, X1, with model-dependent analog and digital
inputs/outputs. The connectors are an explosion-proof model.
Ö Chap. "3.1.5.1 Connector X1", page 23
Pin assignment of the connector X1:
Ö Chap. "7.4.1 Pin assignment of connector X1", page 69
Depending on the model, the valves can also have an isolated fieldbus inter-
face (connectors X3 and X4) and/or a service interface (service connector
X10).
Ö Chap. "3.1.5.2 Fieldbus connectors X3 and X4", page 24
Ö Chap. "3.1.5.3 Service connector X10", page 24
WARNING
Danger of explosion!
To guarantee safe operation in hazardous areas:
f For mounting and removal of the explosion-proof
connectors as well as operation of the valve, the notes and
instructions in the "Explosion-proof connectors eXLink,
CEAG" operating instructions must absolutely be adhered
to.
3 Product Description Function and mode of operation
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 23
Interfaces for activation
signals
3.1.5.1 Connector X1
Activation of the Valve
Command
Valves without field bus interfaces must be commanded with an analog
signal(s) via connector X1.
Valves with field bus interfaces can be controlled either with analog command
signals via connector X1 or with digital signals via the field bus interface (con-
nectors X3 and X4).
Ö Chap. "3.4 Control", page 39
Analog command inputsDifferent signal types for analog command inputs for flow control can, depend-
ing on the model, be selected in the valve.
Ö Chap. "3.4.1 Signal types for set-point and actual value", page 40
Analog actual value
output
The valves have an analog actual value output:
Ö Chap. "3.4.2 Analog actual value output", page 46
Enable input The valves have a digital enable input.
Ö Chap. "3.4.3 Digital enable input", page 46
Pin assignment of connector X1:
Ö Chap. "7.4.1 Pin assignment of connector X1", page 69
For the standard model of the valve, the service interface is not
suitable for use in hazardous areas. On request, the service inter-
face is available in an explosion-proof model.
Interfaces
Connector
X1
Fieldbus
connectors
X3 and X4
Service
connector
X10
Valves without fieldbus interface • - •
1)
1)
The valves can be started up and configured via the CAN bus or service interface with the Moog
Valve and Pump Configuration Software.
Ö Chap. "8.3.1.2 Configuration with the Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software",
page 129
Valves with CAN bus interface ••
1
-
Valves with Profibus interface •• •
1
Valves with EtherCAT interface •• •
1
Tab. 3: Existing signal interfaces
It is necessary when ordering the valve to establish whether a field-
bus interface is to be integrated and if necessary one of the above-
mentioned fieldbus interfaces is to be selected.
3 Product Description Function and mode of operation
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 24
3.1.5.2 Fieldbus connectors X3 and X4
Fieldbus connectors X3
and X4
Valves with field bus interfaces are started up, activated, monitored and config-
ured via the field bus interface (connectors X3 and X4).
Ö Chap. "8.3.1 Configuration via the fieldbus interface", page 128
To reduce the amount of wiring, the fieldbus interface is provided with two con-
nectors on the valve. The valves can thus be directly looped into the fieldbus,
i.e. without the use of external T-pieces.
Valves with CAN bus interfaces can be started up and configured via the CAN
bus interface (field bus connector X3) with the Moog Valve and Pump
Configuration Software.
Ö Chap. "8.3.1.2 Configuration with the Moog Valve and Pump Configuration
Software", page 129
Plug assignment of the fieldbus connectors X3 and X4:
Ö Chap. "7.8 Fieldbus connectors X3 and X4", page 77
3.1.5.3 Service connector X10
Service connector X10 Valves without CAN bus interfaces can be started up and configured via the
service interface (service connector-X10) with the Moog Valve and Pump
Configuration Software.
Ö Chap. "8.3.2 Configuration via the service interface", page 130
WARNING
Danger of explosion!
To guarantee safe operation in hazardous areas, the following
points must be heeded:
f In its standard model with screw plug, the service connector
X10 is not approved for use in hazardous areas.
f For mounting of the screw plug of the service connector
X10, it must be observed that the gasket and the threads of
the screw plug as well as the threads in the electronic
housing of the valve are not damaged.
f In case of damage to the screw plug for the service
connector X10 or the threads in the electronic housing, the
valve must not be operated.
f Tightening torque screw plug:
Ö Chap. "3.1.2 Representative depiction of the valve",
page 18
For the standard model of the valve, the service interface is not
suitable for use in hazardous areas. On request, the service inter-
face is available in an explosion-proof model.
3 Product Description Safety function/fail-safe
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 25
3.2 Safety function/fail-safe
Fail-safe functions
The valve fail-safe functions increase the safety for the user if, for example
the valve supply voltage fails or the pilot pressure p
X
drops.
There are two different fail-safe functions: mechanical/hydraulic and electrical.
Ö Chap. "3.2.1 Mechanical fail-safe function", page 26
The valve can be rendered in the fail-safe state by different events.
Ö Chap. "3.2.3 Fail-safe events", page 28
Mechanical/hydraulic
fail-safe state
The mechanical/hydraulic valve fail-safe state is denoted by the fact that
the spool of the main stage is in a defined spring-determined position.
Ö Chap. "3.2.1.3 Mechanical fail-safe state", page 27
Electrical fail-safe state The electrical valve fail-safe state is denoted by the fact that the valve is in
the 'HOLD' or 'FAULT HOLD' valve status and a preset command signal is
corrected by suitable positioning of the main stage spool.
It is essential to ensure at the machine end that these fail-safe states result in
a safe state in the machine.
The valve must be restarted after it has adopted the fail-safe state.
Ö Chap. "3.2.4 Restarting the valve", page 31
CAUTION
Risk of injury!
In order to prevent injuries and other damage to health during
safety-critical operation, please observe the following recom-
mendations.
Ö Chap. "2.1 Handling in accordance with safety require-
ments", page 14
CAUTION
Risk of injury!
In order to prevent injuries and other damage to health during
the design, building, and operation of the machine with all in-
stalled components, please heed the following instructions.
f The manufacturer and operator of the machine are
responsible for making sure that for safety-critical use,
relevant safety standards in the latest version, which serve
to avoid damage, are heeded.
f It is vital among other things to ensure that both the
individual components and the complete machine can be
rendered in a safe state.
3 Product Description Safety function/fail-safe
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 26
3.2.1 Mechanical fail-safe function
Mechanical fail-safe
functions
The vales in the D67XK series are offered with various fail-safe functions. The
behavior of the valve in the fail-safe function depends on the fail-safe function
selected, the pilot valve, as well as the respective status of pilot pressure and
control pressure of the 4/2-way valve.
The following fail-safe functions are available:
• Fail-safe function F
• Fail-safe function D
• Fail-safe function H
• Fail-safe function K
3.2.1.1 Valves with fail-safe functions F, D and M
Fail-safe functions
F, D and M
In the case of the fail-safe functions F, D and M, the mechanical setting of the
linear force motor or corresponding centering springs at the factory establishes
which position the spool assumes in the mechanical fail-safe state.
Position of main stage spool: Ö Tab. 2, page 21
The installation drawing/dimensions of the valves are type-dependent
Ö Chap. "11 Technical Data", page 152
Hydraulic symbols:
Ö Chap. "3.3.2 Valve configurations and hydraulic symbols", page 34
The fail-safe function must be specified when the valve is ordered.
To see which fail-safe function is integrated into the valve, see the
6th place in the type designation.
Ö Chap. "3.2.1.4 Fail-safe identification", page 27
3 Product Description Safety function/fail-safe
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 27
3.2.1.2 Valves with fail-safe functions H and K
Valves with fail-safe
functions H and K
(fail-safe valves)
The valves with fail-safe function H and K with 4/2-way seat valves are called
fail-safe valves.
For applications with proportional valves, for which certain safety specifications
apply to prevent danger to man and machine, it must be possible to assume
a corresponding spool setting for a safe state.. Therefore, a fail-safe model is
available for the multi-stage proportional valves.
After external triggering, this fail-safe function applies a defined spool pressure:
safe middle position or open position AtT or BtT.
For fail-safe valves in the D67XK series, both control spaces of the main stage
are short-circuited hydraulically via a 4/2-way valve to move the spool of the
main state to the safe middle position. The spring-set force moves the spool
into the safe fail-safe position.
For fail-safe valves it is possible to monitor whether the main spool is in the
safe position:
Installation drawing/dimensions:
Ö Chap. "11 Technical Data", page 152
Hydraulic symbols:
Ö Chap. "3.3.2 Valve configurations and hydraulic symbols", page 34
3.2.1.3 Mechanical fail-safe state
The valve is in the mechanical fail-safe state when the main stage spool is in
a defined spring-determined position.
The spool positions of the main stage in case of failure of the valve electronics
or of the control pressure of the 4/2-way valve are described in the tables about
the fail-safe function in the technical data.
Ö Tab. 30, page 159
Type designation:
Ö Chap. "11.1 Nameplates", Digit 6, Fail-safe variant, page 159
3.2.1.4 Fail-safe identification
Fail-safe identificationThe fail-safe identification, i.e. the 6th position in the valve type designation of
the proportional or servo valve, indicates which mechanical fail-safe function is
integrated in the valve.
Type designation:
Ö Chap. "11.1 Nameplates", Digit 6, Fail-safe variant, page 159
3.2.1.5 spool identification
spool identification The spool identification, i.e. the 4th position in the valve type designation, indi-
cates which spool version is integrated in the valve.
Type designation:
Ö Chap. "11.1 Nameplates", Digit 4, Spool, page 158
All other combinations of pressure and supply voltage give rise to
an undefined main stage spool position.
3 Product Description Safety function/fail-safe
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 28
3.2.2 Electrical fail-safe function
Electrical fail-safe
function
After adopting the 'HOLD' or 'FAULT HOLD' valve status, the valve is in the
electrical fail-safe state and a preset command signal is corrected by suitable
positioning of the main stage spool.
The command signal can be set or interrogated via the service or fieldbus inter-
face in the valve software. Setting and interrogation can be performed for
example with the Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software.
Command signals that may be applied from an external source via the fieldbus
interface or the analog inputs are ignored in the 'HOLD' and 'FAULT HOLD'
valve states.
3.2.3 Fail-safe events
Fail-safe events The valve is rendered in the fail-safe state in response to the fail-safe events
set out below.
The valve must be restarted after it has adopted the fail-safe state.
Ö Chap. "3.2.4 Restarting the valve", page 31
CAUTION
Danger of personal injury and damage to property!
The 'NOT READY' valve status is caused only by a serious,
non-rectifiable fault.
f If the 'NOT READY' valve status occurs, the valve must be
sent to MOOG GmbH or one of our authorized MOOG
service center for inspection.
Fail-safe event
Fail-safe
state Cause of adoption of fail-safe state
Mechan.
Electr.
External
event
Settable
fault reac-
tion
Control
command
Shutdown/failure of the supply
voltage
••
Signals on the enable input of
the X1 connector
(not possible for p/Q function)
••
Drop in the pilot pressure p
X
••
Adoption
by valve of
valve status
'HOLD' ••
'FAULT HOLD' ••
'DISABLED' ••
'FAULT DISABLED' ••
'INIT' ••
'NOT READY' ••
Serious,
non-rectifi-
able fault
Tab. 4: Fail-safe events
3 Product Description Safety function/fail-safe
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 29
3.2.3.1 Shutdown/failure of the supply voltage
Fail-safe due to
shutdown/failure of
the supply voltage
The valves with fail-safe functions F and D are rendered in the mechanical fail-
safe state when the supply voltage is shut down or fails.
With the pilot pressure applied, the mechanical setting of the pilot valve defines
which end face of the main stage spool is pressurized with pilot pressure and
thus which position the spool assumes in the hydraulic fail-safe state.
Position of main stage spool:
Ö Tab. 30, page 159
3.2.3.2 Signals at the enable input
Fail-safe due to signals
at the enable input
Switching of the valve to fail-safe state can also be triggered by a correspond-
ing signal at the enable input of connector X1. Signals lower than 6.5 V at the
enable input switch the valve to fail-safe state.
Ö Chap. "3.4.3 Digital enable input", page 46
(Not for valves with pQ function.)
Pin assignment of connector X1:
Ö Chap. "7.4.1 Pin assignment of connector X1", page 69
3.2.3.3 Drop in the pilot pressure p
X
Fail-safe due to drop in
the pilot pressure p
X
After the pilot pressure p
X
has dropped below
1)
(depressurized), the main
stage spool is pushed by the spring restoring force into the defined spring-de-
termined center position denoting the mechanical fail-safe state of the valves.
Position of main stage spool:
Ö Tab. 30, page 159
CAUTION
Risk of damage!
After the supply voltage to the valve is shut down, fails or drops
below 18 V, the linear force motor is no longer activated by the
valve electronics.
f The cause of the fault must be determined on the machine
side and if necessary, eliminated.
1)
Pilot pressure values:
Ö Chap. "11.1 Nameplates", Digit 3, Maximal permissible operating pressure,
page 157
Ö Chap. "11.1 Nameplates", Digit 6, Fail-safe variant, page 159
3 Product Description Safety function/fail-safe
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 30
3.2.3.4 Settable fault reaction
Mechanical fail-safe state
due to fault reaction
Mechanical fail-safe state due to fault reaction
Adoption by the valve of the 'FAULT DISABLED' valve status and thus of the
mechanical fail-safe state can be triggered by different events, such as e.g. the
supply voltage dropping below 18 V.
It is possible to set in the valve software the event(s) for which the valve is ren-
dered in the 'FAULT DISABLED' valve status.
The setting can be made or interrogated via the service or fieldbus interface in
the valve software. Setting and interrogation can be performed for example
with the Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software.
Ö Chap. "3.6 Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software", page 48
The transition of the valve into the 'NOT READY' valve status and therefore
into the mechanical fail-safe state is caused by a serious, non-rectifiable fault.
Electrical fail-safe state
due to fault reaction
Electrical fail-safe state due to fault reaction
The transition of the valve into the 'FAULT HOLD' valve status and therefore
into the electrical fail-safe state can be initiated by different events, such as
e.g. a fault in the electric cable
It is possible to set in the valve software the event(s) for which the valve is ren-
dered in the 'FAULT HOLD' valve status.
The valve state can be set or interrogated via the service or fieldbus interface
in the valve software. Setting and interrogation can be performed for example
with the Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software.
Ö Chap. "3.6 Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software", page 48
3.2.3.5 Control commands
Control commands The transition of the valve into the 'HOLD', 'DISABLED' and 'INIT' valve states
can be initiated by a control command.
CAUTION
Danger of personal injury and damage to property!
The 'NOT READY' valve status is caused only by a serious,
non-rectifiable fault.
f If the 'NOT READY' valve status occurs, the valve must be
sent to MOOG GmbH or one of our authorized MOOG
service center for inspection.
3 Product Description Safety function/fail-safe
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 31
3.2.4 Restarting the valve
Restarting the valve
After shutdown/failure of the supply voltage:
After the transition of the valve into a fail-safe state on account of a shut-
down/failure of the supply voltage to the valve, it will be necessary to restart the
valve by applying the supply voltage in accordance with the technical data.
If necessary, the valve must be returned to the 'ACTIVE' valve status.
After application of an enable signal lower than 6.5 V:
After the transition of the valve into a fail-safe state on account of the applica-
tion of an enable signal lower than 6.5 V, it will be necessary to restart the
valve by applying an enable signal between 8.5 V and 32 V.
After a drop in the pilot pressure p
X
:
After the valve has adopted the fail-safe state on account of a drop in the pilot
pressure p
X
, it will be necessary to restart the valve by applying a higher pilot
pressure.
Pilot pressure values:
Ö Chap. "11.1 Nameplates", Digit 3, Maximal permissible operating pressure, page 157
Ö Chap. "11.1 Nameplates", Digit 6, Fail-safe variant, page 159
WARNING
Danger of injury due to unexpected machine movements!
In order to avoid injuries and other risks to health on start-up of
the valve after a transition into the fail-safe state, please follow
the following instructions.
f The cause of the fault must be determined on the machine
side and if necessary, eliminated.
f It is also necessary to ensure that restarting the valve does
not give rise to unintentional or dangerous states in the
machine.
3 Product Description Hydraulics
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 32
After transition of the valve into of the 'FAULT DISABLED' or
'FAULT HOLD' valve status:
After transition of the valve into the fail-safe state on account of a transition into
the 'FAULT DISABLED' or 'FAULT HOLD' valve status, it can be restarted as
follows:
• Acknowledge the fault via the service or fieldbus interface and return
the valve to the 'ACTIVE' valve status.
• Set the supply voltage for at least 1 second under defined conditions to
zero and then restore the supply voltage in accordance with the technical
data. If necessary, the valve must be returned to the 'ACTIVE' valve sta-
tus.
After transition of the valve into the 'HOLD', 'DISABLED' or 'INIT' valve
status:
After the transition of the valve into the fail-safe state on account of adoption of
the 'DISABLED' or 'INIT' valve status, it can be restarted as follows:
• Return the valve to the 'ACTIVE' valve status.
• Apply an enable signal less than 6.5 V, then apply an enable signal be-
tween 8.5 V and 32 V and return the valve to the 'ACTIVE' valve status.
• For valves without fieldbus interface: set the supply voltage for at least
1 second under defined conditions to zero and then restore the supply
voltage in accordance with the technical data.
3.3 Hydraulics
CAUTION
Danger of personal injury and damage to property due to
spraying fluids!
In order to ensure proper operation of the valves and of the
machine, heed the following:
f The correct configuration of the valve with regard to flow
and pressure is required.
3 Product Description Hydraulics
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 33
3.3.1 Flow control (Q-control)
Flow control (Q-control):
Regulation of the position
of main stage spool
Fig. 3: Flow control (Q-control) block diagram
In this operational mode the position of the main stage spool is controlled.
The predefined command signal corresponds to a particular spool position.
The position of the spool is proportional to the command signal.
The command signal (command position for the main stage spool) is transmit-
ted to the valve electronics. The actual spool position is measured with a posi-
tion transducer (LVDT) and transmitted to the valve electronics.
Deviations between the predefined command position and the measured ac-
tual position of the spool are corrected. The valve electronics activate the pilot
valve, which positions the spool accordingly. This process sets a specific flow.
The position command can be influenced by means of parameters in the valve
software (e.g., linearization, ramping, dead band, sectionally defined amplifica-
tion, correction of the zero position).
The parameters can be set or interrogated via the service or field bus interface
in the valve software. Setting and interrogation can be performed for example
with the Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software.
The flow rate to be set depends not only on the position of the spool, but also
on the pressure difference ∆p at the individual control lands.
Ö Chap. "3.5 Configuration software", page 47
Ö Chap. "4.1 Flow diagram (4-way operation)", page 49
Characteristic curves
Ö Chap. "11 Technical Data", page 152
Command position
Demand value generator
Spool position controller
Spool Position transducer (LVDT)
Actual position
Control
monitoring
Q-function integrated into the valve
3 Product Description Hydraulics
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 34
3.3.2 Valve configurations and hydraulic symbols
Valve configurations Depending on the model, the following valve configurations are possible:
• 2-way operation
Ö Chap. "3.3.2.1 2-way and 2/2-way operation", page 34
• 3-way operation
Ö Chap. "3.3.2.2 4-way and 3-way operation", page 35
• 4-way operation
Ö Chap. "3.3.2.2 4-way and 3-way operation", page 35
• 5-way operation
Ö Chap. "3.3.2.3 5-way operation", page 36
• 2/2-way operation
Ö Chap. "3.3.2.1 2-way and 2/2-way operation", page 34
3.3.2.1 2-way and 2/2-way operation
2-way and 2/2-way
operation
Hydraulic symbols of the valves D671K to D675K:
Ö Chap. " Technical data D671K to D675K, overview", page 152
Fail-safe functions:
Ö Chap. "3.2.1.1 Valves with fail-safe functions F, D and M", page 26
With 2-way and 2/2x2-way operation the valves can be used to control the flow
in one direction (used as throttle valves).
With 2/2x2-way operation the valve can be used in 2-way applications for
greater flows.
It is necessary to connect ports P with B and A with T externally for this
purpose.
Ö Chap. " Technical data D671K to D675K, overview", page 152
The flow directions that are depicted under "Way functions and hy-
draulic symbols" in the technical data of the corresponding valve
must be adhered to.
For the 2/2-way function, the ports X and Y must always be con-
nected.
Ö Chap. "3.3.3.1 Pilot pressure port X", page 37
Ö Chap. "3.3.3.2 Leakage port Y", page 37
3 Product Description Hydraulics
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 35
3.3.2.2 4-way and 3-way operation
4-way- and 3-way function
(Fail-Safe-Function
MandW)
Hydraulic symbols of the valves D671K to D675K:
Ö Chap. " Technical data D671K to D675K, overview", page 152
Fail-safe functions:
Ö Chap. "3.2.1.1 Valves with fail-safe functions F, D and M", page 26
Ö Chap. "3.2.1.2 Valves with fail-safe functions H and K", page 27
With 4-way operation the valves can be used to control the flow in ports A
and B (used as throttle valves).
Port A or B must be closed in order to obtain 3-way operation.
The flow directions that are depicted under "Way functions and hy-
draulic symbols" in the technical data of the corresponding valve
must be adhered to.
For D671 valves in the 4-way version and with
Q
N
> 60 l/min, the second tank connection T
1
is required.
Information about whether the valve is delivered with externally or
internally-connected leakage connection Y and whether leakage
connection Y must be used:
Ö Chap. "3.3.3.2 Leakage port Y", page 37
3 Product Description Hydraulics
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 36
3.3.2.3 5-way operation
5-way operation
(fail-safe function F)
Fig. 4: 5-way operation with mechanical fail-safe function F (hydraulic symbol)
Hydraulic symbols for the D671K valve:
Ö Chap. "11.3 Technical data D671K – ISO 4401-05/NG10", page 164
Fail-safe functions:
Ö Chap. "3.2.1.1 Valves with fail-safe functions F, D and M", page 26
Ö Chap. "3.2.1.2 Valves with fail-safe functions H and K", page 27
Example NG10
P
T
AB
1
P
The flow directions that are depicted under "Way functions and hy-
draulic symbols" in the technical data of the corresponding valve
must be adhered to.
Information about whether the valve is delivered with externally or
internally-connected leakage connection Y and whether leakage
connection Y must be used:
Ö Chap. "3.3.3.2 Leakage port Y", page 37
CAUTION
Danger of personal injury and damage to property!
For the D671K valves in the 5-way version type B80...,
T
1
becomes P
1
3 Product Description Hydraulics
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 37
3.3.3 Control type ports X and Y
3.3.3.1 Pilot pressure port X
Pilot pressure port X If the system pressure is subject to heavy fluctuations, external actuation via pi-
lot pressure port X delivers better control precision.
3.3.3.2 Leakage port Y
Leakage port Y The leakage connection Y is present in all series of the D67XK series; it must
be used in the following cases:
• always with 2/2x2-way operation
• if high pressure peaks occur in the tank connection T (e.g. caused by
other switchable valves in the hydraulic circuit) - without use of the leak-
age connection Y, they will cause damage to the valve.
The maximum permissible values are specified under "Hydraulic data" in
the technical data for the corresponding valve:
Ö Chap. " Technical data D671K to D675K, overview", page 152
3.3.3.3 Pilot identification
Pilot identification The pilot identification, i.e. the 7th position in the valve type designation, indi-
cates whether pilot pressure port X and leakage port Y are internally or exter-
nally connected.
Type designation:
Ö Chap. "11.1 Nameplates", Digit 7, Hydraulic control type, Pilot pressure port
X and leakage port Y, page 160
The valve can be supplied with either an externally or an internally
connected pilot pressure port X.
When the valve is ordered, it is specified how this connection is
made.
Whether the pilot pressure connection X is used can be read from
the 7th digit of the variant designation.
Ö Chap. "11.1 Nameplates", Digit 7, Hydraulic control type, Pilot
pressure port X and leakage port Y, page 160
The valve can be supplied with either an externally or an internally
connected pilot pressure port Y.
When the valve is ordered, it is specified how this connection is
made.
Whether the pilot pressure connection Y is used can be read from
the 7th digit of the variant designation.
Ö Chap. "11.1 Nameplates", Digit 7, Hydraulic control type, Pilot
pressure port X and leakage port Y, page 160
3 Product Description Hydraulics
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 38
3.3.4 Electrical and hydraulic zero positions
Electrical and hydraulic
zero positions of the spool
The electrical zero position of the spool is set if the command signal input for
the spool position is equal to zero.
The hydraulic zero position is the position of the spool in which the pressures,
when the spool is symmetrical, are equal in the two sealed control ports.
The hydraulic zero position is model-dependent.
Fig. 5: Examples of the electrical and hydraulic zero positions of different spools in the flow signal
characteristic curve
The hydraulic zero position of the spool is not necessarily identical
to the electrical zero position.
Spool with zero overlap
Spool with positive over-
lap
Command signal
[%]
Command signal
[%]
Command signal
[%]
Q
Q
N
------------
[%]
Q
Q
N
------------
[%]
Q
Q
N
------------
[%]
Item Designation
1 Electrical zero position of the spool
2 Hydraulic zero position of the spool
3 Spool overlap
3 Product Description Control
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 39
3.4 Control
Activation of the Valve
Command
Valves without field bus interfaces must be commanded with an analog
signal(s) via connector X1.
Valves with field bus interfaces can be controlled either with analog command
signals via connector X1 or with digital signals via the field bus interface (con-
nectors X3 and X4).
Ö Chap. "3.1.5 Signal interfaces", page 22
Ö Chap. "3.4.1 Signal types for set-point and actual value", page 40
DANGER
Danger!
Danger due to electric shock.
f Only use SELV/PELV power supplies to supply the valve.
3 Product Description Control
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 40
3.4.1 Signal types for set-point and actual value
Signal types for analog
set-point value input and
actual value output
Valves without field bus interfaces must be commanded with an analog
signal(s) via connector X1.
Depending on the variant, various signal types can be configured for the ana-
log flow function input signal (input) and for the analog spool position signal
(actual value output) applied to the X1 connector..
Ö Tab. 6, page 41
The signal type can be set via the service or fieldbus interface in the valve soft-
ware. Setting and interrogation can be performed for example with the Moog
Valve and Pump Configuration Software.
Ö Chap. "3.6 Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software", page 48
Benefits of the different
signal types for analog
command inputs
Basically, activation of the command inputs with differential signals is to be pre-
ferred. If the command signal cannot be transmitted differentially, the reference
point of the command input at the valve must be connected to ground (GND).
Ö Chap. "7.14.1 Single-ended command signals", page 103
Because current inputs have a lower input resistance than voltage inputs and
are therefore less prone to interference, a current signal is preferable to a volt-
age signal.
Pin assignment of connector X1:
Ö Chap. "7.4.1 Pin assignment of connector X1", page 69
Configuration: Ö Chap. "8.3 Configuration of the valves", page 128
Signal types for
command signal Benefits
±10 V Simple measurement of the signal, e.g. with an oscilloscope
±10 mA In contrast to the 4–20 mA signal type, less power is required
with low command signals;
4 to 20 mA Detection of fault in the electrical line and large transmission
lengths are possible
Tab. 5: Benefits of the different signal types for analog command inputs
It is necessary when ordering the valve to establish which signal
type for the analog command inputs is to be set in the valve on
delivery.
Which signal type has been set in the valve on delivery can be
ascertained from the signal type identification, i.e. the 10th position
in the type designation.
Ö Chap. "11.1 Nameplates", Digit 10, Command signal for 100 %
spool stroke, page 161
Which signal type is currently set can be ascertained for example
with the Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software.
All current and voltage inputs are floating but can be connected to
ground (single-ended) by means of external wiring.
3 Product Description Control
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 41
3.4.1.1 Signal type identification
Signal type identification The signal type identification, i.e. the 10th position in the valve type designa-
tion, indicates which signal type for the command inputs is set in the valve
when it is delivered.
The signal type of the command signal input applies in combination with the
signal type of the spool position signal (actual value output).
The analog command signal I
in
or U
in
is the flow command value input.
The stroke position signal (actual output value) I
out
or U
out
is proportional to the
mechanical position of the spool.
Ö Chap. "7 Electrical connection", page 61
Type designation:
Ö Chap. "11.1 Nameplates", Digit 10, Command signal for 100 % spool stroke,
page 161
1 2 3456789101112131415 16
••••••••••
•
2
–
• • •• ••
Signal type identification
Version
Command signals for 100 % spool stroke
Command signal
(X1, input contacts 1 and 2)
Stroke position signal
(X1, output contacts 4 and 7)
D ±10 V 2–10 V
E4
–20 mA 4–20 mA
M ±10 V 4–20 mA
X ±10 mA 4–20 mA
9 Fieldbus Fieldbus
Y Others on request.
Tab. 6: Signal types command value and spool position signal in the type designation
The type designation and the signal type indicate the valve's deliv-
ery status.
By changing the valve configuration, it is possible to change the
valve in such a way that it no longer conforms to this status.
Which signal type is currently set can be ascertained for example
with the Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software.
3 Product Description Control
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 42
3.4.1.2 Flow control command inputs
Signal type for the command input: ±10 mA
Floating flow control
command input ±10 V
Fig. 6: Floating flow control command input ±10 V (circuit and characteristic curve)
The spool stroke is proportional to the input voltage U
in
.
If there is no differential command input source available, the reference point of
the command inputs must be connected to 0 V of the command input source
(GND).
The operating direction of the command signal can be altered by modifying the
parameters of the valve software.
Signal type for the command input: ±10 V
Floating flow control
command input ±10 mA
Fig. 7: Floating flow control command input ±10 mA (circuit and characteristic curve)
The spool stroke is proportional to the input current Iin.
Spool stroke [%]
Command signal [V]
Pin 6
Pin 7
Pin 1
Pin 2
in
U
in
10V
+
Valve
U
in
= 10 V 100 % spool stroke, valve opening: PtAandBtT
U
in
= 0 V Spool in electrical zero position
U
in
= -10 V 100 % spool stroke, valve opening: PtBandAtT
CAUTION
Danger of personal injury and damage to property!
The potential difference of each input to GND must be between
-15 V and 32 V.
f Only use SELV/PELV power supplies.
f Heed the correct dimensioning of the cables.
Spool stroke [%]
Command signal [mA]
Pin 6
I
in
Pin 7
Pin 1
Pin 2
in
10mA
+
_
Valve
I
in
= 10 mA 100 % spool stroke, valve opening: PtA and BtT
I
in
= 0 mA Spool in electrical zero position
I
in
= - 10 mA 100 % spool stroke, valve opening: PtB and AtT
3 Product Description Control
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 43
CAUTION
Risk of valve electronic damage!
The input current I
in
of the command inputs with current input
signal must be between -25 mA and 25 mA!
Voltage levels in excess of 5 V may cause the destruction of
the integrated valve electronics.
f Only use SELV/PELV power supplies.
f Heed the correct dimensioning of the cables.
3 Product Description Control
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 44
If there is no floating command input source available, the reference point of
the command inputs must be connected to 0 V of the command input source
(GND).
The operating direction of the command signal can be altered by modifying the
parameters of the valve software.
Signal type for the command input: 4–20 mA
Floating flow control
command input 4–20 mA
Fig. 8: Floating flow control command input 4–20 mA (circuit and characteristic curve)
The spool stroke is proportional to the input current Iin.
CAUTION
Danger of personal injury and damage to property!
The potential difference of each input to GND must be between
-15 V and 32 V.
f Only use SELV/PELV power supplies.
f Heed the correct dimensioning of the cables.
Spool stroke [%]
Command signal [mA]
Pin 6
Pin 7
Pin 1
Pin 2
in
U
in
10V
+
_
Valve
I
in
= 20 mA 100 % spool stroke, valve opening: PtA and BtT
I
in
= 12 mA Spool in electrical zero position
I
in
= 4 mA 100 % spool stroke, valve opening: PtB and AtT
CAUTION
Risk of valve electronic damage!
The input current I
in
of the command inputs with current input
signal must be between -25 mA and 25 mA!
Voltage levels in excess of 5 V may cause the destruction of
the integrated valve electronics.
f Only use SELV/PELV power supplies.
f Heed the correct dimensioning of the cables.
CAUTION
Danger of personal injury and damage to property!
In
the signal range 4–20 mA command signals l
in
<3mA
(e.g. due to a faulty electric cable) indicate a fault.
f The valve response to this fault can be set and activated via
the service or fieldbus interface in the valve software.
Setting and activation can be performed for example with
the Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software.
f Examine the connection cables for defects.
3 Product Description Control
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 45
If there is no floating command input source available, the reference point of
the command inputs must be connected to 0 V of the command input source
(GND).
The operating direction of the command signal can be altered by modifying the
parameters of the valve software.
CAUTION
Danger of personal injury and damage to property!
The potential difference of each input to GND must be between
-15 V and 32 V.
f Only use SELV/PELV power supplies.
f Heed the correct dimensioning of the cables.
3 Product Description Control
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 46
3.4.2 Analog actual value output
Analog actual value
output
The valves have an analog actual value output:
The stroke position signal I
out
or U
out
(X1, contact 4) specifies the measured
actual value of the position of the spool in the flow function.
The reference point for the analog output is GND (X1, contact 7).
Stroke position signal
(X1, contacts 4 and 7)
4
–20 mA or 2–10 V
The entire spool stroke corresponds to 4 to 20 mA or 2 to 10 V.
I
out
= 0 mA or U
out
= 0 V suggests a cable break.
Signal types command signal and spool position signal in the type designation:
Ö Tab. 6, page 41
Pin assignment of connector X1:
Ö Chap. "7.4.1 Pin assignment of connector X1", page 69
Conversion of actual value output signals I
out
from 4–20 mA into 2–10 V:
Ö Chap. "7.14.2 Conversion of actual value output signals I
out
", page 104
The 4-20 mA output can be transformed using this switch to 2-10 V or the valve
can be ordered directly with a 2-10 V output.
3.4.3 Digital enable input
Enable input The valves have a digital enable input.
Switching of the valve to standby or fail-safe state can also be triggered by
corresponding signals at the enable input of connector X1:
• Signals between 8.5 V and 32 V based on GND at the enable input switch
the valve to standby.
• Signals lower than 6.5 V at the enable input switch the valve to fail-safe
state.
Pin assignment of connector X1:
Ö Chap. "7.4.1 Pin assignment of connector X1", page 69
Fail-safe state of the valves:
Ö Chap. "3.2 Safety function/fail-safe", page 25
I
out
= 20 mA U
out
= 10 V 100 % spool stroke,
valve opening: PtAandBtT
I
out
= 12 mA U
out
= 6 V Spool in electrical zero position
I
out
= 4 mA U
out
= 2 V 100 % spool stroke,
valve opening: PtBandAtT
External detection of electrical cable faults can be realized with the
4–20 mA and 2-10 V analog spool position signal.
The actual value output 4–20 mA and 2–10 V is short-circuit-proof.
3 Product Description Configuration software
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 47
3.5 Configuration software
Configuration softwareBy changing the configuration of the software in the valve, the functionality of
the valve can be influenced using the external configuration software.
Ö Chap. "8.3 Configuration of the valves", page 128
The valve software is an integral part of the valve and cannot be altered,
copied or replaced by the user.
Configuration
of the valves
Many of the functions made available by the valve software can be configured
by the user by modifying parameters. For this purpose, the desired parameters
must be transferred to the valve via the service or fieldbus interface. Parame-
ters can basically be modified by each fieldbus node, for example also by the
machine controller.
The Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software is available as an acces-
sory to simplify start-up, diagnosis and configuration of the valves.
Ö Chap. "3.6 Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software", page 48
CAUTION
Risk of personal injuries!
In case of malfunctions of the valve due to incorrectly-config-
ured software, there is a danger due to uncontrolled move-
ments of the higher-level machine and destruction in the area
around the higher-level machine.
f When changing the configuration of the valve, make sure
that the functionality of the valve matches that described in
the operating instructions and the planned functionality.
If the valve is incorporated in a fieldbus, the parameters can be
transferred to the valve each time the system is powered up.
This ensures that the valve always receives the correct configura-
tion of the valve software.
3 Product Description Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 48
3.6 Moog Valve and Pump Configuration
Software
Moog Valve and Pump
Configuration Software
The Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software is a Microsoft
®
Windows
®
application enabling fast and convenient start-up, diagnosis and configuration
of the valves.
The Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software communicates with the
valves via the service or CAN bus interface. A PC with a suitable interface card
is required for this purposes.
The Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software offers the following func-
tions:
• Transfer of data between PC and valves
• Storage of the current valve settings on the PC
• Activation of the valves with graphic software control elements
• Graphic representation of status information, command signals and actual
values as well as characteristic curves for the valves
• Recording and visualization of the system parameters with the integrated
data logger and the integrated oscilloscope function
3.7 Nameplate
See "Technical data":
Ö Chap. "11.1 Nameplates", page 154
Ö Chap. "11.1.1 Model number and type designation", page 156
Ö Chap. "11.1.2 LSS address", page 163
Ö Chap. "11.1.3 Data matrix code", page 163
The Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software is available as
an accessory.
Ö Chap. "12.1 Accessories for valves in the D67XK series",
page 222
4 Characteristic curves Flow diagram (4-way operation)
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 49
4 Characteristic curves
All characteristic curves are type-specific.
Flow rate characteristic curves, step response and frequency response charac-
teristic curves:
Ö Chap. "11 Technical Data", page 152
Flow diagram
(4-way operation)
4.1 Flow diagram (4-way operation)
Fig. 9: Flow diagram (4-way operation) D671K to D675K
Flow Q [l/min]
Valve pressure drop Δp [bar]
4500
3000
2000
20
1500
1000
800
500
300
200
150
100
80
50
30
51020305070100
150 l/min
250 l/min
350 l/min
550 l/min
1000 l/min
1500 l/min
60 l/min
80 l/min
30 l/min
Nominal pressure dropΔp
N
= 10 bar (145 psi)
eg.Δp
N
= 5 bar (72.5 psi) per control land)
D675K-K15
D675K-K10
D674K-P05
D673K-P03
D672K-P02
D672K-P01
D671K-P80/B80
D671K-P60/B60
D671K-P30
Q
max
= 3600 l/min
(951 gpm)
Q
max
= 1500 l/min
(396 gpm)
Q
max
= 600 l/min
(158.5 gpm)
Q
max
= 180 l/min
(47.6 gpm)
4 Characteristic curves Flow diagram (4-way operation)
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 50
The flow rate to be set depends not only on the position of the spool, but also
on the pressure difference ∆p at the individual control lands.
Formula for calculating
the flow Q
A flow control command signal of 100 % produces with a rated pressure differ-
ence of ∆p
N
= 5 bar (72.5 psi) per control land the rated flow-Q
N
. If the pres-
sure difference is altered, so the flow Q also changes with a constant com-
mand signal in accordance with the following formula:
The actual flow Q calculated thus must not exceed a mean flow velocity of
30 m/s (96.54 ft/s) at ports P, A, B, X, Y and T.
Q [l/min] : actual flow
Q
N
[l/min] : rated flow
∆p
[bar][psi]
: Actual pressure difference per control land
∆p
N
[bar][psi]
: Rated pressure difference ∆p
N
= 5 bar (72.5 psi) per control
land
QQ
N
∆p
∆p
N
--------------⋅=
To avoid cavitation, the flow speed of the actual flow Q calculated
in this way at ports (P, A, B, X, Y and T) must not be too great.
4 Characteristic curves Flow signal characteristic curve
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 51
4.2 Flow signal characteristic curve
The flow-signal characteristic curves are type-specific.
Ö Chap. "11 Technical Data", page 152
As an example, a linear characteristic curve of a D671K (cf. Fig. 12, P30) is
depicted here.
Flow signal characteristic
curve D671K
Fig. 12: Valve D671K, flow-signal characteristic curve
Command signal [%]
Fig. 10: Flow signal characteristic curve with
equal electrical and hydraulic zero positions
Fig. 11: Design for measuring the flow signal
characteristic curve
Q
Q
N
------------
[%]
AB
P
TT
1
= 10 bar
Flow Q [l/min]
Command signal [%]
20 40 60 80 100
0
20
50
80
100
10
30
40
60
70
90
0
B T
TA
P
B
A
P
with T
1
5 Transportation and Storage
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 52
5 Transportation and Storage
Safety instructions:
Transportation and
Storage
WARNING
Danger of property damage!
In order to ensure perfect, reliable, and safe operation of the
valves, heed the following:
f The valves must be protected in particular to prevent entry
of dust and moisture.
f The permissible ambient conditions for the valves must be
maintained at all times also in the case of transportation and
storage.
f Ö Chap. "11 Technical Data", page 152.
WARNING
Danger of explosion!
During transport and storage, cables on the valve, cable
glands, screw plugs, and plug connectors must not be dam-
aged.
f The valve must not be started up with damaged cables, plug
connectors, and screw plugs, and it must be sent to us or to
one of our authorized service centers immediately.
CAUTION
Risk of injury!
To provide protection against injuries or other damaging influ-
ences on health, suitable protective measures must be taken if
necessary prior to and when carrying out any work on the
valves or the machine, such as mounting or removing, electri-
cal or hydraulic connection, troubleshooting or servicing, and
when handling the valves, accessories, tools or hydraulic fluids.
f Ö Chap. "2.2 Occupational safety and health", page 15
CAUTION
Risk of damage due to dirt and moisture!
This is the only way of adequately protecting the valves against
the penetration of dirt and moisture and protecting the gas-
kets/seals against the effects of ozone and UV.
f The valves must not be transported or stored without their
shipping plate fitted.
f The valve shipping plate may only be removed from the
valve hydraulic ports directly prior to mounting and must be
reinstalled directly after the valve has been removed.
f The shipping plate and the associated attachment elements
(screws and nuts) must be kept for later use, e.g. during
transportation.
5 Transportation and Storage
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 53
CAUTION
Risk of damage due to condensation!
Due to temperature fluctuations during transport and storage of
the valves, humidity may condense.
f Wait with the start-up of the valves until the valves have
reached the ambient temperature
CAUTION
Risk of damage!
The plugs, connectors, and connection cables of the valves
may not be used for other purposes, such as for stepping on or
as transport holders.
CAUTION
Danger of personal injury and damage to property!
Warranty and liability claims for personal injury and damage to
property are excluded if they are caused by valves, spare parts
or accessories having been stored or transported outside their
original packaging.
f Store and transport valves, spare parts, and accessories
only in properly-sealed original packaging.
f Ö Chap. "1.8 Warranty and liability", page 11.
CAUTION
Risk of damage!
Improper handling during transport or storage of the valves,
spare parts, and accessories can cause damage to the original
packaging and to the contents.
f After transporting or storing valves, spare parts and
accessories, check the original packaging and contents for
possible damage.
f Do not start up the system if the packaging or contents
show signs of damage. In this case, notify us or the supplier
responsible immediately.
f In the event of transportation damage, store the damaged
packaging so that if necessary damages can be claimed
from the transport contractor.
5 Transportation and Storage Checking/unpacking a delivery
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 54
5.1 Checking/unpacking a delivery
Procedure for checking/
unpacking a delivery
Procedure:
1. Check whether the packaging is damaged.
2. Remove packaging.
3. Keep damaged packaging so that damage claims can be lodged against
the transport company.
We recommend that you keep the original packaging for later transporta-
tion or storage operations.
4. Dispose of packaging material that is no longer needed according to
the local specific disposal regulations and environmental protection
provisions.
5. Check whether the contents of the packaging are damaged.
6. In case of damaged packaging or damaged content, inform us and the
responsible supplier immediately.
7. Check whether the delivery matches the order and the delivery note.
8. In case of incorrect or incomplete delivery, inform us or the responsible
supplier immediately.
5.2 Scope of delivery of the valve
Scope of delivery
of the valve
The scope of delivery of the valve consists of:
• Valve with mounted oil-proof shipping plate at the hydraulic port
• For D671K:
- 6 O-rings ID 12.4 x dia. 1.8 [mm] (0.49 x 0.07 in)
(0.61 x 0.07 in) for ports A, B, P, T1 and X
- 1 O-ring ID 15.6 x dia. 1.8 [mm] (0.61 x 0.07 in)
(0.30 x 0.07 in) for port Y
• For D672K:
- 4 O-rings ID 21.89 x dia. 2.6 [mm] (0.61 x 0.07 in)
(0.61 x 0.07 in) for ports A, B, P and T
- 2 O-rings ID 10.82 x dia. 1.8 [mm] (0.61 x 0.07 in)
(0.61 x 0.07 in) for ports X and Y
• For D673K and D674K:
- 4 O-rings ID 34.60 x dia. 2.6 [mm] (0.61 x 0.07 in)
(0.61 x 0.07 in) for ports A, B, P and T
- 2 O-rings ID 20.92 x dia. 2.6 [mm] (0.61 x 0.07 in)
(0.61 x 0.07 in) for ports X and Y
• For D675K:
- 4 O-rings ID 53.60 x dia. 3.5 [mm] (0.61 x 0.07 in)
(0.61 x 0.07 in) for ports A, B, P and T
- 2 O-rings ID 14.00 x dia. 1.8 [mm] (0.61 x 0.07 in)
(0.61 x 0.07 in) for ports X and Y
• User manual D67XK series
5 Transportation and Storage Storage
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 55
5.3 Storage
Effects of long-term
Storage
The following effects may occur in the course of long-term storage:
• Gasket/seal materials become brittle, possibly resulting in leaks
• Hydraulic fluid becomes gummy, possibly resulting in friction.
In order to avoid possible resulting impairments or damage, we recommend
that the valve, after a period of storage or operation of more than 5 years, be
inspected by us or one of our authorized service centers.
6 Mounting and Connection to the Hydraulic System
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 56
Safety instructions:
Mounting and Connection
to the Hydraulic System
6 Mounting and Connection to the Hydraulic System
DANGER
Danger of injury due to electric voltage and unexpected
movements!
Work on machines that are not shut down presents a danger to
life and limb. Work such as mounting or removal, electrical or
hydraulic connection, troubleshooting or service may only be
performed on machines and valves that are shut down.
f Make sure to shut the machine down and switch it off.
f Make sure that the drive motor cannot be switched on.
f For this purpose, switch off the supply voltage as well as
that of connected peripherals, such as externally powered
transducers or programming units.
f Make sure that all power-transmitting components and
connections (electrical and hydraulic) are switched off
according to the manufacturer's instructions and secured
against switching on again. If possible, remove the main
fuse from the machine.
f Make sure that the machine is completely depressurized.
DANGER
Danger of poisoning and injury due to hydraulic fluid
squirting out under pressure!
Contact with hydraulic fluids can damage your health (e.g. eye
injuries, skin and tissue damage, poisoning in case of inhaling).
f Wear protective gloves and safety glasses.
f If hydraulic fluid gets into your eyes or on your skin, consult
a doctor immediately.
f When handling hydraulic fluids, observe the safety
provisions applicable to the hydraulic fluid used.
WARNING
Danger of explosion!
For mounting and connection to the hydraulic system, cables
on the valve, cable glands, screw plugs, and plug connectors
may not be damaged.
f The valve must not be started up with damaged cables, plug
connectors, and screw plugs, and it must be sent to us or to
one of our authorized service centers immediately.
CAUTION
Risk of injury!
To provide protection against injuries or other damaging
influences on health, suitable protective measures must be
taken if necessary prior to and when carrying out any work on
the valves or the machine, such as mounting or removing,
electrical or hydraulic connection, troubleshooting or servicing,
and when handling the valves, accessories, tools or hydraulic
fluids.
f Ö Chap. "2.2 Occupational safety and health", page 15
6 Mounting and Connection to the Hydraulic System Dimensions (installation drawings)
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 57
6.1 Dimensions (installation drawings)
The dimensions of the valves depend on the series
Ö Chap. "11 Technical Data", page 152
6.2 Mounting surface
6.2.1 Surface quality
Evenness and roughness
of the mounting
surface
6.2.2 Holes in mounting surface
The details for the mounting surface depend on the series.
Holes in the mounting surfaces:
Ö Chap. "11 Technical Data", page 152
CAUTION
Danger of personal injury and damage to property!
Working with and on the valves without the required basic
mechanical, hydraulic, and electrical knowledge may cause
injuries or parts may be damaged.
f Only properly qualified and authorized users may work with
and on the valves.
f Ö Chap. "1.4 Selection and qualification of personnel",
page 7
Evenness as per EN ISO 1302: < 0.01 mm (400 µin)
over 100 mm (3.94 in)
Average roughness R
a
according to
EN ISO 1302: < 0.8 µm (30 µin)
6 Mounting and Connection to the Hydraulic System Mounting the valve
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 58
6.3 Mounting the valve
6.3.1 Tools and materials required
Tools and materials
required for mounting
the valves
The following tools and materials are required for mounting the valves:
• For removing the shipping plate
Wrench for hexagon socket head cap screws or regular screwdriver
(only valve D671K) and if necessary wrench
• For mounting the valve
Torque wrench for hexagon socket head cap screws
• Installation screws
• Replacement for O-rings of ports to be replaced if necessary.
Installation screws
Attachment screws
6.3.2 Specification for installation screws
for the valves
Specification for
installation screws
for the valves
The installation screws and the O-rings to be replaced if necessary
are not included in the scope of delivery for the valves. They are
available as an accessory.
Ö Chap. "12 Accessories, Spare Parts, and Tools", page 222
The wrench sizes of the hexagon socket cap head screws for
mounting are series-specific.
Details about the screws and their tightening torque:
Ö Tab. 7, page 58
The installation screws for the transport plates are type-specific.
Details about attachment screws and their tightening torque:
Ö Chap. "12 Accessories, Spare Parts, and Tools", page 222
Hexagon socket head
cap screws
as per EN ISO 4762
Quality class 10,9
Number
required
Width across
flats/
Tightening
torque
D639K
NG10 M6x40 4
WAF 5
11 Nm (8 lbf ft)
±10%
D639K
NG16 M6x55
M10x60
2
4
WAF 5
11 Nm (8 lbf ft)
±10%
WAF 8
54 Nm (40 lbf ft)
±10%
D637K/D639K
NG25 M12x75 6
WAF 10
94 Nm (69 lbf ft)
±10%
D639K
NG32 M20x90 6
WAF 17
460 Nm (339 lbf ft)
±10%
Tab. 7: Specification for installation screws for the valves
6 Mounting and Connection to the Hydraulic System Mounting the valve
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 59
6.3.3 Procedure
Safety instructions:
Mounting the valve
CAUTION
Danger of personal injury and damage to property!
The shipping plate attachment screws must not under any
circumstances be used to mount the valve.
f Use only the installation screws specified here for mounting
the valve.
f The fastening of the valve with unsuitable screws can be
destroyed under pressure.
CAUTION
Risk of damage due to dirt and moisture!
This is the only way of adequately protecting the valves against
the penetration of dirt and moisture and protecting the gas-
kets/seals against the effects of ozone and UV.
f The valves must not be transported or stored without their
shipping plate fitted.
f The valve shipping plate may only be removed from the
valve hydraulic ports directly prior to mounting and must be
reinstalled directly after the valve has been removed.
f The shipping plate and the associated attachment elements
(screws and nuts) must be kept for later use, e.g. during
transportation.
CAUTION
Danger of explosion and risk of damage due to overheat-
ing!
In order to prevent overheating of the valves.
f Mount the valves so that good ventilation is ensured.
f The maximum permissible temperatures of the respective
temperature classes and the maximum permissible ambient
temperature as well as the maximum permissible
temperature of the hydraulic fluid may not be exceeded.
f Ö Chap. "1.3 Intended operation", page 5
CAUTION
Risk of damage!
Vibrations and shocks can damage the valve.
f Do not mount the valve directly on machine parts that are
exposed to strong vibrations or sudden movement.
f On units that are moved in jerks and jolts, the movement
direction of the spool should not be the same as the
movement direction of the unit.Ö Chap. "11 Technical
Data", page 152
6 Mounting and Connection to the Hydraulic System Mounting the valve
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 60
Procedure for mounting
the valve
Procedure for mounting the valve:
1. Clean the valve mounting and connecting surfaces.
Check and if necessary correct the evenness and roughness of the
mounting surface.
Ö Chap. "6.2.1 Surface quality", page 57
2. Remove the shipping plate from the valve's hydraulic port.
The shipping plate and the associated fastening elements (screws and
nuts) must be kept for later use, e.g. during transportation.
3. Check that O-rings in the valve ports (P, A, B, X, Y and T) are present and
for elasticity, integrity and correct seating.
If necessary, install O-rings, replace or correct the seating.
4. Paying attention to the mounting pattern, place the valve on the mounting
surface and align with the mounting bores.
5. Secure the valve. To do so, tighten the installation screws (hexagon
socket head cap screws) free from distortion in diagonal sequence.
Tightening torque::
Ö Tab. 7, page 58
CAUTION
Increased wear and functional faults!
The cleanliness of the connection and mounting surface influ-
ences the cleanliness and the life cycle of the valve. Soiling
causes wear and functional faults.
f Make sure the valve is extremely clean.
f Install the valve dirt-free.
f Make sure that connections and attachments are clean.
f Do not use steel wool or cloths with lint for cleaning.
f Do not use any cleaning agents or methods that could
attack the surfaces or the O-rings mechanically or
chemically.
Due to the great weight of the D675K valve, special measures
must be taken during mounting and removal.
There are two eye bolts screwed into the D675K valve for lifting
and transport.
Threaded holes are provided in the D673K and D674K valves, into
which the eye bolts for lifting and transport can be screwed.
7 Electrical connection Safety instructions for installation and maintenance
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 61
7 Electrical connection
7.1 Safety instructions for installation and maintenance
DANGER
Danger of explosion!
An explosion can be triggered by sparks when switching on
the machine.
f Open connectors for the interface must absolutely be
covered before start-up.
f The eXLink connectors from CEAG must be mounted
according to the instructions in the operating instructions for
the eXLink connectors.
f In the standard model with a screw plug, the service
connector X10 is not permitted for use in hazardous areas.
f The service connector X10 in the standard model M8, 3-pin
must be sealed with the original screw plug belonging to
the valve before start-up.
f When mounting the screw plug for the service connector
X10, it must be observed that the gasket and the thread
of the screw plug as well as the thread in the electronic
housing of the valve are not damaged.
f In case of damage to the screw plug for the service
connector X10 or the threads in the electronic housing,
the valve must not be operated.
f Tightening torque for screw plug:
Ö Chap. "3.1.2 Representative depiction of the valve",
page 18
WARNING
Danger of explosion!
For the electrical connection of the valve, cables, cable glands,
screw plugs, and connectors must not be damaged.
f The valve must not be started up with damaged cables,
connectors, and screw plugs, and it must be sent to us or to
one of our authorized service centers immediately.
WARNING
Danger of explosion!
To guarantee safe operation in hazardous areas:
f The signal interfaces of the valve are implemented with
explosion-proof connectors.
f For mounting and removal of the connectors as well as
operation of the valve, the notes and instructions in the
"Explosion-proof connectors eXLink, CEAG" operating
instructions must absolutely be adhered to.
7 Electrical connection Safety instructions for installation and maintenance
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 62
CAUTION
Danger of personal injury and damage to property from in-
terchanged connections!
Interchanging connections causes unforeseeable movements
of the machine and thus corresponding risks to people and
equipment.
f When starting up valves on the fieldbus for the first time, we
recommend that the component be operated in a
depressurized state.
f Before connecting valves to the fieldbus, it is essential to
complete the electrical and if necessary hydraulic
connection of the component properly as described in the
user manual.
CAUTION
Danger of personal and property damage due to defective
accessories and defective spare parts!
Unsuitable or defective accessories or unsuitable or defective
spare parts may cause damage, malfunctions or failure of the
valve or the machine.
f Use only original accessories and original spare parts.
CAUTION
Danger of personal injury and damage to property!
Improperly laid connection cables can cause damage, malfunc-
tions or failure of valves or the machine.
f Do not lay valve connection cables in the immediate vicinity
of high-voltage cables or together with cables that switch
inductive or capacitive loads.
CAUTION
Danger of personal injury and damage to property!
For the floating analog inputs of connector X1, the potential dif-
ference (referenced to supply zero) must be between -15 V and
32 V.
f Only use SELV/PELV power supplies.
f Heed the correct dimensioning of the cables.
CAUTION
Danger of personal injury and damage to property!
In the signal range 4–20 mA input currents < 3 mA can cause
faulty reactions with digital valves.
f Examine the connection cables for defects.
7 Electrical connection Safety instructions for installation and maintenance
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 63
7.1.1 Protective grounding and electrical shielding
Equipotential bonding /
protective conductor
system
CAUTION
Risk of valve electronic damage!
In the signal range 4–20 mA command signals Iin < 3 mA
(e.g. due to a faulty electric cable) indicate a fault.
f The valve response to this fault can be set and activated via
the service or fieldbus interface in the valve software.
Setting and activation can, for example, take place with
the Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software.
f Examine the connection cables for defects.
CAUTION
Risk of valve electronic damage!
The input current must be between -25 mA and 25 mA. Input
currents outside this permissible range will destroy the input.
f Only use SELV/PELV power supplies.
f Heed the correct dimensioning of the cables.
The valves described here must only be operated with external
fuse protection. The information about the external fuse protection
of the valves is included in Chapter 11.3 to 11.7.
Ö Tab. 36, page 166
Ö Tab. 37, page 177
Ö Tab. 38, page 188
Ö Tab. 39, page 199
Ö Tab. 40, page 210
DANGER
Danger of explosion in case of unsafe operation!
In order to create as small a potential difference in the machine
as possible and guarantee safe operation of the machine,
the equipotential bonding and protective conducting system for
a machine in which the valves should be used must be
constructed according to EN 60204-1.
f Connect all elements of the machine to each other via
equipotential bonding conductors.
f Connect all elements of the machine that have exposed
metal surfaces via protective conductors to the protective
conductor rail.
f Connect all the protective conductors and the equipotential
bonding conductor in the main cabinet via the protective
conductor rail to the protective earth (PE) terminal.
7 Electrical connection Safety instructions for installation and maintenance
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 64
DANGER
Danger to life!
This protective conductor is not a replacement for the normal
equipotential bonding system.
f Connect all elements of the machine system with exposed
metallic surfaces to the protective grounding rail.
DANGER
Danger to life due to electric shock!
Very strong current can flow via the shield connection of
the valve.
f Extreme caution is required since for some industrial
applications, no good equipotential bonding can be
implemented.
f An effective equipotential bonding system must be set up in
compliance with DIN EN 60204-1, Section 8.
DANGER
Danger to life!
People can be injured and property damaged through the oper-
ation of the valve with an unsafe power supply.
f Only use SELV/PELV power supplies as per EN 60204-1!
7 Electrical connection Safety instructions for installation and maintenance
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 65
7.1.2 Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software
CAUTION
Danger of personal injury and damage to property!
Improper handling of the Moog Valve and Pump Configuration
Software causes malfunctions and thus corresponding risks to
people and equipment.
f For safety reasons, the Moog Valve and Pump
Configuration Software must not be used inside a machine
for visualization purposes or as an operator terminal.
CAUTION
Danger of personal injury and damage to property!
It is not permitted to operate the Moog Valve and Pump
Configuration Software on a fieldbus while the machine is run-
ning.
It is only permitted to activate valves via the Moog Valve and
Pump Configuration Software if this does not cause any dan-
gerous states in the machine and in its surroundings.
CAUTION
Danger of personal injury and damage to property!
Activating valves via the Moog Valve and Pump Configuration
Software within a network can give rise to unforeseeable
events if fieldbus communication takes place simultaneously
between the machine control or other bus nodes!
f Deactivate the fieldbus communication for machine control
and other bus nodes.
CAUTION
Danger of personal injury and damage to property!
Messages from the Moog Valve and Pump Configuration
Software can also be received by other bus nodes. This may
trigger unforeseeable events.
f Deactivate the fieldbus communication for machine control
and other bus nodes.
CAUTION
Danger of personal injury and damage to property!
If danger-free operation of the valves via the Moog Valve and
Pump Configuration Software can also not be ensured with de-
activated fieldbus communication to the machine control and
other bus nodes, the following must be heeded:
f The valves may only communicate depressurized and in
a direct connection (point-to-point) with the Moog Valve and
Pump Configuration Software.
7 Electrical connection Block diagram
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 66
7.2 Block diagram
Block diagram
of the valve electronics
CAUTION
Data loss!
Data communication between the valve electronics and the
Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software may be dis-
rupted if other fieldbus nodes (e.g. a controller) are accessing
the valve electronics at the same time.
f Deactivate the fieldbus communication for machine control.
Fig. 13: Block diagram of the valve electronics
*
Depending on the model, the valves can have different electrical connections.
to the
linear motor
Field bus interface
Galvanic
isolation
Service interface
Digital signal interface
Analog inputs/outputs
Power supply
Analog input 0
Analog input 1*
Analog output 0
Analog output 1*
Enable input*
Digital output
Microprocessor system
Position
transducer
Pressure
sensor
7 Electrical connection Arrangement of connectors
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 67
7.3 Arrangement of connectors
The depiction of the electronics housing is exemplary for all sizes.
Arrangement of
connectors on the valve
electronics housing
(maximum equipment
specification)
Fig. 14: Arrangement of connectors on the valve electronics housing (maximum equipment specifi-
cation)
120
120
160
X5 X2 X10 X1
X6
X7
X3
X4
X1 Connectors, analog signals and supply voltage
Ö Chap. "7.4 Connector X1", page 69
X2 Connector, optional digital signal interface
Ö Chap. "7.7 Digital signal interface", page 75
X3
X4
The fieldbus connectors X3 and X4 are only provided on valves with fieldbus
interfaces.
Ö Chap. "7.8 Fieldbus connectors X3 and X4", page 77
X5
X6
X7
Connectors, analog signals
Ö Chap. "7.9 Analog input connectors X5, X6 and X7", page 83
X10 The X10 service connector is only present for valves without CAN bus inter-
face. By default, the X10 service connector is not approved for use in hazard-
ous areas, however on request it is available for use in hazardous areas.
Ö Chap. "7.10 Service connector X10", page 86
7 Electrical connection Arrangement of connectors
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 68
Allocation of interfaces
to connectors
Allocation of interfaces to connectors
The valve electronics are equipped with connectors that are designated X1
through X10.
The table below shows which interfaces are accommodated in the different
connectors.
Interface type Interface Connector
Analog input Analog input 0 X1
Analog input 2 X5
Analog input 3 X6
Analog input 4 X7
Analog output Analog output 0 X1
Digital input Digital input 0 X1
Digital output Digital output 0 X1
Digital signal interface SSI transducer X2
Fieldbus interface CANopen, Profibus-DP, EtherCAT X3, X4
Service interface X10
Tab. 8: Allocation of interfaces to connectors
The availability of the interface depends on the model.
7 Electrical connection Connector X1
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 69
7.4 Connector X1
Service connector X1 is designed in accordance with DIN EN 175201-804 and
is available in the following versions:
• 7-pin connector with protective conductor contact
7.4.1 Pin assignment of connector X1
Pin assignment of
connector X1 (7-pin)
View of male receptacle X1 on the valve (internal thread, pin contacts)
Fig. 15: Assignment of service connector X1 (7-pin)
Ö Chap. "7.14 Wiring connector X1", page 102
7.4.2 Mating connector for connector X1
Mating connector
for connector X1
The mating connector for the 7-pin connector X1 is available as an accessory.
Ö Chap. "12.1 Accessories for valves in the D67XK series", page 222
Ö Chap. "7.13 Permissible lengths for connection cables", page 98
1
2
7
6
3
4
5
Contact Assignment Description
1 Analog input 0 Current or voltage input referenced to pin 2, setpoint Q
2 Reference point for analog
input 0
Reference point for pin 1
3 Digital enable input Enable referenced to GND
4 Analog output 0 4–20 mA or 2–10 V referenced to GND, actual value Q
5 Digital output 0
Optional digital output 1
Standby
Monitoring
with respect to GNDOp
6 supply voltage Nominal 24 V (18–32 V) DC based on GND
7 GND, supply zero or signal
zero
GND
Ö Chap. "7.12 Protective grounding, equipotential
bonding, and shielding", page 90
7 Electrical connection Analog inputs/outputs
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 70
7.4.3 Power supply
Requirement of supply
voltage
The supply voltage must be nominally 24 V (18–32 V) DC referenced to supply
zero. Supply voltages of less than 18 V are detected by the valve electronics
as undervoltage.
The valve electronics are protected against polarity reversal of the connec-
tions.
The power consumption of the valves varies from model to model. Detailed in-
formation can be found in the product-specific valve user manual.
7.5 Analog inputs/outputs
Analog inputs/outputs The analog inputs/outputs are available on service connector X1 and analog
inputs optionally on connectors X5, X6, and X7. The analog inputs can mea-
sure both current and voltage.connectors X5
7.5.1 Analog inputs
All current and voltage inputs are differential, but can be connected to ground
(single-ended) by means of external wiring. The analog inputs of connector X1
have a resolution of 12 bits.
Ö Chap. "7.14.1 Single-ended command signals", page 103
CAUTION
Risk of personal injury due to insufficient electrical safety
The insulating elements used are designed for the safety extra
low voltage range. The circuits of the fieldbus connections,
if provided, are only functionally isolated from other connected
circuits.
Compliance with the safety regulations requires that the equip-
ment be isolated from the mains system in accordance with
EN 61558-1 and EN 61558-2-6 that all voltages be limited in
accordance with EN 60204-1.
f Nominal signal: see nameplate.
f Only use SELV/PELV power supplies
CAUTION
Risk of EMC damage!
Improper electrical connections can damage the valve electron-
ics and destroy the fieldbus communication.
f Make the electrical connection so that it is EMC-appropriate.
7 Electrical connection Analog inputs/outputs
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 71
7.5.1.1 Signal types
Signal types of the analog
inputs on service
connector X1
The analog inputs on service connector X1 are available in the following ver-
sions:
•±10V
•0–10V
•±10mA
•0–10mA
•4–20mA
Which signal type is set for the analog inputs on delivery depends on the valve
model. The signal types can be configured via the firmware.
Signal type for the analog input: ±10 V
Analog input: ±10In the case of this signal type, the input is configured as a differential voltage
input with a ±10 V input range.
The differential input resistance is 20 kΩ.
The input resistance referenced to supply zero is approx. 150 kΩ.
The potential difference of each input to supply zero must be between -15 V
and 32 V.
If there is no differential analog source available, the reference point of
the analog input (pin 5) must be connected to 0 V of the analog source.
Signal type for the analog input: 0–10 V
Analog input: 0 –10 VIn the case of this signal type, the input is configured as a differential voltage
input with a 0–10 V input range.
The differential input resistance is 20 kΩ.
The input resistance referenced to supply zero is approx. 150 kΩ.
The potential difference of each input to supply zero must be between -15 V
and 32 V.
If there is no differential analog source available, the reference point of
the analog input (pin 5) must be connected to 0 V of the analog source.
Detailed information can be found in the "Firmware" User Manual.
7 Electrical connection Analog inputs/outputs
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 72
Signal type for the analog input: ±10 mA
Analog input: ±10 mA With this signal type, the input current to be measured is directed via the two
input pins to an internal shunt.
The differential input resistance is 200 kΩ.
The input resistance referenced to supply zero is approx. 150 kΩ.
The potential difference of each input to supply zero must be between -15 V
and 32 V.
If there is no floating analog source available, the reference point of the analog
input (pin 5) must be connected to 0 V of the analog source.
Signal type for the analog input: 0–10 mA
Analog input: 0–10 mA With this signal type, the input current to be measured is directed via the two
input pins to an internal shunt.
The differential input resistance is 200 kΩ.
The input resistance referenced to supply zero is approx. 150 kΩ.
The potential difference of each input to supply zero must be between -15 V
and 32 V.
If there is no floating analog source available, the reference point of the analog
input (pin 5) must be connected to 0 V of the analog source.
CAUTION
Risk of valve electronic damage!
The input current must be between -25 mA and 25 mA. Input
currents outside this permissible range will destroy the input.
f Only use SELV/PELV power supplies.
f Heed the correct dimensioning of the cables.
CAUTION
Risk of valve electronic damage!
The input current must be between -25 mA and 25 mA. Input
currents outside this permissible range will destroy the input.
f Only use SELV/PELV power supplies.
f Heed the correct dimensioning of the cables.
7 Electrical connection Analog inputs/outputs
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 73
Signal type for the analog input: 4–20 mA
Analog input: 4–20 mA With this signal type, the input current to be measured is directed via the two
input pins to an internal shunt.
The differential input resistance is 200 kΩ.
The input resistance referenced to supply zero is approx. 150 kΩ.
The potential difference of each input to supply zero must be between -15 V
and 32 V.
If there is no floating analog source available, the reference point of the analog
input (pin 5) must be connected to 0 V of the analog source.
In the 4–20 mA signal range signals of I
In
< 3 mA (e.g. due to a defective
electric cable) signify a fault, which can be evaluated by the valve software.
The monitoring must be activated in the valve software.
7.5.2 Analog outputs
Analog outputs 4–20 mA
Analog output: 4–20 mA The reference point for the 4–20 mA analog outputs is supply zero.
The load impedance must be in the range of 0–500 Ω.
Cable break detection of the connected cable can be effected with the
4–20 mA analog outputs.
The 4–20 mA analog outputs are short-circuit protected.
Ö Chap. "7.14.2.1 Valves with 7-pin connector X1", page 104
Analog outputs 2–10 V
Analog output: 2–10 V The reference point for the 2–10 V analog outputs is supply zero.
The internal resistance is 500 Ω.
Cable break detection of the connected cable can be effected with the 2–10 V
analog outputs.
Voltage drops in the supply cable to the valve electronics can result in
deviations from the actual value. Therefore, this variant is not recommended.
Ö Chap. "7.14.1 Single-ended command signals", page 103
Recommendation: Use a 4–20 mA analog output and terminate directly at
the measurement input with 500 Ω. This way you get a 2-10V output without
the disadvantages mentioned above.
Ö Chap. "7.14.2 Conversion of actual value output signals I
out
", page 104
CAUTION
Risk of valve electronic damage!
The input current must be between -25 mA and 25 mA. Input
currents outside this permissible range will destroy the input.
f Only use SELV/PELV power supplies.
f Heed the correct dimensioning of the cables.
7 Electrical connection Digital inputs/outputs
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 74
7.6 Digital inputs/outputs
Digital inputs/outputs The digital inputs/outputs are available on connector X1 depending on the
model. The digital input serves as the enable input. Depending on the
configuration, the digital output indicates specific events, such as for example
the occurrence of a fault.
7.6.1 Digital input
Digital enable input
Enable input Signals between 8.5 V and 32 V supply voltage referenced to supply zero at
the enable input are identified as an enable signal.
Signals of less than 6.5 V at the enable input are identified as enable not
issued. The electrical output stage is deactivated if no enable is issued or,
depending on the versions, set to "HOLD.".
This input is also used to acknowledge a valve fault state via an analog signal.
The input current of the digital enable input is 2.3 mA when connected to 24 V.
7.6.2 Digital outputs
Valve standby The digital outputs are short-circuit protected and switch off in the event of
overload. After a period of cooling down, the digital output switches itself back
on. Overload means a current load greater than 1.5 A. However, the total
current consumption of the valve must be limited by a fuse.
Logic level
Detailed information can be found in the "Firmware pQ" user
manual.
High Supply voltage connected.
Low Supply voltage disconnected (10 kΩ to supply zero).
7 Electrical connection Digital signal interface
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 75
7.7 Digital signal interface
The digital signal interface is available on connector X2.
A digital transducer can be connected to this signal interface.
Connector X2 is available in the following versions:
• 7-pin SSI transducer connector X2
Ö Chap. "7.7.1 SSI transducer", page 75
7.7.1 SSI transducer
This digital signal interface is suitable in accordance with EIA 422 for connect-
ing e.g. position transducers or rotary transducers with an SSI interface.
Ö Chap. "7.15 Wiring SSI transducers (X2)", page 105
Supported types of SSI
transducers
The following transducer types are supported:
• Coded with binary code
• Coded with Gray Code
The digital signal interface must be configured.
The signal levels conform to the standard EIA 422.
Recommended cable types
Recommended cable
types for SSI transducer
Use exclusively shielded cables with copper braiding shielding with min. 80%
overlap.
Copper conductors with a cross section of at least 0.25 mm
2
.
Use cables with twisted-pair conductors in environments with high background
noise levels.
Cable break monitoring
Cable break monitoringInputs CLK and DATA of the digital signal interfaces are monitored for cable
break – regardless of which transducer type is connected.
The status of cable break monitoring can be read out via fieldbus. The reaction
to a cable break is configurable.
Detailed information can be found in the "Firmware" User Manual.
Detailed information can be found in the "Firmware" User Manual.
7 Electrical connection Digital signal interface
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 76
7.7.1.1 Pin assignment SSI transducer connector X2
SSI transducer
connector X2
Fig. 16: SSI transducer connector X2
Power supply to the transducer
Power supply to
the transducer
Power is supplied to the transducer via pin 5 on connector X2.
The 24 V or 5 V supply voltage is configurable (see "Firmware" User Manual).
An external power supply to the transducer is also possible. However, the 0 V
transducer supply must be connected to supply zero.
The supply voltage is cut off in the event of a possible short circuit in the supply
voltage to the transducer. A fault reaction can be configured (see "Firmware"
User Manual). The voltage is available again as soon as the short circuit has
been eliminated.
1
7
2
3
6
5
4
View of the SSI encoder female
receptacle X2 on the valve (external
thread, socket contacts)
Contact Assignment Description
1 CLK+ Clock pulse output
2 CLK-
3 DATA+ Data input for transducer data
4 DATA-
5 SensorSup Supply voltage to SSI transducer
24 V / 5 V / 0 V (configurable;
see "Firmware" User Manual)
I
max
= 300 mA
6 GND Supply zero
7 not used
There is joint fusing of this power supply for X2, X5, X6 and X7.
The entire supply current may not exceed the following value:
I
max
(X2+X5+X6+X7) = 300 mA
7 Electrical connection Fieldbus connectors X3 and X4
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 77
7.8 Fieldbus connectors X3 and X4
Versions of the fieldbus
connector
Fieldbus connectors X3 and X4 are available in the following versions:
• 4-pin CAN connector
Ö Chap. "7.8.1 CAN connectors", page 77
• 4-pin Profibus-DP connector
Ö Chap. "7.8.2 Profibus-DP connectors", page 78
• 4-pin EtherCAT connector
Ö Chap. "7.8.3 EtherCAT connectors", page 80
7.8.1 CAN connectors
The CAN bus has the following features:
• Multi-master system: Each node can transmit and receive
• Topology: Line structure with short stub lines
• Network expansion and transmission rates:
25 m at 1 Mbit/s to 5,000 m at 25 kbit/s
• Addressing type: Message-orientated via identifiers
Priority assignment of messages possible via identifiers
• Security: Hamming distance = 6, i.e. up to 5 individual errors per message
are detected
• Physical bus: ISO 11898
• Max. nodes: 127 (via repeater)
7.8.1.1 Technical data for the CAN bus interface
EMC protection requirements Immunity to interference as per EN 61000-6-2 (evalua-
tion criterion-A)
Emitted interference as per EN 61000-6-4
Connectors X3 and X4 In each case a 4-pin plug connector with socket connec-
tors (eXLink plug connector Fa. CEAG, coding 1h)
Ö Chap. "7.8.1.2 Pin assignment, CAN connectors",
page 78
Physical ISO 11898 CAN-HIGH SPEED
Maximum voltage capacity ±40 V long-term (between CAN_H and CAN_L)
±500 V long-term referenced to supply zero (optical
isolation)
±2.5 ESD (classification A: Human Body Model,
C = 100 pF, R = 1.5 kΩ)
Maximum permissible number
of CAN bus nodes
32 or 110
Ö Chap. "7.16.2 Permissible number of CAN bus
nodes", page 110
Tab. 9: Technical data for the CAN bus interface
7 Electrical connection Fieldbus connectors X3 and X4
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 78
7.8.1.2 Pin assignment, CAN connectors
CAN connectors X3
and X4
Fig. 17: CAN connectors X3 and X4
7.8.2 Profibus-DP connectors
The Profibus-DP has the following features:
• Standardized in accordance with EN 61158-2 (type 3)
• Multi-master system:
Masters share access time and initiate communication.
Slaves react only on request.
• Topology: Line structure with short stub lines
• Network expansion and transmission rates:
100 m at 12 Mbit/s to 1,200 m at 9.6 kbit/s per segment
Use of repeaters possible
• Addressing type: address-oriented
Priority/cycle time assignment of messages via master configuration
• Physical bus: RS 485 according to TIA/EIA-485-A
Max. nodes: 127
View of CAN female receptacle X3 and X4 on
the valve (external thread, socket contacts)
3
2
1
4
5
Contact Assignment Description
1 CAN_V+ Not connected in the valve
2 CAN_GND CAN terminal resistor
3 CAN_H Transceiver H
4 CAN_L Transceiver L
5 CAN_SHLD Shield (applied on the control cabinet side)
CAUTION
Danger of property damage due to improper plug
connection!
In order to avoid damage to the explosion proof connector:
f Heed the notes and instructions in the "Ex connector
eXLink" operating instructions.
7 Electrical connection Fieldbus connectors X3 and X4
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 79
7.8.2.1 Technical data for the Profibus-DP interface
Technical data for
the Profibus-DP interface
EMC protection requirements Immunity to interference as per EN 61000-6-2 (evalua-
tion criterion-A)
Emitted interference as per EN 61000-6-4
Connectors X3 and X4 In each case a 4-pin plug connector with socket connec-
tors (eXLink plug connector Fa. CEAG, coding 5h)
Ö Chap. "7.8.2.2 Pin assignment, Profibus-DP connec-
tors", page 80
Physical Conformity as per test specification "PROFIBUS slaves
Version 2.0 of the PNO, Order-No: 2.032"
Maximum voltage capacity -9 V to 14 V (long-term) from signal cable to Profi GND
±500 V long-term referenced to supply zero (optical
isolation)
±40 V with a pulse of 15 µs via a resistance of 100 Ω
with an edge duration < 100 ns.
Maximum permissible number
of Profibus-DP nodes
32 bus nodes without repeater
With repeater up to 126 nodes
Tab. 10: Technical data for the Profibus-DP interface
7 Electrical connection Fieldbus connectors X3 and X4
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 80
7.8.2.2 Pin assignment, Profibus-DP connectors
Profibus DP connectors
X3 and X4
Fig. 18: Profibus DP connectors X3 and X4
7.8.3 EtherCAT connectors
The EtherCAT bus has the following features:
• Standardized in accordance with IEC 62407
• Single-master system:
The master initiates communication.
Slaves react only on request.
• Topology:
Line, star, tree and ring structure based on the daisy chain principle
• Network expansion and transmission rates:
100 m between two nodes at 100 Mbit/s
• Addressing type: Address-orientated, one telegram for all nodes
• Physical bus: Fast Ethernet
• Max. nodes: 65,535
View of the Profibus-DP female receptacle X3 and X4
on the valve (external thread, socket contacts)
2
1
4
3
5
Contact Assignment Description
1 Profibus V+ Terminal resistors for RXD/TXD-P
2 Profibus A RXD/TXD-N
3 Profibus GND Terminal resistors for RXD/TXD-N
4 Profibus B RXD/TXD-P
5 Shield Positioned on control cabinet side
CAUTION
Danger of property damage due to improper plug
connection!
In order to avoid damage to the explosion proof connector:
f Heed the notes and instructions in the "Ex connector
eXLink" operating instructions.
7 Electrical connection Fieldbus connectors X3 and X4
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 81
7.8.3.1 Technical data for the EtherCAT interface
Technical data for
the EtherCAT interface
EMC protection requirements Immunity to interference as per EN 61000-6-2 (evalua-
tion criterion-A)
Emitted interference as per EN 61000-6-4
Connectors X3 and X4 In each case a 4-pin plug connector with socket connec-
tors (eXLink plug connector Fa. CEAG, coding 5h)
Ö Chap. "7.8.3.2 Pin assignment, EtherCAT connec-
tors", page 82
Physical 4-core, paired cable as per CAT 5 for 100-Base-TX
transmission
Network topology: Tree and line
Termination: device-internal
Transmission rate: 100 Mbit/s
As per EN 61158-2 Type 12 EtherCAT, "PHYSICAL
LAYER SPECIFICATION AND SERVICE DEFINI-
TION" and ISO/IEC 8802-3 100 Base-TX (IEEE 802.3
Section 24)
Maximum voltage capacity ±500 V long-term referenced to supply zero (optical
isolation)
Maximum permissible number of
EtherCAT bus nodes
65.536
The maximum number of nodes in a fieldbus line is 216.
Tab. 11: Technical data for the EtherCAT interface
7 Electrical connection Fieldbus connectors X3 and X4
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 82
7.8.3.2 Pin assignment, EtherCAT connectors
EtherCAT connectors
X3 and X4
Fig. 19: EtherCAT connectors X3 and X4
To connect the valves to an EtherCAT network, we recommend molded cord
sets with an integral straight mating connector.
Ö Chap. "7.18 Wiring EtherCAT networks (X3, X4)", page 114
View of the EtherCAT female receptacle X3 and X4 on
the valve (external thread, socket contacts)
2
1
4
3
Contact Assignment Description
1 TX+ Transmit
2 RX+ Receive
3 TX- Transmit
4 RX- Receive
CAUTION
Danger of property damage due to improper plug
connection!
In order to avoid damage to the explosion proof connector:
f Heed the notes and instructions in the "Ex connector
eXLink" operating instructions.
7 Electrical connection Analog input connectors X5, X6 and X7
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 83
The analog inputs of connectors X5, X6 and X7 have a resolution of 14 bits.
Analog input
connectors X5, X6 and X7
View of the analog input female receptacle X5, X6 and X7 on the valve
(external thread, socket contacts)
Fig. 20: Analog input connectors X5, X6 and X7
Ö Chap. "7.19 Wiring analog inputs (X5, X6, X7)", page 117
Power supply to the transducer
Power supply to
the transducer at
connectors X5, X6, X7
The transducer is supplied with power via pin 1 of connectors X5, X6 and X7.
Ö Fig. 20, page 83
An external power supply to the transducer is also possible. However, the
0 V transducer supply must be connected to supply zero. An interruption of the
transducer supply current can be identified as a cable break (see "Firmware"
User Manual).
The supply voltage is cut off in the event of a possible short circuit in the supply
voltage to the transducer. A fault reaction can be configured (see "Firmware"
User Manual). The voltage is available again as soon as the short circuit has
been eliminated.
7.9 Analog input connectors X5, X6 and X7
7.9.1 Pin assignment, analog input connectors X5, X6 and X7
4
3
2
1
Contact Assignment Description
1 Transducer supply +24 V, I
max
(X2+X5+X6+X7) = 300 mA referenced
to pin 3
2 Reference point of analog
input
Reference point for pin 4
3 Transducer supply 0 V Supply zero
4 Analog input Current or voltage input referenced to pin 2
There is joint fusing of this power supply for X2, X5, X6 and X7.
The entire supply current may not exceed the following value:
I
max
(X2+X5+X6+X7) = 300 mA
7 Electrical connection Analog input connectors X5, X6 and X7
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 84
7.9.2 Signal types
Signal types of the analog
inputs at connectors X5,
X6, X7
The analog inputs are available in the following versions:
•±10V
•0–10V
•0–10mA
•4–20mA
The inputs can be operated in each case differentially or single-ended (one
input cable referenced to supply zero).
Which signal type is set for the analog inputs on delivery depends on the valve
model. The signal types can be configured via the firmware.
Signal type for the analog input: ±10 V
Analog input: ±10In the case of this signal type, the input is configured as either a differential or
a single-ended voltage input with a ±10 V input range.
Ö Chap. "7.9.3 Input resistances", page 85
The potential difference of each input to supply zero must be between -15 V
and 32 V.
If there is no differential analog source available, the reference point of the
analog input (pin 2) must be connected to 0 V of the analog source.
Signal type for the analog input: 0–10 V
Analog input: 0 –10 VFor this signal type, the input is either configured as a differential or as a single-
ended voltage input with 0–10 V input range.
Ö Chap. "7.9.3 Input resistances", page 85
The potential difference of each input to supply zero must be between -15 V
and 32 V.
If there is no differential analog source available, the reference point of the
analog input (pin 2) must be connected to 0 V of the analog source.
Signal type for the analog input: 0–10 mA
Analog input: 0–10 mA In the case of this signal type, the input is configured as either a differential or
a single-ended current input with a 0–10 mA input range.
Ö Chap. "7.9.3 Input resistances", page 85
The analog input is deactivated in the event of an excessively high input
current.
The potential difference of each input to supply zero must be between -15 V
and 32 V.
If there is no floating analog source available, the reference point of the analog
input (pin 2) must be connected to 0 V of the analog source.
Detailed information can be found in the "Firmware" User Manual.
7 Electrical connection Analog input connectors X5, X6 and X7
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 85
Signal type for the analog input: 4–20 mA
Analog input: 4–20 mA In the case of this signal type, the input is configured as either a differential or
a single-ended current input with a 4–20 mA input range.
Ö Chap. "7.9.3 Input resistances", page 85
The analog input is deactivated in the event of an excessively high input
current.
The potential difference of each input to supply zero must be between -15 V
and 32 V.
If there is no floating analog source available, the reference point of the analog
input (pin 2) must be connected to 0 V of the analog source.
In the 4–20 mA signal range signals of I
In
< 3 mA (e.g. due to a defective
electric cable) signify a fault, which can be evaluated by the valve software.
The monitoring must be activated in the valve software.
7.9.3 Input resistances
Input resistances The input resistances of the analog inputs are dependent on the set signal type
and the version.
Tab. 12: Input resistances X5, X6, X7
Fig. 21: Equivalent circuit diagram of analog input
Signal type Version R
D
R
1
R
2
Voltage
±10 V; 0–10 V
Differential 200 kΩ 250 kΩ 10 kΩ
Single-ended 200 kΩ 250 kΩ <12Ω
Current
0–10 mA; 4–20 mA
Differential 240 Ω 100 kΩ 10 kΩ
Single-ended 252 Ω 100 kΩ <12Ω
A
nalog input
Reference point
of analog input
Sensor supply zero
7 Electrical connection Service connector X10
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 86
7.10 Service connector X10
Service connector X10 This interface serves to connect diagnostic and start-up tools and is available
on connector X10.
Service connector X10
(M8, 3-pin)
View of service connector X10
(external thread, pin contacts)
Fig. 22: Service connector X10 (M8, 3-pin)
Valves without CAN bus interfaces can be started up and configured via the
service interface (service connector X10) with the Moog Valve and Pump
Configuration Software.
Contact Assignment Description
1 CAN_H Transceiver H
3 Not assigned
4 CAN_L Transceiver L
WARNING
Danger of explosion!
To guarantee safe operation in hazardous areas.
f In its standard model with screw plug, the service connector
X10 is not permitted for use in hazardous areas.
f For mounting of the screw plug of the service connector
X10, it must be observed that the gasket and the threads of
the screw plug as well as the threads in the electronic
housing of the valve are not damaged.
f In case of damage to the screw plug of the service
connector or the threads in the electronic housing, the valve
must not be operated in hazardous areas.
f Tightening torque screw plug:
Ö Chap. "3.1.2 Representative depiction of the valve",
page 18
7 Electrical connection Service connector X10
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 87
DANGER
Danger of explosion!
An explosion can be triggered by sparks when switching on
the machine.
f Open connectors for the interface must absolutely be
covered before start-up.
f The eXLink connectors from CEAG must be mounted
according to the instructions in the operating instructions for
the eXLink connectors.
f In the standard model with a screw plug, the service
connector X10 is not permitted for use in hazardous areas.
f The service connector X10 in the standard model M8, 3-pin
must be sealed with the original screw plug belonging to
the valve before start-up.
f When mounting the screw plug for the service connector
X10, it must be observed that the gasket and the thread
of the screw plug as well as the thread in the electronic
housing of the valve are not damaged.
f In case of damage to the screw plug for the service
connector X10 or the threads in the electronic housing,
the valve must not be operated.
f Tightening torque for screw plug:
Ö Chap. "3.1.2 Representative depiction of the valve",
page 18
For the standard model of the valve, the service interface is not
suitable for use in hazardous areas. On request, the service inter-
face is available in an explosion-proof model.
7 Electrical connection General notes on wiring
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 88
7.11 General notes on wiring
7.11.1 Tools and materials required
DANGER
Danger of explosion!
An explosion can be triggered by sparks when switching on
the machine.
f Open connectors for the interface must absolutely be
covered before start-up.
f The eXLink connectors from CEAG must be mounted
according to the instructions in the operating instructions for
the eXLink connectors.
f In the standard model with a screw plug, the service
connector X10 is not permitted for use in hazardous areas.
f The service connector X10 in the standard model M8, 3-pin
must be sealed with the original screw plug belonging to
the valve before start-up.
f When mounting the screw plug for the service connector
X10, it must be observed that the gasket and the thread
of the screw plug as well as the thread in the electronic
housing of the valve are not damaged.
f In case of damage to the screw plug for the service
connector X10 or the threads in the electronic housing,
the valve must not be operated.
f Tightening torque for screw plug:
Ö Chap. "3.1.2 Representative depiction of the valve",
page 18
WARNING
Danger of explosion!
To guarantee safe operation in hazardous areas:
f The signal interfaces of the valve are implemented with
explosion-proof connectors.
f For mounting and removal of the connectors as well as
operation of the valve, the notes and instructions in the
"Explosion-proof connectors eXLink, CEAG" operating
instructions must absolutely be adhered to.
CAUTION
Danger of property damage due to improper plug
connection!
In order to avoid damage to the explosion proof connector:
f Heed the notes and instructions in the "Ex connector
eXLink" operating instructions.
7 Electrical connection General notes on wiring
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 89
Tool required The following are required for electrically connecting the valves:
• Mating connector for connector X1 (7-pin)
• Connection cables for mating connector
• Crimping tool for mating connector with corresponding crimping insert
• Installation tool
The above-mentioned connectors, cables and tools are not included in the
valve scope of delivery. They are supplied separately.
Ö Chap. "12.1 Accessories for valves in the D67XK series", page 222
7.11.2 Procedure
Procedure for electrical
connection
Procedure for electrically connecting the valve:
1. Conduct electrical connection in accordance with the pin assignment.
Ö Chap. "7.4 Connector X1", page 69
2. Establish equipotential bonding, protective grounding and electrical
shielding.
Ö
Chap. "7.12 Protective grounding, equipotential bonding, and shield-
ing", page 90
Ö Chap. "7.13 Permissible lengths for connection cables", page 98
3. Valves with fieldbus interface: wire fieldbus.
Ö Chap. "7.16 Wiring CAN networks", page 106
Ö Chap. "7.17 Wiring Profibus-DP networks (X3, X4)", page 111
4. Check whether all the connectors and if necessary the service connector
to which no mating connector is attached are covered with a suitable dust
protection cap.
5. If necessary, put a dust protection cap on.
7.11.3 Wiring of supply lines, evaluation of digital
and analog signals
Evaluating the different
signal types
Activation of the analog inputs with differential signals is to be preferred. If the
signal cannot be transmitted differentially, the reference point of the input at the
valve must be connected to ground (supply zero).
Ö Chap. "7.14.1 Single-ended command signals", page 103
Because current inputs have a lower input resistance than voltage inputs and
are thus immune to interference, activation with a current signal is to be
preferred to activation with a voltage signal.
Benefits of the different
signal types for analog
inputs
Make sure to heed the instructions and notes in the eXLink plug
connector operating instructions from CEAG.
Signal type Benefits
±10 V or 0–10 V Simple measurement of the signal, e.g. with an oscilloscope.
±10 mA or 0–10 mA Large transmission lengths are possible.
4–20 mA Detection of faults in the electrical line and large transmission lengths
are possible.
Tab. 13: Benefits of the different signal types for analog inputs
7 Electrical connection Protective grounding, equipotential bonding, and shielding
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 90
7.12 Protective grounding, equipotential
bonding, and shielding
7.12.1 Overview
Guidelines for protective
grounding
The valves with integrated electronics are equipped with a protective conductor
connection ( ) in the connector or on the valve body in accordance with the
requirements of the standard EN 60204.
This chapter contains guidelines on protective grounding and electrical shield-
ing of cables in applications in which the valves with integrated electronics are
used.
CAUTION
Danger of personal injury and damage to property!
Improper grounding and shielding can cause damage, malfunc-
tions or failures of valves or the machine.
f The valves should only be used in such machines and
plants that comply with the requirements of the standard
EN 60204-1 and this chapter.
CAUTION
Risk of personal injury due to insufficient electrical safety
Compliance with the safety regulations requires that the
equipment be isolated from the mains system in accordance
with EN 61558-1 and EN 61558-2-6 that all voltages be limited
in accordance with EN 60204-1.
f Only use SELV/PELV power supplies!
7 Electrical connection Protective grounding, equipotential bonding, and shielding
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 91
7.12.2 Equipotential bonding and protective
grounding
Equipotential bonding
and protective grounding
of machines
• The purpose of equipotential bonding is to establish as small a potential
difference as possible within the machine.
• Protective grounding serves to maintain safety while the machine is in
operation.
• The term protective earth or PE designates only a single point within the
machine: the connection point of the external protective conductor. All ad-
ditional connections to ground-( ) are established via protective and
equipotential bonding conductors.
Fig. 23: Equipotential bonding and protective grounding of machines (see also EN 60204-1) and
electrical shielding of our valves with integrated electronics
Control cabinet
Control electronics
Machine
Shield connected to control cabinet
Protective
conductor
rail
Valve
with integrated
electronics
Equipotential bonding conductor
Potential difference
Shield, coverage > 80%
Electronic housing
Shield NOT
connected to
electronic housing
Connection between control
cabinet, shield, and PE
Shield connected
to valve plug
7 Electrical connection Protective grounding, equipotential bonding, and shielding
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 92
7.12.2.1 General principles
Performing equipotential
bonding
Required cross section of
the protective conductor
Maximum potential
difference
• Connect the electrical shielding and the electrical ground of the electron-
ics chassis point-to-point to the protective conductor rail.
• Before releasing a machine for normal operation, always check that all
equipotential bonding and protective conductors are in proper working or-
der in accordance with EN 60204-1, Section 18.
7.12.2.2 Protective conductor
Requirements of the
protective conductor
The valves must essentially only be operated with safe power supplies
(SELV/PELV). No dangerous voltages are generated in the valve.
Therefore, no protective conductor must be connected.
DANGER
Danger of explosion in case of unsafe operation!
In order to create as small a potential difference in the machine
as possible and guarantee safe operation of the machine,
the equipotential bonding and protective conducting system for
a machine in which the valves should be used must be
constructed according to EN 60204-1.
f Connect all elements of the machine to each other via
equipotential bonding conductors.
f Connect all elements of the machine that have exposed
metal surfaces via protective conductors to the protective
conductor rail.
f Connect all the protective conductors and the equipotential
bonding conductor in the main cabinet via the protective
conductor rail to the protective earth (PE) terminal.
The cross section of the protective conductor is specified in
EN 60204-1, Section 8. The following cross section have proven
successful for equipotential bonding conductors:
up to 200 m cable length: 16 mm
2
up to 200 m cable length: 25 mm
2
The potential difference between any two points within the machine
should not be more than 7 V peak (7 ).
V
ˆ
DANGER
Danger to life!
People can be injured and property damaged through the
operation of the valve with an unsafe power supply.
f Only use SELV/PELV power supplies as per EN 60204-1!
7 Electrical connection Protective grounding, equipotential bonding, and shielding
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 93
7.12.2.3 Ground loops
Avoiding ground loops If a valve is connected to protective earth (PE) both via the equipotential bond-
ing system and via the valve protective conductor, a compensating current can
split in the resulting ground loop. This current can cause serious malfunctions
in the machine.
Observe the following points in order to minimize as much as possible malfunc-
tions caused by a ground loop:
• Route the valve supply and signal cables as closely as possible to the
equipotential bonding conductor.
Ö Chap. "7.12.3 Machines with deficient equipotential bonding", page 94
• The impedance of the equipotential bonding system should be less than
10% of the impedance of the shielding of the lines.
7 Electrical connection Protective grounding, equipotential bonding, and shielding
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 94
Deficient equipotential
bonding
7.12.4 Electrical shielding
Electrical shielding An effectively shielded machine is to a high degree immune to external interfer-
ence sources. Furthermore, the interference emitted by the machine is reduced
considerably by effective shielding.
A functioning equipotential bonding system provides the basis for an effectively
shielded machine. To ensure that the cables are effectively shielded, it is
essential to satisfy the general requirements with regard to equipotential bond-
ing and protective grounding.
Ö Chap. "7.12.2 Equipotential bonding and protective grounding", page 91
7.12.4.1 Cables
Requirements of cables Observe the following points when choosing cables for connecting the valves:
• Only use shielded cables.
• The cable shield should be made of copper braiding with a minimum 80 %
coverage.
• The individual conductors must be made of copper and have a minimum
cross section of 0.2 mm
2
in accordance with EN 60204-1.
• Use cables with twisted pair conductors in environments with high back-
ground noise levels.
• The protective conductor should be guided within the cable shield.
Ö Chap. "7.12.2.2 Protective conductor", page 92
7.12.3 Machines with deficient equipotential bonding
DANGER
Danger to life due to electric shock!
Very strong current can flow via the shield connection of
the valve.
f Extreme caution is required since for some industrial
applications, no good equipotential bonding can be
implemented.
f An effective equipotential bonding system must be set up in
compliance with DIN EN 60204-1, Section 8.
7 Electrical connection Protective grounding, equipotential bonding, and shielding
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 95
7.12.4.2 Connecting the shield
Connection on the valve side
Connecting the shield
on the valve side
Connect the cable shield conductively to the metal shell of the connector.
Connection on control cabinet side
Connecting the shield on
the control cabinet side
Connection on the control cabinet side can be completed with either lead-
through cables or connectors.
Cable leadthrough
Connecting the shield
with cable leadthrough
Observe the following points when connecting the shield on the control cabinet
side:
• Connect the control cabinet's wall conductively to the protective conductor
rail ( ).
Ö Fig. 23, page 91
• Connect the cable shield correctly (flat, conductively) to the control
cabinet's wall.
Fig. 24: Connecting the shield to the control cabinet's wall (detail A from Fig. 23)
• Lead the cable shield without interruption through the wall of the EMC-
compliant control cabinet as closely as possible to the electronics chassis,
e.g. by means of a cable gland.
When connecting the shielding, only connectors in the accessories
for valves in the D67xK series may be used.
Cable to
the chassis
Sheath of the cable
removed, shield laid bare
Cable to
the valve
Control cabinet housing
Shield
connected
conductively
to housing
WARNING
Danger due to electric shock!
The shield of the cable must be laid correctly in order to prevent
faults in the machine and injuries to people.
f Do NOT connect the shield of the cable with the electronics
chassis.
7 Electrical connection Protective grounding, equipotential bonding, and shielding
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 96
Plug connection
Connecting the shield
with plug connection
Observe the following points when connecting the shield on the control cabinet
side:
• Connect the control cabinet's wall conductively to the protective conductor
rail ( ).
Ö Fig. 23, page 91
• Connect the shield of the cable coming from the valve to the housing
of the removable connector.
• Connect the connector mounted in the wall of the control cabinet to
the shield inside the cabinet.
Fig. 25: Connecting the cable shield via connector to the control cabinet's wall (detail A from
Fig. 23)
• Lead the shield inside the control cabinet as closely as possible to
the electronics chassis.
The housing of the connector permanently mounted in the control
cabinet must demonstrate a good-conducting connection with the
wall of the control cabinet.
Good conducting connection
between plug connector housing,
control cabinet housing, and shield
Metal housing plug
connector with -contact
Cable to
the valve
Shield is connected to
plug connector housing
Cable to
the chassis
WARNING
Danger due to electric shock!
The shield of the cable must be laid correctly in order to prevent
faults in the machine and injuries to people.
f Do NOT connect the shield of the cable with the electronics
chassis.
7 Electrical connection Protective grounding, equipotential bonding, and shielding
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 97
7.12.4.3 Insulated shielding
Insulated shielding in
the event of deficient
equipotential bonding
If connecting the shield to both ends of the cable is not desirable, such as in
a machine with deficient equipotential bonding, insulated shielding may be
required. However, this is normally only necessary if it is not possible to estab-
lish a good equipotential bonding system.
Observe the following points when connecting insulated shielding:
• Use metal shell connectors with a leading protective earth contact-( ) in
accordance with EN 60204-1.
• Connect the cable shield conductively to the metal shell of the connector.
• Connect the control cabinet's wall conductively to the protective conductor
rail ( ).
Ö Fig. 23, page 91
• Connect the cable shield via a capacitor (e.g. 10 nF / 100 VDC ceramic
capacitor) to the control cabinet's wall.
Fig. 26: Connecting the insulated shielding to the control cabinet's wall (detail A from Fig. 23)
• Install a separate shield connected to the control cabinet's wall inside the
control cabinet. Route this shield as closely as possible to the electronics
chassis.
7.12.4.4 Cable routing
Cable routing inside
the machine
The routing of the cable inside a machine must comply with the following
general guidelines:
• Route supply and signal cables in separate cable conduits.
• In order to minimize malfunctions caused by a ground loop, route the
valve connection cables as closely as possible to the equipotential bond-
ing conductor.
Ö Chap. "7.12.2.3 Ground loops", page 93
• Do not route cable conduits near strong electromagnetic interference
sources, such as electric motors or transformers.
• If the cable routing cannot eliminate the risk of lightning strokes com-
pletely, suitable protective measures must be taken, as described in
EN 60204-1.
Sheath of the cable removed,
shield interrupted
Cable to
the chassis
Cable to
the valve
Control cabinet
housing
Screw terminal
insulated against
control cabinet
housing
Shield connected
conductively
to housing
Condenser
WARNING
Danger due to electric shock!
The shield of the cable must be laid correctly in order to prevent
faults in the machine and injuries to people.
f Do NOT connect the shield of the cable with the electronics
chassis.
7 Electrical connection Permissible lengths for connection cables
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 98
7.13 Permissible lengths for connection
cables
7.13.1 Introduction
Dimensioning of supply
and signal cables
The valves with integrated electronics are supplied via 24 V supply cables and
controlled via analog or fieldbus cables.
This section of the chapter is intended to serve as a guide to dimensioning and
configuring supply and signal cables in order to guarantee adequate supply
voltage and signal quality for all the permissible valve operating states.
The maximum permissible length of supply and signal cables is limited by
the resistance and the capacitance per unit length of the cables.
7.13.2 Typical values for copper cables
The typical values specified here are used in the example calculations in
the following sections.
7.13.2.1 Resistance of cable
Calculating
the resistance
The typical resistance R
typ
of a copper cable of length-l is calculated as
follows:
7.13.2.2 Capacitance of cable
Calculating
the capacitance
The typical capacitance per unit length of copper cables is 50 pF/m.
The typical capacitance C
typ
of a copper cable of length-l is calculated as
follows:
Typical cross section used for connection
cables
Resistivity of copper at 20 °C
R
typ
ρ
Cu
q
typ
-------------
l 23.73
mΩ
m
--------------
l⋅=⋅⋅=
q
typ
0,25 mm
2
=
ρ
Cu
0.0178
Ωmm
2
m
-----------------------
=
C
typ
50
pF
m
------------
l⋅=
7 Electrical connection Permissible lengths for connection cables
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 99
7.13.3 24 V supply cables
Calculating the maximum
length of supply cables
The maximum permissible length l
max
of the supply cable is calculated as fol-
lows:
7.13.3.1 Voltage drop per unit length
Fig. 27: Voltage drop on the supply cable
The voltage drop per unit length over the forward and return lines of the supply
cable is calculated as follows:
U
min
= 18 V Lowest permissible supply voltage for valve
U
dr_max
= 6 V Maximum permissible voltage drop over the supply
cable
U
dr_max
=24V-U
min
voltage drop per unit length
Ö Chap. "7.13.3.1 Voltage drop per unit length",
page 99
l
max
U
dr_max
U
ab
l
------------
⎝⎠
⎛⎞
typ
----------------------------=
U
dr_max
l
max
U
ab
l
------------
⎝⎠
⎛⎞
typ
⋅=
U
ab
l
------------
⎝⎠
⎛⎞
typ
This calculation does not take into account a possible reduction of
the power supply output voltage on account of the connected load.
Nor does it take into account any voltage dips that can occur at the
moment when additional loads are connected.
Valve
Cable length
I
max
Maximum current consumption of valve
(see product-specific valve user manual)
R
typ
Typical resistance of the cable
Ö Chap. "7.13.2.1 Resistance of cable", page 98
l Length of the supply cable
U
ab
l
------------
⎝⎠
⎛⎞
typ
2I
max
R
typ
l
--------------
⎝⎠
⎛⎞
2I
max
23.73
mΩ
m
--------------
⋅⋅=⋅⋅=
7 Electrical connection Permissible lengths for connection cables
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 100
Examples of the voltage
drop of supply cables
7.13.3.2 Examples of the voltage drop of supply cables
Valve series
Max. current con-
sumption
I
max
Voltage drop
Max. permissible
cable length l
max
D67xK + D94xK 350 mA 17 mV/m 364 m
Tab. 14: Examples of the voltage drop of supply cables as a function of the cable length for a cable
cross section of 0.75 m
2
U
ab
l
------------
⎝⎠
⎛⎞
typ
7 Electrical connection Permissible lengths for connection cables
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 101
7.13.4 Analog signal cables
Influence of resistance R
Influence of resistance-R The influence of the resistance-R of the cable used on the maximum cable
length l
max
for signal cables is very low, as the currents flowing through signal
cables are very small.
Example:
For a cable length-l of 428 m the resistance-R according to the formula below
is only 10 Ω.
Influence of capacitance per unit length
Influence of capacitance
per unit length
The influence of the capacitance per unit length of the cable used on the maxi-
mum cable length l
max
for signal cables is considerably greater.
Calculating the limit
frequency
The capacitance C that increases with the cable length forms with the input
resistance R of an analog input a high pass of the first order, which can couple
high-frequency interference for example at signal inputs. The limit frequency-f
l
of the high pass is calculated as follows:
The longer the cable, the lower the limit frequency-f
l
of the high pass.
Example:
A cable length l of 10 m and a typical analog input resistance R of 10 kΩ
produce according to the formula below a limit frequency f
l
of 32 kHz.
Recommendations
With a differential voltage command signal and a cable length-l of 10 m the
EMC test was conducted in accordance with EN 61000-6-2. The interference
on the spool position during the interference (electromagnetic coupling, tran-
sient) was below 1 %. This can worsen as the cable is lengthened.
Current input with
cable length > 15 m
Experience shows that with cable lengths over 15 m a current input should be
used, as here the input resistance is smaller by a factor of 50.
The limit frequency-f
l
of the high pass also increases by the same factor, and
with it the input becomes more immune to interference.
Furthermore, the voltage drop on the cable does not have an effect in the event
of a current command signal.
Recommendation:
differential input
A differential input is always to be recommended, regardless of whether
a voltage or current signal is used as the command signal, since interference
coupled on the two input cables is subtracted to virtually zero.
R
ρ
Cu
q
typ
-------------
l⋅ 23.73
mΩ
m
--------------
428 m 10 Ω≈⋅==
f
g
1
2 π RC⋅⋅ ⋅
--------------------------------=
f
g
1
2 π RC⋅⋅ ⋅
--------------------------------
1
2 π R50
pF
m
------------
l⋅⋅ ⋅ ⋅
--------------------------------------------------==
f
g
1
2 π 10 kΩ 50
pF
m
------------
10 m⋅⋅ ⋅ ⋅
-------------------------------------------------------------------------=
f
g
32 kHz=
7 Electrical connection Wiring connector X1
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 102
7.13.5 Digital signal cables
7.13.5.1 Digital signal input cables
Length of digital signal
cables
Digital signal input cables, such as enable, are more non-critical with regard to
their cable lengths, because the currents are low (< 20 mA) and a greater
noise level distance is easier to maintain, since only two states/levels must be
differentiated.
7.13.5.2 Digital signal output cables
With digital signal output cables, such as monitoring and standby, currents up
to 1.5 A are encountered. In these cases, the voltage drop over longer cables
can no longer be neglected. Thus, these cables are subject to the same
requirements as supply cables.
Ö Chap. "7.13 Permissible lengths for connection cables", page 98
7.13.5.3 Fieldbus cables
Length of fieldbus cables In the case of digital fieldbus cables, the maximum possible cable lengths are
very different. For the most part the cable ends are terminated with low resis-
tance (power adaptation) in order to avoid signal reflections, which permits
longer cable lengths. The maximum possible cable lengths are laid down in
the standards of the relevant fieldbuses and depend among other things on
the transmission rate used.
7.14 Wiring connector X1
Wiring of the 7-pin
connector X1
Fig. 28: Wiring of the 7-pin connector X1
Q-valve
6
7
3
1
2
4
5
Supply voltage 24 V
Signal source
Supply zero (GND)
Digital input (enable)
Analog input 0
Reference point for analog input 0
Analog output 0
Digital output 0 (standby)
(optional digital output 1 (monitoring))
7 Electrical connection Wiring connector X1
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 103
7.14.1 Single-ended command signals
Basically, activation of the command inputs with differential signals is to be pre-
ferred. If the command signal cannot be transmitted differentially, the reference
point of the command input at the valve must be connected to ground (GND).
Circuit for single-ended
command signals
Fig. 29: Circuit for single-ended command signals
Single-ended connection
of the command inputs
If the command inputs are connected to ground (single-ended), the connection
cable must be as short as possible and have an appropriately large cross sec-
tion in order to keep the voltage drop as low as possible.
The voltage drop on the forward and return lines is generated by the supply
current I
Supply
of the valve electronics power circuit. It is proportional to the
length of the connection cable and varies according to the valve status.
Maximum permissible cable lengths:
Ö Chap. "7.13 Permissible lengths for connection cables", page 98
Input voltage U
in
=U
comm
-
U
cable
The voltage drop U
cable
on the return line and the resulting potential shift of
ground (supply zero) results in not the command signal U
comm
but rather
the input voltage U
in
being applied at the command input in accordance with
the following equation:
U
in
=U
comm
-U
cable
Command signal sources
with impressed
current I
comm
In the case of command signal sources with impressed current I
comm
, the po-
tential shift of ground (supply zero) has no effect on the signal. However,
changes in the voltage drop resulting from the valve's varying current
consumption must be corrected by the command signal source. If current con-
trol does not follow the voltage change in terms of time, the command signal at
the valve input may also be affected here.
Supply
24 V
Connector cable
Power
element
Valve
I
supply
U
comm
U
cable
I
comm
Command
signal
source
The function of single-ended command inputs is identical to the
function of differential command inputs.
7 Electrical connection Wiring connector X1
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 104
7.14.2 Conversion of actual value output signals I
out
Conversion of actual
value output signals I
out
4–20 mA into 2–10 V
The actual value output signals I
out
4–20 mA can be converted into U
out
2–10 V
in accordance with the following circuit.
7.14.2.1 Valves with 7-pin connector X1
Fig. 30: Circuit for converting the actual value output signals I
out
(for valves with 7-pin
connector X1)
Valve R
L
= 500 Ω (0.25 W)
Actual value con-
tact 4 and contact 5
U
out
= 2–10 V
7 Electrical connection Wiring SSI transducers (X2)
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 105
7.15 Wiring SSI transducers (X2)
Wiring SSI transducers
(X2)
An SSI transducer delivers an absolute position or angle signal, which can be
read in via the digital signal interface.
7.15.1 SSI master mode
In SSI master mode the integrated electronics generate internally the SSI clock
signal (CLK) with settable frequencies in the range between 78 kHz and
5MHz.
In the rest state the clock signal is at 1. The first falling edge of the clock signal
signals to the SSI transducer to maintain its current value. The following rising
edge of the clock signal starts the data transmission of the SSI transducer. The
output starts with the highest-value bit (MSB). After a complete data record has
been transmitted, the SSI transducer holds the data signal at 0 until it is ready
for a new transmission. The switching back of the data signal to 1 simulta-
neously satisfies the start condition for the SSI interface for triggering a new
read-in cycle.
Wiring diagram with SSI
transducer
Fig. 31: Wiring diagram with SSI transducer
Signals between valve and
a 16-bit SSI transducer
(example)
Fig. 32: Signals between valve and a 16-bit SSI transducer (example)
The signal levels conform to the standard EIA-422.
SSI transducers can be used with either Gray codes or binary coded data.
A maximum of 32 bits is possible.
Detailed information can be found in the "Firmware" User Manual.
Valve
Valve with
SSI transducer
input
Data signal
SSI transducer
SSI clock signal (CLK)
CLK
MSB
D15
D14
D13
D12 D11
D10 D9 D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
LSB
Data
Detailed information can be found in the "Firmware" User Manual.
7 Electrical connection Wiring CAN networks
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 106
7.16 Wiring CAN networks
The valves are equipped with an electrically isolated CAN interface depending
on the model. The CAN interface is supplied internally.
Procedure Procedure for connecting the valve to the CAN bus
1. Establish the electrical connection to the CAN bus.
Ö Chap. "7.8.1 CAN connectors", page 77
2. Set the module address.
Ö Chap. "7.16.3 CAN module address (node ID)", page 110
3. Set the transmission rate.
Ö Chap. "7.16.4 CAN transmission rate", page 110
4. Check the configuration of the valve software and the controller settings.
Observe the following points when wiring CAN networks:
• All cables, connectors and terminal resistors used in CAN networks
should comply with ISO 11898.
• Correct version of protective grounding and electrical shielding.
Ö Chap. "7.12 Protective grounding, equipotential bonding, and shield-
ing", page 90
• Use shielded cables with four cores (twisted pair) and surge impedance of
120 Ω(CAN_H, CAN_L, CAN_GND and CAN_SHLD grounded).
• A CAN bus cable must not branch but short stub cables with T-connectors
are permitted.
• Stub cables must be as short as possible.
• Maximum stub cable length:
Ö Chap. "7.16.1 Cable lengths and cable cross sections", page 109
• The cable between CAN_L and CAN_H at both CAN bus cable ends must
be ended by a terminal resistor of 120 Ω ±10%.
• A terminal resistor can be omitted if the valve-internal terminal resistor
(deactivated as standard) is activated (for configuration, see "Firmware"
User Manual).
• Reference potential CAN_GND and CAN_SHLD may be connected to
protective earth/ground (PE) at one point only (on a connector with termi-
nal resistor, for example).
• The transmission rate must be adapted to the CAN bus cable length.
Ö Chap. "7.16.1 Cable lengths and cable cross sections", page 109
• The maximum permissible number of CAN bus nodes in the CAN network
must not be exceeded.
CAUTION
Danger of personal injury and damage to property!
Failure to heed safety instructions causes malfunctions and
thus corresponding risks to people and equipment.
f Please heed all the safety instructions prior to and during
start-up.
7 Electrical connection Wiring CAN networks
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 107
Ö Chap. "7.16.2 Permissible number of CAN bus nodes", page 110
• Do not lay CAN Bus cables in the immediate vicinity of disturbance
sources. If interference sources cannot be avoided, use double-shielded
cables.
Wiring diagram of
the CAN network
Fig. 33: CAN wiring diagram
Customer-side connection
of CAN bus to the valve
if terminal resistor is
required
Fig. 34: Connection of the CAN bus valve with terminal resistor
Interference immunity
in CAN networks
Terminal resistor with
ground connection
No terminal
resistor
Branch line
Branch line
Valve Valve Valve
Control
4
1
2
3
5
In the customer-side eXLink connector,
a bridge must be set internally
between pin 3 and pin 2 if
the terminal resistor should
be switched. The looping through
of a supply voltage is not possible
with this type of terminal resistor.
For CAN bus nodes without a galvanically isolated CAN bus inter-
face, CAN_GND is generally connected to supply voltage GND
inside the device.
In these cases, the supply voltage connection cable must be
grounded at the same point inside the machine as the CAN_GND
connection cable.
Maximum interference immunity is achieved in extensive CAN net-
works by using solely CAN bus nodes with galvanically isolated
CAN bus interface.
If it is not possible to dispense with CAN bus nodes without galvan-
ically isolated CAN bus interface, arrange these nodes in the
immediate vicinity of the central ground point. The cable length to
this central ground point is to be kept as short as possible. It is par-
ticularly important in this respect to ensure that the equipotential
bonding line is properly dimensioned!
7 Electrical connection Wiring CAN networks
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 108
Connection of the valve
to a PC via the CAN bus
interface (X3)
Fig. 35: Connection of the valve to a PC via the CAN bus interface (fieldbus connector X3)
USB start-up
moduleConfiguration/
start-up cable
PCValve
Fieldbus connector X3 USB port
Hazardous area Safe area
DANGER
Danger of explosion!
To guarantee safe operation in hazardous areas:
f In its standard model with screw plug, the service connector
X10 is not permitted for use in hazardous areas.
f For mounting of the screw plug of the service connector
X10, it must be observed that the gasket and the threads
of the screw plug as well as the threads in the electronic
housing of the valve are not damaged.
f In case of damage to the screw plug of the service
connector or the threads in the electronic housing, the valve
must not be operated in hazardous areas.
f Tightening torque screw plug:
Ö Chap. "3.1.2 Representative depiction of the valve",
page 18
The use of the service interface in the standard version is only
permitted outside the hazardous area.
7 Electrical connection Wiring CAN networks
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 109
7.16.1 Cable lengths and cable cross sections
Cable lengths and cable
cross sections
Maximum cable length
Maximum length of stub
cables
7.16.1.1 Suitable cable types for CAN networks
Suitable cable types
for CAN networks
Transmission rate Maximum cable length
1,000 kbit/s 25 m
800 kbit/s 50 m
500 kbit/s 100 m
250 kbit/s 250 m
125 kbit/s 500 m
100 kbit/s 650 m
50 kbit/s 1,000 m
20 kbit/s 2500 m
Tab. 15: Recommendation for maximum cable lengths
in CAN networks, depending on the transmission rate
Cable cross section
Maximum cable length for n CAN bus nodes
n = 32 n = 64 n = 100
0.25 mm
2
200 m 170 m 150 m
0.50 mm
2
360 m 310 m 270 m
0.75 mm
2
550 m 470 m 410 m
Tab. 16: Recommendation for maximum cable lengths in CAN networks,
depending on the cable cross section and the number n of CAN bus nodes
Transmission rate
Maximum stub cable length
Maximum Cumulative
1,000 kbit/s 2 m 20 m
500 kbit/s 6 m 39 m
250 kbit/s 6 m 78 m
125 kbit/s 6 m 156 m
Tab. 17: Maximum permissible stub cable lengths in CAN networks
Parameter Value
Surge impedance 120 Ω
Tab. 18: Specification of electrical data for CAN bus cables
Manufacturer Cable type
Web: http://www.draka-
mog.com
Draka ToughCAT7 Mud Protected
Tab. 19: Suitable cable types for CAN networks
7 Electrical connection Wiring CAN networks
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 110
7.16.2 Permissible number of CAN bus nodes
Maximum number of CAN
bus nodes
The CAN bus interface for the valve electronics supports integration in CAN
networks with up to 110 CAN bus nodes.
However, the maximum permissible number of CAN bus nodes can be
restricted by other nodes with an older CAN bus driver to 32.
A maximum of 127 nodes can be operated in a CAN network thanks to the use
of repeaters. However, it is necessary to bear in mind here the additionally in-
serted signal propagation time, which limits the maximum expansion of the
CAN network.
7.16.3 CAN module address (node ID)
CAN module address
(node ID)
The factory setting for the module address of the valve electronics is 127.
The module address can be changed with the LSS services (Layer Setting
Services) via the CAN bus.
If there are no additional nodes present on the CAN bus, it is possible to set the
node ID via the LSS Service Switch Mode Global.
To change the module address of the valve electronics with a CAN bus net-
work, it is essential to address the valve electronics unambiguously via the LSS
address. The node ID is then set via the LSS Service Switch Mode Selective.
It is also possible to configure the module address via service interface X10.
7.16.4 CAN transmission rate
CAN transmission rate
The factory setting for the transmission rate is 500 kbit/s.
CAUTION
Danger due to malfunctions!
A multiple use of module addresses causes malfunctions and
thus corresponding dangers to people and equipment.
f Each module address may only be used once within a CAN
bus network.
The module address of the valve electronics can also be altered
with the Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software.
The transmission rate must be set to the same value for all the
CAN bus nodes within a CAN bus network.
The transmission rate can be changed with the LSS services
(Layer Setting Services) via the CAN bus.
The transmission rate of the valves/pumps can also be altered with
the Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software.
7 Electrical connection Wiring Profibus-DP networks (X3, X4)
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 111
7.17 Wiring Profibus-DP networks (X3, X4)
Wiring, Depending on
the Model, of Profibus-DP
Networks
The valves are equipped with an electrically isolated Profibus-DP interface
depending on the model. The Profibus-DP interface is supplied internally.
Procedure Procedure for connecting the valves to the Profibus-DP
1. Establish the electrical connection to the Profibus-DP.
Ö Chap. "7.8.2 Profibus-DP connectors", page 78
2. Set the module address.
Ö Chap. "7.17.3 Profibus-DP module address (node ID)", page 113
3. Check the configuration of the valve software and the controller settings.
Observe the following points when wiring Profibus-DP networks:
• It is recommended to use 2-core Profibus cables so as to prevent
the power supply to the terminal resistors from being connected in parallel.
• The specification EN 61158-2 describes two cable types. Type B can be
used with limitation.
• Stub cables must be as short as possible.
• Avoid stub cables in the case of transmission rates in excess of
1,500 kbit/s.
• If stub cables are used, do not use any terminal resistors in this branch.
• The stub cable length in the case of transmission rates in excess of
1,500 kbit/s should not exceed 6.6 m in total.
CAUTION
Danger of personal injury and damage to property!
Failure to heed safety instructions causes malfunctions and
thus corresponding risks to people and equipment.
f Please heed all the safety instructions prior to and during
start-up.
7 Electrical connection Wiring Profibus-DP networks (X3, X4)
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 112
Wiring diagram of
the Profibus-DP networks
Fig. 36: Profibus-DP wiring diagram
Customer-side connection
of Profibus to the valve
if terminal resistor is
required
Fig. 37: Connection valve Profibus with terminal resistor
7.17.1 Cable lengths and cable cross sections
Cable lengths and cable
cross sections
Terminal
resistor
No terminal
resistor
Branch line
Branch line
Valve Valve Valve
Control
5
4
3
1
2
In the customer-side eXLink connector,
a bridge must be set internally be-
tween pin 1 and pin 4 and pin
2 and pin 3 if the termi-
nal resistor should be
switched.
Transmission rate Maximum cable length without repeaters
12,000 kbit/s 100 m
1,500 kbit/s 200 m
500 kbit/s 400 m
187.5 kbit/s 1,000 m
93.75 kbit/s 1,200 m
45.45 kbit/s 1,200 m
19.2 kbit/s 1,200 m
9.6 kbit/s 1,200 m
Tab. 20: Recommendation for maximum cable lengths in Profibus-DP networks, depending on
the transmission rate
7 Electrical connection Wiring Profibus-DP networks (X3, X4)
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 113
7.17.1.1 Suitable cable types for Profibus-DP networks
Suitable cable types for
Profibus-DP networks
7.17.2 Permissible number of Profibus nodes
Permissible number
of Profibus-DP nodes
The Profibus-DP interface of the valve electronics supports integration into
Profibus-DP networks with up to 32 Profibus nodes.
A maximum of 126 nodes can be operated in a Profibus-DP network with the
use of repeaters.
7.17.3 Profibus-DP module address (node ID)
Profibus-DP module
address (node ID)
The module address can be configured by sending a Set_Slave_Add telegram
from a controller. There is also the option of configuring the module address by
writing to the Profibus module identifier.
It is also possible to configure the module address via service interface X10.
The factory setting for the module address of the valve electronics is 126.
7.17.4 Profibus-DP transmission rate
Profibus-DP transmission
rate
The valve electronics are automatically set to the transmission rate specified
by the Profibus master. It is not possible, nor is it necessary, to configure the
transmission rate on the slave side.
Parameter Value
Characteristic cable impedance (Ω) 135 to 165
at 3 to 20 MHz
Effective capacitance (pF/m) < 30
Loop impedance (Ω/km) < 110
Cable diameter (mm) > 0.64
Cable cross section (mm
2
) > 0.34
Tab. 21: Specification of electrical data for Profibus-DP cables (as per type A)
Manufacturer Cable type
Web: http://www.drakamog.com Draka ToughCAT7 Mud Protected
Tab. 22: Suitable cable types for Profibus-DP networks
CAUTION
Danger due to malfunctions!
A multiple use of module addresses causes malfunctions and
thus corresponding dangers to people and equipment.
f Each module address may only be used once within
a Profibus DP network.
The module address of the valve electronics can also be altered
with the Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software.
7 Electrical connection Wiring EtherCAT networks (X3, X4)
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 114
7.18 Wiring EtherCAT networks (X3, X4)
Wiring EtherCAT networksThe valves are equipped with an electrically isolated EtherCAT interface
depending on the model. The EtherCAT interface is supplied internally.
Procedure Procedure for connecting the valves to the EtherCAT bus
1. Establish the electrical connection to the EtherCAT bus.
Ö Chap. "7.8.3 EtherCAT connectors", page 80
2. Optional: Set the module address.
Ö Chap. "7.18.3 EtherCAT module address (node ID)", page 116
3. Check the configuration of the valve software and the controller settings,
in particular the command signal source.
Observe the following points when wiring EtherCAT networks:
• All cables must be designed as shielded cables with twisted-pair litz wires as
per ISO/IEC 8802-3 100 Base-TX and CAT 5 as per ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1.
• The cable length between two nodes must not exceed 100 m as per
ISO/IEC 8802-3 100 Base-TX.
• The maximum permissible number of EtherCAT nodes must not
exceed 65,536.
• The cable between the nodes must not branch.
• An external cable termination (terminal resistor) as in CAN or Profibus-DP
networks is not necessary.
CAUTION
Danger of personal injury and damage to property!
Failure to heed safety instructions causes malfunctions and
thus corresponding risks to people and equipment.
f Please heed all the safety instructions prior to and during
start-up.
Detailed information can be found in the "Firmware" User Manual.
7 Electrical connection Wiring EtherCAT networks (X3, X4)
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 115
Wiring diagram of
the EtherCAT network
Fig. 38: EtherCAT wiring diagram
Pin assignment for
the EtherCAT cable
Fig. 39: Twisted-pair litz wires in Ethernet/EtherCAT cables with M12 connectors
An RJ45 connector is usually used on the controller side. The colors of the litz
wires are standardized in accordance with IEEE 802.3 for Ethernet.
7.18.1 Suitable cable types for EtherCAT networks
Suitable cable types
for EtherCAT networks
CAT 5 cable according to ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1. e.g. Draka ToghCAT7 Mud
Protected
No terminal
resistor
Valve Valve Valve
Control
Rx+
Rx-
Tx+
Tx-
Tx+
Tx-
Rx+
Rx-
1
3
2
4
1
3
2
4
Signal X3, X4 Litz wire RJ45
Litz wire (RJ45,
4-core cable)
TX+ 1 orange 1 orange/white
(yellow/white)
RX+ 2 blue 3 green/white
TX- 3 white (shielded
with orange)
2 orange
RX- 4 white (shielded
with blue)
6 green
Shield Housing
Tab. 23: Assignment of Ethernet/EtherCAT signals with mixed connector types
7 Electrical connection Wiring EtherCAT networks (X3, X4)
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 116
7.18.2 Permissible number of EtherCAT nodes
Permissible number
of EtherCAT nodes
The EtherCAT interface of the valve electronics supports integration into Ether-
CAT networks with up to 65,535 EtherCAT nodes.
The maximum number of nodes in a fieldbus line is 216.
The number of nodes determines the signal propagation time of the data pack-
ets and the resulting possible cycle times.
7.18.3 EtherCAT module address (node ID)
EtherCAT module address
(node ID)
EtherCAT nodes can be addressed using the physical position within the net-
work. This procedure is known as auto-increment addressing.
If position-independent addressing is preferred, a static module address can
also be allocated. This addressing type is known as fixed node addressing.
Auto-increment addressing
Each EtherCAT node is identified using the physical position within the network
segment. For this purpose, each EtherCAT node increments a 16-bit address
field within a telegram, which is sent through the entire network. The advantage
of this mechanism lies in the fact that no module address has to be set manu-
ally for the fieldbus nodes.
Fixed node addressing
With fixed node addressing a node is addressed via the so-called Configured
Station Alias. This address can be configured by the network master in the
Slave Information Interface (SII).
There is also the option of configuring the module address by writing to the
EtherCAT module identifier.
The advantage of fixed node addressing over auto-increment addressing lies in
the fact that the nodes can still be addressed at the same address even after
the network topology has been changed or after nodes have bee added or
removed.
The factory setting for the module address of the valve electronics is 0.
It is also possible to configure the module address via service interface X10.
7.18.4 EtherCAT transmission rate
EtherCAT-DP
transmission rate
EtherCAT works with a fixed transmission rate of 100 Mbit/s.
CAUTION
Danger due to malfunctions!
A multiple use of module addresses causes malfunctions and
thus corresponding dangers to people and equipment.
f Each module address may only be used once within an
EtherCAT network.
The module address of the valve electronics can also be altered
with the Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software.
7 Electrical connection Wiring analog inputs (X5, X6, X7)
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 117
Maximum current of
transducer supply
The signal connectors X5, X6, and X7 are wired the same in the valve. On pin 1,
a supply voltage of 24 V DC is made available by the valve in order to supply
sensors.
An external power supply to the transducer is also possible. However,
the 0 V transducer supply must be connected to supply zero. An interruption of
the transducer supply current can be identified as a cable break (see "Firm-
ware" User Manual).
The supply voltage is cut off in the event of a possible short circuit in the supply
voltage to the transducer. A fault reaction can be configured (see "Firmware"
User Manual). The voltage is available again as soon as the short circuit has
been eliminated.
The supply current for each transducer is monitored for the purpose of detect-
ing cable breaks. Supply currents under 1 mA can trigger a configurable fault
reaction.
2/3/4-wire transducers with a voltage or current output can be connected to X5,
X6 and X7. Each input can be individually adapted.
7.19 Wiring analog inputs (X5, X6, X7)
There is joint fusing of this power supply for X2, X5, X6 and X7.
The entire supply current may not exceed the following value:
I
max
(X2+X5+X6+X7) = 300 mA
7 Electrical connection Wiring analog inputs (X5, X6, X7)
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 118
2-wire transducers
2-wire transducers can only be operated in the signal type for the 0–10 mA or
4–20 mA analog input in the single-ended version.
Wiring the 2-wire
transducer
Fig. 40: Connecting a 2-wire transducer to analog input connectors X5, X6 or X7
3-wire transducers
3-wire transducers can only be operated in the single-ended version.
Wiring the 3-wire
transducer
Fig. 41: Connecting a 3-wire transducer to analog input connectors X5, X6 or X7
4-wire transducers
4-wire transducers should be operated in the differential version.
Wiring the 4-wire
transducer
Fig. 42: Connecting a 4-wire transducer to analog input connectors X5, X6 or X7
1
2
3
4
2-wire transducer
+
-
- Transducer supply
- Reference point for analog input
- Transducer supply 0 V
- Analog input
1
2
3
4
OUT
+
-
3-wire transducer
- Transducer supply
- Reference point for analog input
- Transducer supply 0 V
- Analog input
1
2
3
4
OUT
REF
+
-
4-wire transducer
- Transducer supply
- Reference point for analog input
- Transducer supply 0 V
- Analog input
7 Electrical connection Electrical start-up
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 119
7.20 Electrical start-up
DANGER
Danger of explosion!
An explosion can be triggered by sparks when switching on
the machine.
f Open connectors for the interface must absolutely be
covered before start-up.
f The eXLink connectors from CEAG must be mounted
according to the instructions in the operating instructions for
the eXLink connectors.
f In the standard model with a screw plug, the service
connector X10 is not permitted for use in hazardous areas.
f The service connector X10 in the standard model M8, 3-pin
must be sealed with the original screw plug belonging to
the valve before start-up.
f When mounting the screw plug for the service connector
X10, it must be observed that the gasket and the thread
of the screw plug as well as the thread in the electronic
housing of the valve are not damaged.
f In case of damage to the screw plug for the service
connector X10 or the threads in the electronic housing,
the valve must not be operated.
f Tightening torque for screw plug:
Ö Chap. "3.1.2 Representative depiction of the valve",
page 18
WARNING
Danger of explosion!
To guarantee safe operation in hazardous areas:
f The signal interfaces of the valve are implemented with
explosion-proof connectors.
f For mounting and removal of the connectors as well as
operation of the valve, the notes and instructions in the
"Explosion-proof connectors eXLink, CEAG" operating
instructions must absolutely be adhered to.
WARNING
Danger of explosion!
For electrical start-up, cables on the valve, cable glands, screw
plugs, and connectors must not be damaged.
f The valve must not be started up with damaged cables, plug
connectors, and screw plugs, and it must be sent to us or to
one of our authorized service centers immediately.
For the standard model of the valve, the service interface is not
suitable for use in hazardous areas. On request, the service inter-
face is available in an explosion-proof model.
7 Electrical connection Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 120
7.21 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
EMC requirements The machine manufacturer is responsible for complying with the EMC Directive.
The valves fulfill the EMC protective requirements for immunity to interference
as per EN 61000-6-2 (assessment criterion A) and for interference emissions
according to EN 61000-6-4
The following technical requirements must be in place so that the EMC protec-
tion requirements can be satisfied:
• Use of the mating connectors recommended for the valves.
Ö Chap. "12.1 Accessories for valves in the D67XK series", page 222
• Adequate shielding.
• Correct execution of equipotential bonding system, protective grounding
and electrical shielding.
Ö Chap. "7.12 Protective grounding, equipotential bonding, and shield-
ing", page 90
7 Electrical connection Communication via the Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 121
7.22 Communication via the Moog Valve and
Pump Configuration Software
CAUTION
Danger of personal injury and damage to property!
Improper handling of the Moog Valve and Pump Configuration
Software causes malfunctions and thus corresponding risks to
people and equipment.
f For safety reasons, the Moog Valve and Pump
Configuration Software must not be used inside a machine
for visualization purposes or as an operator terminal.
CAUTION
Danger of personal injury and damage to property!
It is not permitted to operate the Moog Valve and Pump
Configuration Software on a fieldbus while the machine is run-
ning.
It is only permitted to activate valves via the Moog Valve and
Pump Configuration Software if this does not cause any dan-
gerous states in the machine and in its surroundings.
CAUTION
Danger of personal injury and damage to property!
Activating valves via the Moog Valve and Pump Configuration
Software within a network can give rise to unforeseeable
events if fieldbus communication takes place simultaneously
between the machine control or other bus nodes!
f Deactivate the fieldbus communication for machine control
and other bus nodes.
CAUTION
Danger of personal injury and damage to property!
Messages from the Moog Valve and Pump Configuration
Software can also be received by other bus nodes. This may
trigger unforeseeable events.
f Deactivate the fieldbus communication for machine control
and other bus nodes.
CAUTION
Danger of personal injury and damage to property!
If danger-free operation of the valves via the Moog Valve and
Pump Configuration Software can also not be ensured with de-
activated fieldbus communication to the machine control and
other bus nodes, the following must be heeded:
f The valves may only communicate depressurized and in
a direct connection (point-to-point) with the Moog Valve and
Pump Configuration Software.
7 Electrical connection Communication via the Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 122
Operation of the Moog
Valve and Pump
Configuration Software
The Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software communicates with the
valves via the CAN interface. The CAN bus interface is either on the service in-
terface X10 or available on the CAN fieldbus interface -X3 and X4.
Possible faults If the Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software is operated within a CAN
network with fieldbus communication of the machine running, the following
faults can occur:
• Data exchange with the valve may be disrupted if another device (such as
a controller) accesses the valve simultaneously.
• Node guarding may be activated only if no other fieldbus node is monitor-
ing the valves via this service.
• Fieldbus telegrams can also be received by other fieldbus nodes.
This may trigger off unforeseeable events!
To establish a direct connection between Moog Valve and Pump Configuration
Software and valve, detach the fieldbus cable from the valve and connect the
valve directly to the USB CAN interface of the service PC. A 120 Ω ±10% ter-
minal resistor is required here.
The configuration/start-up cable not included in the scope of delivery already
features a terminal resistor.
This configuration/start-up cable can only be used outside of hazardous areas.
The cable can only be used in connection with the M8-M12 adapter and thus
only on the service connector X10.
Ö Chap. "12.1 Accessories for valves in the D67XK series", page 222
CAUTION
Data loss!
Data communication between the valve electronics and the
Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software may be dis-
rupted if other fieldbus nodes (e.g. a controller) are accessing
the valve electronics at the same time.
f Deactivate the fieldbus communication for machine control.
8 Start-up
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 123
8Start-up
Safety instructions:
Start-up
DANGER
DANGER
DANGER
Danger to life!
Operating machines with damaged or defective components or
with a leaking hydraulic system is dangerous and not permitted.
f Before starting up or operating the valve, check the higher-
level machine including all its installed components for
damage and defects.
f Pay particular attention here to higher-level and hydraulic
safety devices such as, for example, EMERGENCY STOP
switches and pressure-limiting valves.
f Report damage or defects to the relevant department
immediately. If necessary, stop the machine immediately
and secure it.
f Rectify any leaks immediately in accordance with this user
manual, paying particular attention to the notes/instructions
on handling in accordance with safety requirements.
f Ö Chap. "2.1 Handling in accordance with safety
requirements", page 14
f Ö Chap. "10.3 Troubleshooting", page 147
DANGER
Danger of explosion!
To guarantee safe operation in hazardous areas:
f In its standard model with screw plug, the service connector
X10 is not permitted for use in hazardous areas.
f For mounting of the screw plug of the service connector
X10, it must be observed that the gasket and the threads
of the screw plug as well as the threads in the electronic
housing of the valve are not damaged.
f In case of damage to the screw plug of the service
connector or the threads in the electronic housing, the valve
must not be operated in hazardous areas.
f Tightening torque screw plug:
Ö Chap. "3.1.2 Representative depiction of the valve",
page 18
DANGER
Danger of explosion!
To guarantee safe operation in hazardous areas:
f The signal interfaces of the valve are implemented with
explosion-proof connectors.
f For mounting and removal of the connectors as well as
operation of the valve, the notes and instructions in the
"Explosion-proof connectors eXLink, CEAG" operating
instructions must absolutely be adhered to.
f The eXLink operating instructions from CEAG are in
the Appendix to this user manual.
8 Start-up
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 124
DANGER
Danger of poisoning and injury due to hydraulic fluid
squirting out under pressure!
Contact with hydraulic fluids can damage your health (e.g. eye
injuries, skin and tissue damage, poisoning in case of inhaling).
f Wear protective gloves and safety glasses.
f If hydraulic fluid gets into your eyes or on your skin, consult
a doctor immediately.
f When handling hydraulic fluids, observe the safety
provisions applicable to the hydraulic fluid used.
DANGER
Danger of injury due to electric voltage and unexpected
movements!
Work on machines that are not shut down presents a danger to
life and limb. Work such as mounting or removal, electrical or
hydraulic connection, troubleshooting or service may only be
performed on machines and valves that are shut down.
f Make sure to shut the machine down and switch it off.
f Make sure that the drive motor cannot be switched on.
f For this purpose, switch off the supply voltage as well as
that of connected peripherals, such as externally powered
transducers or programming units.
f Make sure that all power-transmitting components and
connections (electrical and hydraulic) are switched off
according to the manufacturer's instructions and secured
against switching on again. If possible, remove the main
fuse from the machine.
f Make sure that the machine is completely depressurized.
DANGER
Danger of explosion!
Open connectors for the interface must absolutely be covered
before start-up.
f The interfaces must be sealed with the original screw plug
belonging to the valve.
DANGER
Danger of explosion!
The unsafe operation of the valves is dangerous.
f Only operate the valve when it is in a safe and functional
state.
f At least once per shift, check valve for damage visible from
the outside and defects such as leakage or damaged cables
or connectors.
f The cable glands must be checked at regularly-prescribed
intervals. For details, see standard EN 60079-17.
f Report changes, including to the operating behavior,
damage, and defects to the responsible department
immediately. If necessary, stop the machine immediately
and secure it.
f Ö Chap. "2.1 Handling in accordance with safety
requirements", page 14
f Ö Chap. "10.3 Troubleshooting", page 147
8 Start-up
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 125
DANGER
Danger of explosion!
An explosion can be triggered by sparks when switching on
the machine.
f Open connectors for the interface must absolutely be
covered before start-up.
f The eXLink connectors from CEAG must be mounted
according to the instructions in the operating instructions for
the eXLink connectors.
f In the standard model with a screw plug, the service
connector X10 is not permitted for use in hazardous areas.
f The service connector X10 in the standard model M8, 3-pin
must be sealed with the original screw plug belonging to
the valve before start-up.
f When mounting the screw plug for the service connector
X10, it must be observed that the gasket and the thread
of the screw plug as well as the thread in the electronic
housing of the valve are not damaged.
f In case of damage to the screw plug for the service
connector X10 or the threads in the electronic housing,
the valve must not be operated.
f Tightening torque for screw plug:
Ö Chap. "3.1.2 Representative depiction of the valve",
page 18
WARNING
Danger of explosion!
For electrical start-up, cables on the valve, cable glands, screw
plugs, and connectors must not be damaged.
f The valve must not be started up with damaged cables, plug
connectors, and screw plugs, and it must be sent to us or to
one of our authorized service centers immediately.
WARNING
Danger of personal injury and damage to property!
The operation of the valves at pressure that is too high on
the hydraulic connections can cause injuries and damage to
the machine.
f Pressure-limiting valves or other comparable safety
devices, for example, must be installed to limit the pressure
at all the hydraulic ports to the specified maximum operating
pressure. Maximum operating pressure:
Ö Chap. "11 Technical Data", page 152
WARNING
Risk of injury!
To provide protection against injuries or other damaging
influences on health, suitable protective measures must be
taken if necessary prior to and when carrying out any work on
the valves or the machine, such as mounting or removing,
electrical or hydraulic connection, troubleshooting or servicing,
and when handling the valves, accessories, tools or hydraulic
fluids.
f Ö Chap. "2.2 Occupational safety and health", page 15
8 Start-up Preparations
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 126
8.1 Preparations
Preparations for start-upThe valves may only be started up when the following is ensured:
• The higher-level machine with all its installed components complies with the
latest versions of the relevant national and international regulations, stan-
dards and guidelines (such as, for example, the EU Machinery Directive,
the regulations of the trade association and of TÜV or VDE).
• The valves and all the other installed components are in a technically
fault-free and operationally reliable state.
• No signals that can lead to uncontrolled movements in the machine are
transmitted to the valves.
Ö Chap. "1.3 Intended operation", page 5
CAUTION
Danger of personal injury and damage to property!
By changing the configuration of the valves, the functionality
of the valve can be changed so that it causes damage,
malfunction or failure of the valve or machine.
f It is only permitted to alter the valve configuration during
operation if this does not cause any dangerous states in
the machine and in its surroundings.
CAUTION
Danger of personal injury and damage to property!
Working with and on the valves without the required basic
mechanical, hydraulic, and electrical knowledge may cause
injuries or parts may be damaged.
f Only properly qualified and authorized users may work with
and on the valves.
f Ö Chap. "1.4 Selection and qualification of personnel",
page 7
CAUTION
Risk of damage due to dirt and moisture!
This is the only way of adequately protecting the valves against
the penetration of dirt and moisture and protecting the gas-
kets/seals against the effects of ozone and UV.
f The valves must not be transported or stored without their
shipping plate fitted.
f The valve shipping plate may only be removed from the
valve hydraulic ports directly prior to mounting and must be
reinstalled directly after the valve has been removed.
f The shipping plate and the associated attachment elements
(screws and nuts) must be kept for later use, e.g. during
transportation.
8 Start-up Start-up of the valves
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 127
8.2 Start-up of the valves
Procedure for Start-upProcedure:
1. Make sure that all the machine components, connections and ports con-
form to the specifications of the machine manufacturer and operator.
2. Prepare the hydraulic system.
Ö Chap. "8.4 Filling and flushing the hydraulic system", page 132
3. Establish the valve hydraulic connection.
Ö Chap. "6.3 Mounting the valve", page 58
4. Establish the valve electrical connection.
Ö Chap. "7.11 General notes on wiring", page 88
5. Valves with fieldbus interface:
Connect the valve to the fieldbus.
6. Make sure that all the mechanical and electrical connections and hydrau-
lic ports are correctly established. The eXLink operating instructions from
CEAG are in the Appendix to this user manual.
7. Make sure that the valve is correctly configured, or carry out configuration.
Ö Chap. "3.5 Configuration software", page 47
Ö Chap. "8.3 Configuration of the valves", page 128
8. Start-up of the hydraulic system.
Ö Chap. "8.5 Start-up of the hydraulic system", page 133
9. If necessary, correct the zero position parameters in the valve software.
The parameters can be set or interrogated via the service or field bus in-
terface in the valve software. Setting and interrogation can be performed
for example with the Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software.
For additional information, see User Manual Firmware.
8 Start-up Configuration of the valves
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 128
8.3 Configuration of the valves
Safety instructions:
configuration of
the valves
The Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software is available as an acces-
sory to simplify start-up, diagnosis and configuration of the valves.
Ö Chap. "3.6 Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software", page 48
8.3.1 Configuration via the fieldbus interface
Configuration of
the valves via the
fieldbus interface
Valves with field bus interfaces are started up, activated, monitored and config-
ured via the field bus interface (connectors X3 and X4).
8.3.1.1 Configuration with the machine controller
Configuration with
the machine controller
To be able to configure the valves with the machine controller, it is necessary
to connect the valve to the machine controller via the fieldbus.
CAUTION
Danger of personal injury and damage to property!
By changing the configuration of the valves, the functionality
of the valve can be changed so that it causes damage,
malfunction or failure of the valve or machine.
f It is only permitted to alter the valve configuration during
operation if this does not cause any dangerous states in
the machine and in its surroundings.
CAUTION
Danger of personal injury and damage to property!
The selected settings must be documented after the configura-
tion of the valves has been altered.
The settings can be documented for example with the Moog
Valve and Pump Configuration Software.
f After a valve has been repaired or replaced, the user must
transfer the settings again to the repaired or new valve
because repaired or replacement valves are like new valves
delivered with factory settings.
f Ö Chap. "8.3.3 Factory setting of the valves", page 131
f Ö Chap. "10.4 Repair", page 150
8 Start-up Configuration of the valves
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 129
The Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software communicates with the
valves via the CAN interface. The CAN bus interface is either on the service in-
terface X10 or available on the CAN fieldbus interface -X3 and X4.
Ö Chap. "7.22 Communication via the Moog Valve and Pump Configuration
Software", page 121
8.3.1.2 Configuration with the
Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software
8 Start-up Configuration of the valves
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 130
8.3.2 Configuration via the service interface
Valves without CAN bus interfaces can be started up and configured via the
service interface (service connector-X10) with the Moog Valve and Pump
Configuration Software.
Ö Chap. "3.6 Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software", page 48
Configuration of
the valves via
the service interface
The following are required to be able to configure the valves with the Moog
Valve and Pump Configuration Software via the service interface (service con-
nector X10):
• USB start-up module, not approved for use in hazardous areas
• Configuration/start-up cable
• Adapter for service connector X10, not approved for use in hazardous ar-
eas
• PC with installed Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software
To be able to configure the valves via the service interface, it is necessary to
connect the valve as follows to the PC with installed Moog Valve and Pump
Configuration Software:
Connection of the valve
to a PC via the service
interface (X10)
Fig. 43: Connection of the valve to a PC via the service interface (service connector X10)
DANGER
Danger of explosion!
To guarantee safe operation in hazardous areas:
f In its standard model with screw plug, the service connector
X10 is not permitted for use in hazardous areas.
f For mounting of the screw plug of the service connector
X10, it must be observed that the gasket and the threads
of the screw plug as well as the threads in the electronic
housing of the valve are not damaged.
f In case of damage to the screw plug of the service
connector or the threads in the electronic housing, the valve
must not be operated in hazardous areas.
f Tightening torque screw plug:
Ö Chap. "3.1.2 Representative depiction of the valve",
page 18
For the standard model of the valve, the service interface is not
suitable for use in hazardous areas. On request, the service inter-
face is available in an explosion-proof model.
USB start-up module, configuration/starting-up cable, adapter and
Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software are available as ac-
cessories.
Ö Chap. "12.1 Accessories for valves in the D67XK series",
page 222
USB start-up
moduleConfiguration/
start-up cable
Adapter for
service connec-
tor X10
PCValve
Service connector X10 USB port
Safe area
8 Start-up Configuration of the valves
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 131
8.3.3 Factory setting of the valves
Factory setting
of the valves
The valve is delivered from the factory with preset parameters. This presetting
corresponds to the factory setting of the valves.
Depending on the valve type and model, it may be necessary to adapt the
parameters to the respective application.
If the valve is to be incorporated in a fieldbus, it may also be necessary to
adapt the communication parameters.
8.3.4 Storing of parameters
Volatile memory Modified parameters are initially stored in the volatile memory of the valve elec-
tronics microprocessor system, i.e. they are lost if the power supply is inter-
rupted. When the power supply is restored, the parameters that were stored
last are again available.
Non-volatile memory The microprocessor system also has a non-volatile memory. In order to store
the modified parameters in this memory, it is necessary to send a memory
command to the valve. If the power supply is interrupted, the modified valve
configuration will again be available after the supply is restored.
Please contact Moog or one of its authorized service centers for
information on the factory setting parameters.
8 Start-up Filling and flushing the hydraulic system
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 132
Procedure for filling and
flushing the hydraulic
system
Procedure:
1. Depressurize the hydraulic system.
2. Fill the hydraulic system in accordance with the instructions of the manu-
facturer and the operator of the machine.
Because new hydraulic fluid is unfiltered, the hydraulic system must be
filled via a filling filter with a filter fineness of at least β
10
≥ 75 (10 µm abso-
lute).
3. Replace existing filter elements with flushing elements in accordance with
the instructions of the manufacturer and the operator of the machine.
4. Remove the proportional valve.
Ö Chap. "10.1 Removing of the valves", page 143
5. Instead of the proportional valve, you must install a flushing plate or,
if allowed by the hydraulic system, a switching valve.
8.4 Filling and flushing the hydraulic system
WARNING
Risk of injury!
In order to prevent injuries and other damage to health when
flushing the hydraulic system, please observe the following
notes.
f The manufacturer and operator of the machine are
responsible for making sure that for safety-critical use,
relevant safety standards in the latest version, which serve
to avoid damage, are heeded.
f It is vital among other things to ensure that both the
individual components and the complete machine can be
rendered in a safe state.
f If a switching valve is fitted to flush the hydraulic system,
this must not cause any potentially dangerous states in the
machine.
Use the flushing plate to flush lines P and T.
The switching valve can also be used to flush the actuator with
lines A and B.
The flushing plates are not included in the valve scope of delivery.
They are available as an accessory.
Ö Chap. "12.1 Accessories for valves in the D67XK series",
page 222
8 Start-up Start-up of the hydraulic system
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 133
6. Carefully flush the hydraulic system in accordance with the instructions of
the manufacturer and the operator of the machine. Observe the following
when doing so:
- In order to obtain the best possible flushing effect, make sure the hy-
draulic fluid reaches operating temperature.
- Observe the minimum flushing time t:
- End the flushing process when at least the cleanliness level as specified
in ISO 4406 is achieved.
18/15/12
7. Depressurize the hydraulic system.
8. Replace flushing elements with suitable filter elements in accordance with
the instructions of the manufacturer and the operator of the machine.
9. Remove the flushing plate or switching valve.
10. Mount the proportional valve.
Ö Chap. "6.3 Mounting the valve", page 58
8.5 Start-up of the hydraulic system
Procedure for start-up
of the hydraulic
system
Procedure:
1. Start-up the hydraulic system in accordance with the instructions of
the manufacturer and the operator of the machine.
2. Vent the hydraulic system in accordance with the instructions of the man-
ufacturer and the operator of the machine.
3. Check the hydraulic system for external leaks.
8.5.1 Venting the actuator
V [l] : Tank capacity
Q [l/min] : Pump delivery
t5
V
Q
--------
h[]⋅=
CAUTION
Risk of damage!
Air trapped in the hydraulic system, particularly in the case of
high pressure peaks in the system, can cause a diesel effect.
If the trapped air bubbles are compressed very quickly and thus
heated, this can cause the mixture to self-ignite. This gives rise
to a very high increase in pressure and temperature locally,
which in turn can result in damage in the hydraulic system,
e.g. to gaskets or components, causing the oil to age more
quickly.
f In order to avoid diesel effects, the hydraulic system must
be ventilated.
9 Operation
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 134
9 Operation
Safety instructions:
Operation
DANGER
Danger to life!
Operating machines with damaged or defective components or
with a leaking hydraulic system is dangerous and not permitted.
f Before starting up or operating the valve, check the higher-
level machine including all its installed components for
damage and defects.
f Pay particular attention here to higher-level and hydraulic
safety devices such as, for example, EMERGENCY STOP
switches and pressure-limiting valves.
f Report damage or defects to the relevant department
immediately. If necessary, stop the machine immediately
and secure it.
f Rectify any leaks immediately in accordance with this user
manual, paying particular attention to the notes/instructions
on handling in accordance with safety requirements.
f Ö Chap. "2.1 Handling in accordance with safety
requirements", page 14
f Ö Chap. "10.3 Troubleshooting", page 147
DANGER
Danger of personal injury and damage to property!
Failure to heed the eXLink operating instructions from CEAG
can cause bodily injuries and property damage.
f Follow the eXLink operating instructions from CEAG in the
Appendix to this user manual.
f Handle all ex-proof connectors according to the notes and
instructions in the eXLink operating instructions from CEAG
DANGER
Danger of injury due to electric voltage and unexpected
movements!
Work on machines that are not shut down presents a danger to
life and limb. Work such as mounting or removal, electrical or
hydraulic connection, troubleshooting or service may only be
performed on machines and valves that are shut down.
f Make sure to shut the machine down and switch it off.
f Make sure that the drive motor cannot be switched on.
f For this purpose, switch off the supply voltage as well as
that of connected peripherals, such as externally powered
transducers or programming units.
f Make sure that all power-transmitting components and
connections (electrical and hydraulic) are switched off
according to the manufacturer's instructions and secured
against switching on again. If possible, remove the main
fuse from the machine.
f Make sure that the machine is completely depressurized.
9 Operation
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 135
DANGER
Danger of explosion!
The unsafe operation of the valves is dangerous.
f Only operate the valve when it is in a safe and functional
state.
f At least once per shift, check valve for damage visible from
the outside and defects such as leakage or damaged cables
or connectors.
f The cable glands must be checked at regularly-prescribed
intervals. For details, see standard EN 60079-17.
f Report changes, including to the operating behavior,
damage, and defects to the responsible department
immediately. If necessary, stop the machine immediately
and secure it.
f Ö Chap. "2.1 Handling in accordance with safety
requirements", page 14
f Ö Chap. "10.3 Troubleshooting", page 147
DANGER
Danger of explosion!
The unsafe operation of the valves is dangerous and not per-
mitted.
f Open connectors for the interfaces are not permitted and
must absolutely be covered before start-up.
f The eXLink connectors from CEAG must be mounted
correctly according to the instructions in the "Ex plug
connector eXLink" operating instructions. Here the
instructions and notes in the operating instructions for
the connectors must be heeded.
f Only use the service connector X10 in the M8 mode.,
3-pin outside the hazardous areas.
f The service connector X10 in the standard model M8,
3-pin must be sealed with the original screw plug belonging
to the valve before start-up.
f For a configuration of the valve within hazardous areas, on
request there is the X10 interface with an appropriate Ex-
protected plug connector.
DANGER
Danger of explosion due to impermissible heating up of
the valve!
As a result of insufficient ventilation of the valve or deposits on
the valve, the impermissible heating up of the valve can be
such that the maximum temperatures of the certified tempera-
ture classes are exceeded.
f The valves must be checked regularly, cleaned if
necessary. Deposits on the valve must be removed.
f If necessary inform the responsible person immediately and
remove the valve from electrical and hydraulic operation.
9 Operation
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 136
WARNING
Danger of explosion!
During operation, cables on the valve, cable glands, screw
plugs, and connectors must not be damaged.
f The valve must not be started up with damaged cables,
connectors, and screw plugs, and it must be sent to us or to
one of our authorized service centers immediately.
WARNING
Risk of injury!
To provide protection against injuries or other damaging
influences on health, suitable protective measures must be
taken if necessary prior to and when carrying out any work on
the valves or the machine, such as mounting or removing,
electrical or hydraulic connection, troubleshooting or servicing,
and when handling the valves, accessories, tools or hydraulic
fluids.
f Ö Chap. "2.2 Occupational safety and health", page 15
CAUTION
Danger of personal injury and damage to property!
In addition, to avoid damage or leaks, perform the following
tasks at regular intervals in accordance with the instructions of
the manufacturer and the operator of the machine:
f Checking the valve and the hydraulic system for externally
identifiable damage and defects.
f Checking for loose plugs/connectors.
f Checking the cleanliness level of the hydraulic fluid.
f Checking the port O-rings for elasticity, integrity and correct
seating.
f Ö Chap. "10.2.1 Checking and replacing the port O-rings",
page 146
CAUTION
Danger of personal injury and damage to property!
By changing the configuration of the valves, the functionality
of the valve can be changed so that it causes damage,
malfunction or failure of the valve or machine.
f It is only permitted to alter the valve configuration during
operation if this does not cause any dangerous states in
the machine and in its surroundings.
CAUTION
Danger of personal injury and damage to property!
It is not permitted to operate the Moog Valve and Pump
Configuration Software on a fieldbus while the machine is run-
ning.
It is only permitted to activate valves via the Moog Valve and
Pump Configuration Software if this does not cause any dan-
gerous states in the machine and in its surroundings.
9 Operation Preparations for operation
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 137
9.1 Preparations for operation
Preparations for valve
operation
The valves may only be operated as a component part of a higher-level overall
system, for example in a machine.
Ö Chap. "1.3 Intended operation", page 5
The following must be completed before the valve is operated:
• Qualified project planning
• Correct start-up and configuration of the valve
Ö Chap. "8 Start-up", page 123
CAUTION
Danger of personal injury and damage to property!
Working with and on the valves without the required basic
mechanical, hydraulic, and electrical knowledge may cause
injuries or parts may be damaged.
f Only properly qualified and authorized users may work with
and on the valves.
f Ö Chap. "1.4 Selection and qualification of personnel",
page 7
CAUTION
Risk of damage!
In order to prevent damage to the valves or to the machine,
heed the following points:
f Values specified in the technical data must be adhered to.
f Values specified on the nameplate must be adhered to.
f Ö Chap. "11 Technical Data", page 152
9 Operation Operation of the valve
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 138
9.2 Operation of the valve
Operation of the valve:
activation via signals from
the machine controller
The valve is activated via signals that it receives from the machine controller.
Direct interventions by the user on the valve during normal operation are
not necessary.
The device may only be operated in a safe and functional state.
At least once per shift, check valve for damage visible from the outside and de-
fects such as leakage or damaged cables or connectors. Report changes, in-
cluding to the operating behavior to the responsible department immediately.
If necessary, shut the system down immediately and secure it!
If necessary, shut the system down immediately and secure it!
Eliminate the fault immediately.
The valve has no controls, such as e.g. switches or buttons, which must be ac-
tuated.
Switching of the valve to standby or fail-safe state can also be triggered by
corresponding signals at the enable input of connector X1:
• Signals between 8.5 V and 32 V based on GND at the enable input switch
the valve to standby.
• Signals lower than 6.5 V at the enable input switch the valve to fail-safe
state.
Ö Chap. "3.4.3 Digital enable input", page 46
Information on maintenance:
Ö Chap. "10.2 Maintenance", page 146
Information on correcting possible faults:
Ö Chap. "10.3 Troubleshooting", page 147
9.3 Shutting down the valve
Safety notes: Shutting
down the valve
DANGER
Danger to life!
Hydraulic pressure and electrical supply voltage are still nor-
mally applied after the valve has been shut down. The machine
is not automatically put out of operation when the valve is shut
down.
DANGER
Danger of poisoning and injury due to hydraulic fluid
squirting out under pressure!
Contact with hydraulic fluids can damage your health (e.g. eye
injuries, skin and tissue damage, poisoning in case of inhaling).
f Wear protective gloves and safety glasses.
f If hydraulic fluid gets into your eyes or on your skin, consult
a doctor immediately.
f When handling hydraulic fluids, observe the safety
provisions applicable to the hydraulic fluid used.
9 Operation Shutting down the valve
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 139
Shutting down the valve The valve can be shut down as follows:
• Switching off of the supply voltage
• Adoption by the valve of the 'DISABLED' and 'INIT' valve states
• Signal < 6.5 V at the enable input of connector X1 (valve-dependent)
Ö Chap. "3.2.3 Fail-safe events", page 28
If necessary, the valve must be restarted after it has been shut down or has en-
tered the fail-safe state.
Ö Chap. "3.2.4 Restarting the valve", page 31
DANGER
Danger of injury due to electric voltage and unexpected
movements!
Work on machines that are not shut down presents a danger to
life and limb. Work such as mounting or removal, electrical or
hydraulic connection, troubleshooting or service may only be
performed on machines and valves that are shut down.
f Make sure to shut the machine down and switch it off.
f Make sure that the drive motor cannot be switched on.
f For this purpose, switch off the supply voltage as well as
that of connected peripherals, such as externally powered
transducers or programming units.
f Make sure that all power-transmitting components and
connections (electrical and hydraulic) are switched off
according to the manufacturer's instructions and secured
against switching on again. If possible, remove the main
fuse from the machine.
f Make sure that the machine is completely depressurized.
10 Service
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 140
10 Service
Safety instructions:
Service
DANGER
DANGER
DANGER
Danger to life!
Operating machines with damaged or defective components or
with a leaking hydraulic system is dangerous and not permitted.
f Before starting up or operating the valve, check the higher-
level machine including all its installed components for
damage and defects.
f Pay particular attention here to higher-level and hydraulic
safety devices such as, for example, EMERGENCY STOP
switches and pressure-limiting valves.
f Report damage or defects to the relevant department
immediately. If necessary, stop the machine immediately
and secure it.
f Rectify any leaks immediately in accordance with this user
manual, paying particular attention to the notes/instructions
on handling in accordance with safety requirements.
f Ö Chap. "2.1 Handling in accordance with safety
requirements", page 14
f Ö Chap. "10.3 Troubleshooting", page 147
DANGER
Danger of explosion!
To guarantee safe operation in hazardous areas:
f The signal interfaces of the valve are implemented with
explosion-proof connectors.
f For mounting and removal of the connectors as well as
operation of the valve, the notes and instructions in the
"Explosion-proof connectors eXLink, CEAG" operating
instructions must absolutely be adhered to.
f The eXLink operating instructions from CEAG are in
the Appendix to this user manual.
DANGER
Danger of poisoning and injury due to hydraulic fluid
squirting out under pressure!
Contact with hydraulic fluids can damage your health (e.g. eye
injuries, skin and tissue damage, poisoning in case of inhaling).
f Wear protective gloves and safety glasses.
f If hydraulic fluid gets into your eyes or on your skin, consult
a doctor immediately.
f When handling hydraulic fluids, observe the safety
provisions applicable to the hydraulic fluid used.
10 Service
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 141
DANGER
Danger of explosion due to impermissible heating up of
the valve!
As a result of insufficient ventilation of the valve or deposits on
the valve, the impermissible heating up of the valve can be
such that the maximum temperatures of the certified tempera-
ture classes are exceeded.
f The valves must be checked regularly, cleaned if
necessary. Deposits on the valve must be removed.
f If necessary inform the responsible person immediately and
remove the valve from electrical and hydraulic operation.
DANGER
Danger of injury due to electric voltage and unexpected
movements!
Work on machines that are not shut down presents a danger to
life and limb. Work such as mounting or removal, electrical or
hydraulic connection, troubleshooting or service may only be
performed on machines and valves that are shut down.
f Make sure to shut the machine down and switch it off.
f Make sure that the drive motor cannot be switched on.
f For this purpose, switch off the supply voltage as well as
that of connected peripherals, such as externally powered
transducers or programming units.
f Make sure that all power-transmitting components and
connections (electrical and hydraulic) are switched off
according to the manufacturer's instructions and secured
against switching on again. If possible, remove the main
fuse from the machine.
f Make sure that the machine is completely depressurized.
DANGER
Danger of explosion!
To guarantee safe operation in hazardous areas:
f In its standard model with screw plug, the service connector
X10 is not permitted for use in hazardous areas.
f For mounting of the screw plug of the service connector
X10, it must be observed that the gasket and the threads
of the screw plug as well as the threads in the electronic
housing of the valve are not damaged.
f In case of damage to the screw plug of the service
connector or the threads in the electronic housing, the valve
must not be operated in hazardous areas.
f Tightening torque screw plug:
Ö Chap. "3.1.2 Representative depiction of the valve",
page 18
10 Service
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 142
DANGER
Danger of explosion!
The unsafe operation of the valves is dangerous.
f Only operate the valve when it is in a safe and functional
state.
f At least once per shift, check valve for damage visible from
the outside and defects such as leakage or damaged cables
or connectors.
f The cable glands must be checked at regularly-prescribed
intervals. For details, see standard EN 60079-17.
f Report changes, including to the operating behavior,
damage, and defects to the responsible department
immediately. If necessary, stop the machine immediately
and secure it.
f Ö Chap. "2.1 Handling in accordance with safety
requirements", page 14
f Ö Chap. "10.3 Troubleshooting", page 147
WARNING
Risk of injury!
To provide protection against injuries or other damaging
influences on health, suitable protective measures must be
taken if necessary prior to and when carrying out any work on
the valves or the machine, such as mounting or removing,
electrical or hydraulic connection, troubleshooting or servicing,
and when handling the valves, accessories, tools or hydraulic
fluids.
f Ö Chap. "2.2 Occupational safety and health", page 15
WARNING
Danger of explosion!
During shut-down, cables on the valve, cable glands, screw
plugs, and connectors must not be damaged.
f The valve must not be started up with damaged cables, plug
connectors, and screw plugs, and it must be sent to us or to
one of our authorized service centers immediately.
CAUTION
Danger of personal and property damage due to defective
accessories and defective spare parts!
Unsuitable or defective accessories or unsuitable or defective
spare parts may cause damage, malfunctions or failure of the
valve or the machine.
f Use only original accessories and original spare parts.
f Ö Chap. "12 Accessories, Spare Parts, and Tools",
page 222
f Warranty and liability claims for personal injury and damage
to property are among other things excluded if they are
caused by the use of unsuitable or defective accessories or
unsuitable or defective spare parts.
f Ö Chap. "1.8 Warranty and liability", page 11
10 Service Removing of the valves
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 143
10.1 Removing of the valves
10.1.1 Tools and materials required
Tools and materials
required for removing
The following tools and materials are required for removing the valves:
• For removing and mounting the valve
Torque wrench for hexagon socket head cap screws
• Replacement for O-rings of ports to be replaced if necessary
• A shipping plate and the associated attachment elements
• For mounting the shipping plate
Wrench for hexagon socket head cap screws or regular screwdriver
(only valve D671K) and if necessary wrench
CAUTION
Risk of damage!
The plugs, connectors, and connection cables of the valves
may not be used for other purposes, such as for stepping on or
as transport holders.
CAUTION
Danger of personal injury and damage to property!
Working with and on the valves without the required basic
mechanical, hydraulic, and electrical knowledge may cause
injuries or parts may be damaged.
f Only properly qualified and authorized users may work with
and on the valves.
f Ö Chap. "1.4 Selection and qualification of personnel",
page 7
CAUTION
Risk of damage!
In order to prevent damage to the valves or to the accessories:
f The plugs, connectors, and connection cables of the valves
may not be used for other purposes, such as for stepping on
or as transport holders.
f Due to the complexity of the internal components of the
valves and of accessories, only we or our authorized service
centers may make repairs and perform maintenance work
other than that explained in this user manual.
f Warranty and liability claims for personal injury and damage
to property are excluded among other things if they are
caused by unauthorized repairs or other unauthorized
interventions.
f Ö Chap. "1.8 Warranty and liability", page 11
f Structural changes to or opening of explosion-proof valves
are not permitted since these invalidate the ex certification.
10 Service Removing of the valves
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 144
Installation screws
Attachment screws
CAUTION
Danger of personal injury and damage to property!
Failure to heed the eXLink operating instructions from CEAG
can cause bodily injuries and property damage.
f Follow the eXLink operating instructions from CEAG in the
Appendix to this user manual.
f Handle all ex-protected connectors according to the notes
and instructions in the eXLink operating instructions from
CEAG
Structural changes to or opening of explosion-proof valves are not
permitted since these invalidate the ex certification.
The installation screws and the O-rings to be replaced if necessary
are not included in the scope of delivery for the valves. They are
available as an accessory.
Ö Chap. "12 Accessories, Spare Parts, and Tools", page 222
The wrench sizes of the hexagon socket cap head screws for
mounting are series-specific.
Details about the screws and their tightening torque:
Ö Tab. 7, page 58
The installation screws for the transport plates are type-specific.
Details about attachment screws and their tightening torque:
Ö Chap. "12 Accessories, Spare Parts, and Tools", page 222
10 Service Removing of the valves
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 145
10.1.2 Removing
Safety instructions:
Removing of the valves
Procedure for removing
the valve
Procedure:
1. Shut down and switch off the machine and place in a de-energized and
depressurized state.
2. Disconnect the Ex-protected connectors.
3. Release the valve's installation screws.
4. Remove the valve from the mounting surface.
5. Check the Check that O-rings in the valve ports (P, A, B, X, Y and T) are
present and for elasticity, integrity and correct seating.
6. Replace hardened and damaged O-rings with new O-rings.
7. Attach the shipping plate to the valve's hydraulic ports.
The tightening torque of the attachment screws for the shipping plate is
series-specific.
Guidance value: 30% of the value that is specified in table "Specification
for installation screws for the valves"
Ö Tab. 7, page 58
8. If the valve is not to be immediately reused or is to be serviced: keep valve
in original packaging.
Ö Chap. "5 Transportation and Storage", page 52
9. If necessary, seal the ports of the hydraulic system to prevent the hydrau-
lic fluid from being contaminated.
CAUTION
Risk of damage due to dirt and moisture!
This is the only way of adequately protecting the valves against
the penetration of dirt and moisture and protecting the gas-
kets/seals against the effects of ozone and UV.
f The valves must not be transported or stored without their
shipping plate fitted.
f The valve shipping plate may only be removed from the
valve hydraulic ports directly prior to mounting and must be
reinstalled directly after the valve has been removed.
f The shipping plate and the associated attachment elements
(screws and nuts) must be kept for later use, e.g. during
transportation.
For the removal of the ex-protected connectors, the notes and
instructions for the eXLink operating instructions of CEAG must be
heeded.
The eXLink operating instructions from CEAG are in the Appendix
to this user manual.
10 Service Maintenance
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 146
10.2 Maintenance
Embrittlement of
the gasket materials
Changes in temperature, effects of the hydraulic fluid, such as, for example,
pressure peaks, and similar influences can, depending on the application, ex-
pose the gasket/seal materials to different levels of wear, and this in turn may
cause leaks.
In order to avoid possible resulting impairments or damage, we recommend
that the valve, after a period of storage or operation of more than 5 years, be
inspected by us or one of our authorized service centers.
10.2.1.1 Tools and materials required
Tools and materials
required for checking
and replacing the O-rings
The following are required for checking and replacing the port O-rings:
• For removing and mounting the valve
Torque wrench for hexagon socket head cap screws
• Replacement for O-rings of ports to be replaced if necessary
Ö Chap. "12 Accessories, Spare Parts, and Tools", page 222
Installation screws
10.2.1.2 checking and replacing the O-rings
Procedure for checking
and replacing the O-rings
Procedure:
1. Remove the valve.
Ö Chap. "10.1 Removing of the valves", page 143
2. Check that O-rings in the valve ports (P, A, B, and T, etc.) are present and
for elasticity, integrity and correct seating.
3. Replace hardened and damaged O-rings with new O-rings.
4. Remount the valve.
Ö Chap. "6.3 Mounting the valve", page 58
Maintenance work by the user on explosion-proof valves is not per-
mitted. Intervention by third parties will invalidate the ex certification.
If the valve is exposed to high loads, it may be necessary to reduce
the check/inspection interval to suit the application.
10.2.1 Checking and replacing the port O-rings
The installation screws and the O-rings to be replaced if necessary
are not included in the scope of delivery for the valves. They are
available as an accessory.
Ö Chap. "12 Accessories, Spare Parts, and Tools", page 222
The wrench sizes of the hexagon socket cap head screws for
mounting are series-specific.
Details about the screws and their tightening torque:
Ö Tab. 7, page 58
10 Service Troubleshooting
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 147
10.3 Troubleshooting
Possible faults The following faults may occur:
• Leak at the valve connecting surface
Ö Chap. "10.3.1.1 Leak at the valve connecting surface", page 147
• Leak at the linear force motor screw plug
Ö Chap. "10.3.1.2 Leak at the linear force motor screw plug", page 148
• No hydraulic response by the valve
Ö Chap. "10.3.2 No hydraulic response by the valve", page 148
• Instability of the control loops
Ö Chap. "10.3.3 Instability of the external control loop", page 149
Ö Chap. "10.3.4 Instability of the internal valve control loops", page 149
Restarting after correcting
the fault
After correcting the fault, if necessary reinstall and restart the valve.
Ö Chap. "6.3 Mounting the valve", page 58
Ö Chap. "3.2.4 Restarting the valve", page 31
10.3.1 Leaks
10.3.1.1 Leak at the valve connecting surface
Leak at the valve
connecting surface
Measures:
• Check that O-rings in the valve ports (P, A, B, X, Y and T) are present and
for elasticity, integrity and correct seating.
If necessary, install O-rings, replace or correct the seating.
• Check the valve's mounting and connecting surfaces, the valve and the
hydraulic system for damage, contamination and evenness.
• Check installation screws for secure and correct seating.
Re-tighten screws if necessary with the Torque wrench for hexagon
socket head cap screws.
If the fault cannot be corrected by means of the measures set out
below, please contact us or one of our authorized service centers.
The wrench sizes of the hexagon socket cap head screws for
mounting are series-specific.
Details about attachment screws and their tightening torque:
Ö Tab. 7, page 58
10 Service Troubleshooting
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 148
10.3.1.2 Leak at the linear force motor screw plug
10.3.2 No hydraulic response by the valve
No hydraulic response
by the valve
Measures:
• Check whether all the machine components, connections and ports
conform to the specifications of the machine manufacturer and operator.
To do so, on the valves compare the data on the nameplate with the spec-
ifications. (The details on the type plate correspond to the performance
requirements ordered. They may have changed due to configuration.)
• Check whether the hydraulic installation is correct and whether all the
hydraulic ports are correctly established.
• Check whether hydraulic pressure is present.
• Check whether the hydraulic supply to the pilot stage is present or correctly
configured (pilot mode: external or internal).
• Check whether the supply voltage is present.
• Check whether the connectors are correctly attached and non-corroded.
• Check whether there is a command signal failure or a faulty electric cable.
• Check whether the command signal is analog or applied via the fieldbus
interface (depending on the model).
• Check whether the valve is in a fault state.
If necessary, correct the fault and then cancel the fault via the fieldbus or
reset the valve by switching the supply voltage off and then on again.
CAUTION
f In the event of a leak at the linear force motor screw plug,
have the valve check by Moog or one of its authorized
service centers.
DANGER
Danger to life!
Touching electrically live parts can cause electric shock.
f Touching electrically live parts must therefore be avoided.
10 Service Troubleshooting
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 149
Typical fault causes:
- Supply voltage dips below 18 V
Electrical data: Ö Chap. "11 Technical Data", page 152
- Control error (for example, due to the spool sticking, which can be
caused for instance by contamination)
- No command signal (e.g., due to cable break)
• Check whether the enable signal is applied. If there is no enable signal,
the valve cannot be put in the 'ACTIVE' valve status.
• Check whether the configuration of the internal valve software is correct.
10.3.3 Instability of the external control loop
Instability of the external
control loop
Measures:
• Check whether the external control loop is stable.
If necessary, reduce control loop gain.
• Check whether the internal valve control loops are stable.
Ö Chap. "10.3.4 Instability of the internal valve control loops", page 149
• Check whether the controlled system was modified.
10.3.4 Instability of the internal valve control loops
10.3.4.1 Flow control
Instability of the internal
valve control loops:
Flow control
Measures:
• Check whether the signal quality of the command signals is sufficient.
• Check whether the system and pilot pressures are stable.
• Check whether the quality and purity of the hydraulic fluid used conforms
to the specifications of the manufacturer and the operator of the machine.
• Check whether the valve is operational.
To do so, perform a comparison of the command/actual value signals.
10 Service Repair
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 150
10.4 Repair
Safety instructions:
Repair
Moog Global Support
Moog Global Support™ provides professional repair and corrective mainte-
nance services on the highest level thanks to our experienced technicians.
Our customer service and our professional expertise ensure that your systems
will always remain in an optimal state. Here we offer the reliability that you can
only expect from leading manufacturers with worldwide branch offices.
MOOG Global Support
Logo
Fig. 44: MOOG Global Support Logo
CAUTION
Danger of personal injury and damage to property!
Repaired valves or replacement valves are, like new valves,
delivered with the factory settings. In the event of a repair job
for defective valves, we and our authorized service centers
shall not accept liability for software and data installed by the
customer.
f Check the valves for correct mechanical design and correct
configuration before start-up.
CAUTION
Danger of personal injury and damage to property!
By changing the configuration of the valves, the functionality
of the valve can be changed so that it causes damage,
malfunction or failure of the valve or machine.
f It is only permitted to alter the valve configuration during
operation if this does not cause any dangerous states in
the machine and in its surroundings.
Maintenance work by the user on explosion-proof valves is not per-
mitted. Intervention by third parties will invalidate the ex certification.
10 Service Repair
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 151
Your advantages:
• Shorter downtimes, critical systems can be operated permanently with
high performance
• Investment security thanks to reliability, adaptability, and guaranteed life
span of our products
• Optimized corrective maintenance planning ans system set-up
• Use of our flexible corrective maintenance program according to your
service requirements
Our service offerings:
• Repair with original parts by trained technicians according to the latest
Moog specifications
• Provision of original spare parts and products in order to avoid unplanned
downtimes
• Flexible programs according to your needs for preventative corrective
maintenance and set-up thanks to annual or multi-year contracts
• On-site service for start-up, set-up, and fault diagnosis
• Reliable service with equally good quantity worldwide
For additional information about Moog Global Support™, visit
http://www.moog.com/industrial/service
WARNING
Risk of damage!
To guarantee safe operation in hazardous areas, the following
points must be heeded:
f Maintenance work on ex-protected valves may only be
performed by us or our authorized service centers.
f With the intervention of third parties, the ex certification
becomes invalid.
Maintenance work by the user on explosion-proof valves is not per-
mitted. Intervention by third parties will invalidate the ex certification.
In the event of a repair job for defective valves, we and our autho-
rized service centers reserve the right to perform a repair or, after
consultation, alternatively to supply replacement valves with an
identical or compatible equipment specification.
11 Technical Data
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 152
11 Technical Data
Technical data
D671K to D675K,
overview
CAUTION
Risk of damage!
In order to prevent damage to the valves or to the machine,
heed the following points:
f Values specified in the technical data must be adhered to.
f Values specified on the nameplate must be adhered to.
f Ö Chap. "11 Technical Data", page 152
CAUTION
Risk of damage!
In order to prevent damage to the valves or to the machine,
heed the following points:
f Do not immerse the valves in liquids.
Description Chapter,
page
Nameplates
Description of the functions of the valve, which are specified
in the model number and type designation.
Ö Chap. 11.1,
page 154
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Ö Chap. 11.2,
page 163
Dimensions of the connector Ö Chap. 7.3,
page 67
Technical data D671K – ISO 4401-05/NG10
- Technical data
- Installation drawing/dimensions
- Characteristic curves
- Way functions and hydraulic symbols
Ö Chap. 11.3,
page 164
Two-stage digital proportional valve D671K series with
direct-operated pilot valve D633K
Ö Chap. 11.3.2
, page 166
Technical data D672K – ISO 4401-07/NG16
- Technical data
- Installation drawing/dimensions
- Characteristic curves
- Way functions and hydraulic symbols
Ö Chap. 11.4,
page 175
Two-stage digital proportional valve D672K series with
direct-operated pilot valve D633K
Ö Chap. 11.4.2
, page 177
Tab. 24: Overview of technical data for the series and variants (part 1 of 2)
11 Technical Data
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 153
Technical data D673K – ISO 4401-08/NG25
- Technical data
- Installation drawing/dimensions
- Characteristic curves
- Way functions and hydraulic symbols
Ö Chap. 11.5,
page 186
Two-stage digital proportional valve D673K series with
direct-operated pilot valve D633K
Ö Chap. 11.5.2
, page 188
Technical data D674K – ISO 4401-08/NG25
- Technical data
- Installation drawing/dimensions
- Characteristic curves
- Way functions and hydraulic symbols
Ö Chap. 11.6,
page 197
Two-stage digital proportional valve D674K series with
direct-operated pilot valve D633K
Ö Chap. 11.6.2
, page 199
Technical data D675K – ISO 4401-10/NG32
- Technical data
- Installation drawing/dimensions
- Characteristic curves
- Way functions and hydraulic symbols
Ö Chap. 11.7,
page 208
Two-stage digital proportional valve D675K series with
direct-operated pilot valve D633K
Ö Chap. 11.7.2
, page 210
Tab. 24: Overview of technical data for the series and variants (part 2 of 2)
11 Technical Data Nameplates
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 154
11.1 Nameplates
Nameplate
(example for NG10)
Item Designation Additional information
1 Model number Ö Chap. "11.1.1 Model number and type designation",
page 156
2 Type designation Ö Chap. "1.2 Supplemental documents", page 5
3 Serial number
4 Maximum operating
pressure
Hydraulic data (series-specific)
Ö Chap. "11 Technical Data", page 152 (table)
5 Pilot pressure Ö Chap. "3.3.3 Control type ports X and Y", page 37
Ö Chap. "3.3.1 Flow control (Q-control)", page 33
6 Signal type for analog
command inputs
Ö Chap. "3.4.1.1 Signal type identification", page 41
7 Supply voltage see type designation:
Ö Chap. "11.1 Nameplates", Digit 11, Supply voltage,
page 161
Pin assignment of the connector X1:
Ö Chap. "7.4.1 Pin assignment of connector X1",
page 69
8 Optional customer-specific
designation
9 Optional version
identification
10 Date of manufacture in
MM/YY format
11 LSS address (decimal) Ö Chap. "11.1.2 LSS address", page 163
12 Hydraulic symbol
13 Data matrix code Ö Chap. "11.1.3 Data matrix code", page 163
14
(only
NG10)
Designation of ports
Fig. 45: Nameplate (example)
11 Technical Data Nameplates
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 155
Ex nameplate
The ambient and fluid temperatures may not exceed the values of the respec-
tive temperature classes.
Item Designation Additional information
1Series
2 Power supply
3 Current consumption
4 Temperature class T5
5 Identification
6 Certification
7 Ambient temperature T
A
for temperature class from item 4
8 Fluid temperature T
oil
for temperature class from item 4
Fig. 46: Ex nameplate (example)
11 Technical Data Nameplates
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 156
11.1.1 Model number and type designation
When ordering the valve, its functions are specified and given in model number
and the type designation.
Model number
The model number is set out as follows:
Type designation
Which signal type is currently set can be ascertained for example with the
Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software.
The 2nd, 15th, and 16th digit of the type designation consist of two characters.
The 15th and 16th digits are specified by the factory.
Digit 1,
spool type
The 1st digit of the type designation of the valve provides information about the
type of spool.
D67X • •••• • −
••••
Series
Specification status
K Ex-protection
Model
Optional
factory identification
Variant
The 16-digit type designation specifies the delivery state of the
valve.
By changing the valve configuration, it is possible to change the
valve in such a way that it no longer conforms to this status.
1 2 3456789101112131415 16
•••••••••••
2
−
• • •• ••
Variant Spool type Series
P Standard spool D671 to D675
B Standard spool (5-way) D671 (with P
1
connection)
Tab. 25: Spool type in the type designation
11 Technical Data Nameplates
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 157
Digit 2,
Rated flow Q
N
The 2nd digit of the type designation of the valve provides information about
the rated flow Q
N
(at ∆p
N
= 5 bar (72.5 psi) per control land: tolerance ±10 %)
Digit 3,
Maximal permissible
operating pressure
The 3rd digit of the type designation of the valve provides information about the
maximum operating pressure of the pilot valve.
With internal pilot connection X, the maximum operating pressure is the maxi-
mum pilot pressure. The control parameters of the valve electronics are adapt-
ted to the control pressure.
1 2 3456789101112131415 16
•
••••••••••
2
–
• • •• ••
Variant Rated flow [l/min] Series
30 30 D671
60 60 D671
80 80 D671
01 150 D672
02 250 D672
03 350 D673
05 550 D674
10 1000 D675
15 1500 D675
Tab. 26: Rated flow variant in the type designation
1 2 3456789101112131415 16
•••
••••••••
2
–
• • •• ••
Variant Maximum permissible operating pressure
B 70 bar (1,015 psi)
F 210 bar (3,046 psi)
H 280 bar (4,060 psi)
K 350 bar (5,075 psi)
X Special versions on request
Tab. 27: Maximum permissible operating pressure in the type designation
11 Technical Data Nameplates
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 158
Digit 4,
Spool
The 4th digit of the valve's type designation provides information about which
version of the spool is integrated into the valve.
Digit 5,
Pilot valve
The 5th digit of the valve's type designation provides information about which
version of the pilot valve is integrated into the valve.
1 2 3456789101112131415 16
••••
•••••••
2
–
• • •• ••
Variant
Valve
configuration Bushing-spool version
A4-way
≈zero overlap, linear characteristic curve
D 4-way 10 % positive overlap, linear characteristic curve
R 4-way 10 % positive overlap, kinked characteristic curve
Q 5-way Valve opening: PtAandP
1
tB and AtT
5 % positive overlap, linear characteristic curve (only D671-B)
Y4-way
≈ zero overlap, kinked characteristic curve
Z 2/2-way Valve opening: AtT and BtT
1
Valve opening: PtB and TtA only with connection X und Y
external (D672 to D675)
X Special spool on request
Tab. 28: Spool variant in the type designation
1 2 3456789101112131415 16
•••••
••••••
2
–
• • •• ••
Variant Pilot valve Series
S Single-stage drive pilot valve D633K D671K to D675K
Tab. 29: Pilot valve variant in the type designation
11 Technical Data Nameplates
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 159
Digit 6,
Fail-safe variant
The 6th digit of the valve's type designation provides information about which
mechanical fail-safe function is integrated into the valve.
Fail-safe state in case
of failure, tables
The following table describes the spool positions of the main stage in case
of failure of the valve electronics, the control pressure or the control pressure
of the optional 4/2-way valve of the D67XK valve with the D633K pilot valve.
Position of the spool
of the main stage
in case of failure,
D67XK valve
with direct-operated
pilot valve D633K
1 2 3456789101112131415 16
••••••
•••••
2
–
• • •• ••
Supply voltage
Fail-safe
Function
Spool position of
the Main stage
Pilot
pressure
1
Valve
Electronics
4/2-way
seat valve
F End position: PtB and AtTON:off -
undefined off ON: -
End position: PtB and AtToffoff-
D End position: PtA and BtT
(D671: approx. 20 %
PtA and BtT
ON: off -
undefined off ON: -
End position: PÖA and BtT
(D671: approx. 20 %
PtA and BtT
off off -
K undefined ON: off ON:
off ON: ON:
off off ON:
Defined middle position ON: off off
off ON: off
off off off
H End position: PtB and AtTON:offON:
undefined off ON: ON:
Defined middle position and
defined PtB and AtT
off off ON:
ON: off off
off ON: off
off off off
Tab. 30: Spool position in case of failure, D67X with pilot valve D633K
All other combinations of pressure and supply voltage give rise to
an undefined main stage spool position.
11 Technical Data Nameplates
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 160
Digit 7,
Hydraulic control type,
Pilot pressure port X
and leakage port Y
The 7th digit in the valve type designation provides information about whether
pilot pressure port X and leakage port Y are internally or externally connected
in the valve.
Digit 8,
Seal material
The 8th digit in the type designation of the valve designates the sealing mate-
rial used.
1 2 3456789101112131415 16
•••••••
••••
2
–
• • •• ••
Variant Intake X Drain Y
4 internally connected internally connected
5 externally connected internally connected
6 externally connected externally connected
7 internally connected externally connected
Tab. 31: Variant of pilot pressure and leakage port in the type designation
For selection limitations, see the hydraulic symbols.
"Valve configurations and hydraulic symbols" (series-specific)
Ö Chap. "11 Technical Data", page 152 (table)
1 2 3456789101112131415 16
••••••••
•••
2
–
• • •• ••
H HNBR D671K to D674K
V FKM D671K to D675K
S Edge seal HNBR D675K
X Special versions on request
Tab. 32: Seal material variant in the type designation
11 Technical Data Nameplates
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 161
Digit 9,
Valve connector X1
The 9th digit of the valve's type designation specifies the version of the valve
connector X1.
Digit 10,
Command signal for
100 % spool stroke
The 10th digit of the valve's type designation provides information about which
signal type is set in the valve on delivery.
The signal type of the command signal input applies in combination with the
signal type of the spool position signal (actual value output).
The analog command signal I
in
or U
in
is the flow command value input.
The stroke position signal (actual output value) I
out
or U
out
is proportional to the
mechanical position of the spool.
Ö Chap. "7 Electrical connection", page 61
Digit 11,
Supply voltage
The 11th digit of the type designation specifies the supply voltage:
Ö Chap. "7 Electrical connection", page 61
1 2 3456789101112131415 16
•••••••••
••
2
–
• • •• ••
J 7-pole
Tab. 33: Variant of the valve connector X1 in the type designation
1 2 3456789101112131415 16
••••••••••
•
2
–
• • •• ••
Variant
Command signals for 100 % spool stroke
Command signal (I
in
and U
in
)
(X1, input contacts 1 and 2)
Stroke position signal (I
Out
and U
Out
)
(X1, output contact 4)
D ±10 V 2–10 V
E 4–20 mA 4–20 mA
M ±10 V 4–20 mA
X ±10 mA 4–20 mA
9 Fieldbus Fieldbus
Y Others on request.
Tab. 34: Signal types command value and spool position signal in the type designation
1 2 3456789101112131415 16
•••••••••••
2
–
• • •• ••
2 nominal 24 V DC
11 Technical Data Nameplates
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 162
Digit 12
The 12th digit of the type designation is specified by the factory.
Digit 13
The 13th digit of the type designation of the valve provides information about
the position of the spool with switched-off enable signal (X1)..
Digit 14,
Fieldbus connectors X3
and X4
The 14th digit of the type designation specifies whether the valve has a field-
bus interface and which is the one in question.
Digits 15 and 16
The 15th and 16th digits of the type designation are specified by the factory.
1 2 3456789101112131415 16
•••••••••••
2
–
• • •• ••
1 2 3456789101112131415 16
•••••••••••
2
–
• • •• ••
1 2 3456789101112131415 16
•••••••••••
2
–
•
•••••
Variant Fieldbus connector
GCAN
H Profibus DP
J EtherCAT
O without fieldbus interface
Tab. 35: Variant of the fieldbus connector X3 and X4 in the type designation
1 2 3456789101112131415 16
•••••••••••
2
–
••
•• ••
11 Technical Data Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 163
11.1.2 LSS address
The decimal LSS address is set out in accordance with CiA DSP 305 as follows
and serves to provide the CAN bus node with an internationally unique identifi-
cation:
LSS address
Example:
40/43/1/4321
11.1.3 Data matrix code
Data matrix codeThe data matrix code is a two-dimensional code. The code on the nameplate
contains a character string that is set out as follows:
If there is no optional version identification, a blank space appears here.
Example:
D671-K215A-0001#C#D4321
11.2 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC)
The valves in the D671 to D675 series fulfill the EMC protection requirements
for immunity to interference as per EN 61000-6-2:2005 (evaluation criterion A)
and for emitted interference as per EN 61000-6-4:2005 (CAN bus and Profibus
DP) or as per EN 61000-6-3:2005 (EtherCAT).
The following technical requirements must be in place so that the EMC protec-
tion requirements can be fulfilled:
• Use of the mating connectors recommended for the valves
Ö Chap. "12 Accessories, Spare Parts, and Tools", page 222
• Adequate shielding
• Version of equipotential bonding system, protective grounding, and electrical
shielding.
Ö Chap. "7.12.2 Equipotential bonding and protective grounding",
page 91
40 / Product code / Version without leading zeros /
Serial number without
country identification
Ö Chap. "11.1.1 Model number
and type designation", page 156
Ö Fig. 45, page 154,
item 3
Manufacturer ID
Even valves without CAN bus interfaces are assigned a decimal
LSS address during manufacturing.
Model number #
Optional version
identification
#
Serial number with
country identification
Ö Chap. "11.1.1 Model number
and type designation", page 156
Ö Fig. 45, page 154,
item 9
Ö Fig. 45, page 154
item 3
Technical data D671K – ISO 4401-05/NG10
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 164
The technical data apply for the two-stage proportional valves in the D671K se-
ries
• with direct-operated pilot valve D633K
Ö Chap. "Mounting surface", page 165
Ö Chap. "11.3.2 Data D671K with direct-operated pilot valve D633K",
page 166
Ö Chap. "Dimensions (installation drawing), with fail-safe F and D",
page 168
Ö Chap. "Valve configurations and hydraulic symbols", page 169/page 169
Ö Chap. "Characteristic curves D671K valves with direct-operated pilot
valve D633K", page 172
11.3 Technical data D671K – ISO 4401-05/NG10
Technical data D671K – ISO 4401-05/NG10
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 165
11.3.1 Mounting surface
Technical data for
the mounting surface
11.3.1.1 Mounting pattern of mounting surface
The holes in the mounting surface must correspond to ISO 4401-05-05-0-05.
The holes (Fig. 47) apply for the two-stage digital proportional valve
in the D671K series with direct-operated pilot valve D633K.
Mounting pattern of
mounting surface
according to
ISO 4401-05-05-0-05
for D671K with direct-
operated
pilot valve
D633K
If the valve is mounted on the mounting surface, it projects length-
wise (x-axis) over the mounting surface.
Valve dimensions:
Ö Chap. " Dimensions (installation drawing), with fail-safe F and
D", page 168
Mounting length at least 100 mm.
• For the 5-way version type B80..., T
1
becomes P
1
(see holes
Fig. 47)
• For valves in the 4-way version and with Q
N
> 60 l/min and in
2/2-way version, the second tank connection T
1
is required.
T
1
optional
16
11
13
9,9
8
64,6
23
100
0
75
19
0
O-ring recesses
in the valve body
PA B TT
1
XYF
1
F
2
F
3
F
4
Ø 11.5
(0.45)
Ø 11.5
(0.45)
Ø11.5
(0.45)
Ø 11.5
(0.45)
Ø 11.5
(0.45)
Ø6.3
(0.25)
Ø6.3
(0.25)
M6 M6 M6 M6
X 27 (1.06) 16.7 (0.66) 37.3 (1.47) 3.2 (0.13) 50.8 (2.00) -8 (-0.31) 62 (2.44) 0 54 (2.13) 54 (2.13) 0
Y 6.3 (0.25) 21.4 (0.84) 21.4 (0.84) 32.5 (1.28) 32.5 (1.28) 11 (0.43) 11 (0.43) 0 0 46 (1.81) 46 (1.81)
Fig. 47: Holes in the mounting surface for D671K series (dimensions in mm and (in))
• For maximum flow, the ports for P, T, A, and B must contrary
to the standard be designed with a diameter of 11.5 mm
(0.45 in).
•F
1
…F
4
are threaded holes for attachment screws in the holes of the
mounting surface of the valve.
Technical data D671K – ISO 4401-05/NG10
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 166
11.3.2 Data D671K with direct-operated pilot valve D633K
Valve design Proportional valve, two-stage, with standard spools General
technical data
Pilot valve D633K
Nominal size and holes NG10, mounting pattern according to ISO 4401-05-05-0-05, with T
1
Ö Fig. 47, page 165
Mounting position In any position, fixed or movable
Diameter of the con-
nection holes and
threads of the fastening
holes
P, A, B, T, and T1 11.5 mm
X and Y 6.3 mm
F
1
to F
4
M6
Ö Fig. 47, page 165
Mass approx. 13.3 kg (29.3 lb)
Valves with fail-safe functions H and K approx. 14.5 kg (32 lb)
Dimensions Ö "Dimensions (installation drawing), with fail-safe F and D", page 168
Ambient
temperature
1)
for transport/storage
2)
recommended 15 °C to 25 °C
permissible –40 °C to 80 °C
for operation (–40
on request) –20 °C to 60 °C
Depending on the certified temperature classes
Permissible ambient
conditions
Rel. humidity
for storage
< 65 % not condensing
Vibration resistance
3)
10 g, 3 axes, Frequency: 10 to 2,000 Hz (according to EN 60068-2-6)
Shock resistance
3
50 g, 6 directions, half-sine 3 ms (as per EN 60068-2-27)
Valve configurations 5-way, 4-way, 3-way, 2/2-way and 2-way operation
Ö Chap. "3.3.2 Valve configurations and hydraulic symbols", page 34
Hydraulic data
Operating pressure
4)
of the pilot valve
via T or Y p_T or p_y +10 bar
Operating pressure range X port 10 to 350 bar
max. pressure Y port
5)
70 bar
Maximum operating
pressure range of main
stage
Ports P, A, and B 350 bar
Port T for Y internal
5
70 bar
Port T for Y external 250 bar
Maximum flow Q
max
180 l/min (48 gpm)
Ö Chap. "4.1 Flow diagram (4-way operation)", page 49
Rated flow Q
N
for ∆p
N
= 5 bar per
control land
30 / 60 / 80 / 2 x 80 l/min (8 / 16 / 21 / 2 x 21 gpm)
(depending on the series variant Ö Chap. " Type designa-
tion", "Digit 2, rated flow Q
N
", page 157)
Leakage flow
Main stage Q
L
1.8 l/min (0.3/0.5 gpm)
(
≈ zero overlap)
Pilot flow static Pilot valve standard 0.4 l/min (0.1 gpm
trimmed 0.4 l/min (0.1 gpm
Pilot flow at 100 %
jump
Pilot valve standard 6.0 l/min (1.6 gpm)
trimmed 6.5 l/min (1.7 gpm)
Hydraulic fluid
Permissible fluids Mineral-oil-based hydraulic oil as per DIN 51524-1 1 to 3 and ISO11158
Other fluids on request
Permissible temperature (–40 ° on request) –20 ° to 80 ° depending on the certified temperature
classes
Viscosity
ν recommended 15 to 45 mm²/s
permissible 5 to 400 mm²/s
Purity class
6)
,
recommended
(ISO 4406)
for functional safety <18/15/12
for life cycle (wear ) <17/14/11
Tab. 36: Technical data D671K with direct-operated pilot valve D633K (part 1 of 2)
Technical data D671K – ISO 4401-05/NG10
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 167
Step response time for
0 to 100 % spool stroke
Pilot valve 11 ms
Step response and frequency response Ö page 173
Static and
dynamic data
Threshold <0.05%
Hysteresis <0.2%
Zero shift
at ∆T=55K
< 1.5 %
Manufacturing
tolerance ±10 %
Relative duty cycle 100 % Electrical data
Protection type IP66 with mounted mating connectors (according to EN 60529)
Supply voltage Nominal 24 V (18 to 32 V) DC based on GND,
Only use SELV-/PELV power supply according to EN 60204-1
At supply voltages less than 18 V, the valve is rendered in the fail-safe
state.
Ö Chap. "3.2.3 Fail-safe events", page 28
Max. current consump-
tion static 0.3 A
Max. current consump-
tion dynamic 1.2 A
External fuse protec-
tion for each valve 1.6 A slow-blowing fuse
EMC protection
requirements
Immunity to interference as per EN 61000-6-2:2005
(evaluation criterion A)
Emitted interference as per EN 61000-6-4:2005 (CAN bus and
Profibus DP) or as per EN 61000-6-3:2005 (EtherCAT)
Ö Chap. "11.2 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)", page 163
Connectors Ö Chap. "7 Electrical connection", page 61
Ö Chap. "7.4.1 Pin assignment of connector X1", page 69
Triggering electronics Digital control electronics integrated into the valve
1)
The ambient temperature and the temperature of the hydraulic fluid influence the temperature of
the valve electronics. In order to ensure that the electronic components integrated in the valve last
as long as possible, we recommend that the hydraulic fluid be kept at as low a temperature as pos-
sible at as low an ambient temperature as possible. A reference temperature is measured in the
valve electronics. Fault-free operation is guaranteed up to a reference temperature of 85 °C
(185 °F). At reference temperatures over 85 °C (185°F) a warning is output via the field bus on
valves with field bus interfaces. At reference temperatures over 105 °C (221°F) the valve electron-
ics are deactivated; the valve adopts the 'DISABLED' valve status and thus the mechanical fail-safe
state.
Ö Chap. "3.2 Safety function/fail-safe", page 25
2)
Temperature fluctuations>10 °C must be avoided during storage.
3)
Transportation and storage should be as vibration- and shock-free as possible.
4)
Hydraulic data was measured at operating pressure p
P
= 210 bar (3,046 psi), viscosity of hydrau-
lic fluid ν =32mm
2
/s and temperature of hydraulic fluid T = 40 °C (104 °F)
Ö Chap. "6 Mounting and Connection to the Hydraulic System", page 56
5)
Pressure peaks up to 210 bar permissible
6)
The cleanliness of the hydraulic fluid has a great effect on functional safety (reliable spool
positioning, high resolution) and wear of the spool lands (pressure gain, leakage losses).
Tab. 36: Technical data D671K with direct-operated pilot valve D633K (part 2 of 2)
Technical data D671K – ISO 4401-05/NG10
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 168
Dimensions (installation drawing), with fail-safe F and D
*) Dimension with fixed cabling of the pilot valve with explosion-proof wiring. If the cabling of the pi-
lot valve makes use of explosion-proof plug connectors, the installation space of the valve in-
creases by 50 mm
Two-stage digital proportional valve D671K series with direct-operated pilot valve D633K
Fig. 48: Installation drawing for D671K (dimensions in mm and (in))
12
136
[5.346]
101
[3.969]
66
[2.591]
30.5
[1.213]
273.5
[10.76]
252
[9.913]
240
[9.441]
203.5
[8.012]
158.5
[6.24]
87
[3.417]
422
[16.598]
69
[2.709]
307
[12.083]
73.5
[2.893]
107
[4.205]
69
[2.709]
Ø10.5
[.413]
Ø18.7
[.736]
Ø6.4
[.252]
1.3
[.051]
79
[3.122]
**
*
133.5
[5.256]
177
[6.972]
251
[9.866]
~90
[3.543]
31
[1.22]
247
[9.732]
230.5
[9.075]
220
[8.65]
174
[6.839]
37.2
[1.463]
**
Ø15.7
[.618]
6x
Pos. Designation Additional information
1 Type plate Ö Fig. 45, page 154
2 Ex type plate Ö Fig. 46, page 155
Installation space of the plug connector when mounted: Ö Fig. 14, page 67
Technical data D671K – ISO 4401-05/NG10
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 169
Valve configurations and hydraulic symbols
Fail-safe function F
5-way version
X and Y optionally external
or internal
Fail-safe function F
4-way version
X and Y optionally external
or internal
Fail-safe function M
2/2-way version
only X and Y external
Port P
1
required
P
1
does not correspond to
ISO 4401
Port P
1
is equivalent
to port T
1
Tank port T
1
at Q
N
>60l/min
required
Tank port T
1
required
Execute flow direction
according to symbols.
A B
X
Y
P
T
1
P
AB
XY
PT
1
T
A B
X
Y
P
T
T
1
Technical data D671K – ISO 4401-05/NG10
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 170
Dimensions (installation drawing), mechanical/hydraulic fail-safe H
and K
*) Dimension with fixed cabling of the pilot valve with explosion-proof wiring. If the cabling of the pi-
lot valve makes use of explosion-proof plug connectors, the installation space of the valve in-
creases by 50 mm.
Two-stage digital proportional valve D671K series with direct-operated pilot valve D633K with fail-
safe function H and K for applications with safety requirements
Fig. 49: Installation drawing for D671K (dimensions in mm and (in))
21
88
[3.453]
136
[5.346]
101
[3.969]
66
[2.591]
110
[4.315]
134
[5.289]
31
[1.213]
273
[10.76]
252
[9.913]
240
[9.441]
203.5
[8.012]
158.5
[6.24]
422
[16.598]
69
[2.709]
307
[12.083]
73.5
[2.893]
93
[3.651]
121
[4.757]
69
[2.709]
Ø10.5
[.413]
Ø18.7
[.736]
Ø6.4
[.252]
1.3
[.051]
140
[5.496]
*
193
[7.583]
237
[9.335]
311
[12.228]
~90
[3.543]
31
[1.22]
79
[3.126]
247
[9.732]
230.5
[9.075]
220
[8.65]
174
[6.839]
37
[1.463]
Ø15.7
[.618]
6x
p
z
: 25 … 350 bar, G1/4
Pos. Designation Additional information
1 Type plate Ö Fig. 45, page 154
2 Ex type plate Ö Fig. 46, page 155
Installation space of the plug connector when mounted: Ö Fig. 14, page 67
Technical data D671K – ISO 4401-05/NG10
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 171
Fail-safe function H
4-way version
X and Y optionally external
or internal
Fail-safe function K
2/2-way version
only X and Y external
Fail-safe function K
4-way version
X and Y optionally external
or internal
defined AtT
defined middle
Execute flow direction
according to symbols.
defined middle
AB
PX
Z
YTT
1
A
PT Y
B
XY
AB
PX
Z
YTT
1
A
PT Y
B
XY
AB
PX
Z
YTT
1
A
PT Y
B
Technical data D671K – ISO 4401-05/NG10
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 172
Flow diagramFlow diagram (4-way operation)
Ö Chap. "4.1 Flow diagram (4-way operation)", page 49
Flow signal characteristic
curve
Flow signal characteristic curve at rated pressure drop ∆p
N
= 10 bar, that is,
∆p
N
= 5 bar per control land:
Spool A ≈ zero overlap, linear characteristic curve
Spool D 10 % positive overlap, linear characteristic curve
Spool Y
≈ zero overlap, kinked characteristic curve
P30 type: standard spool rated flow 30 l/min
P60 type: standard spool rated flow 60 l/min
P80 type: standard spool rated flow 80 l/min
Fig. 50: Valve D671K, flow-signal characteristic curve
Characteristic curves D671K valves with direct-operated pilot valve
D633K
• All characteristic curves in the section "Characteristic curves
D671K valves with pilot valve D633K" are typical characteris-
tic curves for the D671K valve with pilot valve D633K mea-
sured at operating pressure p
P
= 210 bar (3,046 psi), viscosity
of hydraulic fluid ν =32mm
2
/s and temperature of hydraulic
fluid T = 40 °C (104 °F)
•For Q
N
> 60 l/min, a second tank port T
1
is required.
Flow Q [l/min]
Signal [%]
20 40 60 80 100
0
20
50
80
100
10
30
40
60
70
90
0
B T
TA
P
B
A
P
with T
1
Technical data D671K – ISO 4401-05/NG10
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 173
Step response for D671K
valves with direct-
operated pilot valve
D633K, standard
Fig. 51: Step response for D671K valves, standard
Frequency response for
D671K valves with direct-
operated pilot valve
D633K, standard
Fig. 52: Frequency response for D671K valves, standard
Spool stroke [%]
Time [ms]
0 5 10 15 20
-10
0
25
50
75
100
140 bar
70 bar
Amplitude ratio [dB]
Frequency [Hz]
Phase lag [degrees]
1 10 100 200
-9
-120
-6
-90-3
-60
0
-30
3
0
90%
25%
5%
Technical data D671K – ISO 4401-05/NG10
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 174
Step response for D671K
valves with direct-
operated pilot valve
D633K, trimmed
Fig. 53: Step response for D671K valves, trimmed
Frequency response for
D671K valves with direct-
operated pilot valve
D633K, trimmed
Fig. 54: Frequency response for D671K valves, trimmed
Spool stroke [%]
Time [ms]
0 5 10 15 20
-10
0
25
50
75
100
140 bar
70 bar
Amplitude ratio [dB]
Frequency [Hz]
Phase lag [degrees]
1 10 100 200
-9
-120
-6
-90-3
-60
0
-30
3
0
90%
25%
5%
Technical data D672K – ISO 4401-07/NG16
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 175
The technical data apply for proportional valves in the D672K series
• two-stage, with direct-operated pilot valve D633K
Ö Chap. "Mounting surface", page 176
Ö Chap. "11.4.2 Data D672K with direct-operated pilot valve D633K",
page 177
Ö Chap. " Dimensions (installation drawing), with fail-safe F and D",
page 179
Ö Chap. " Valve configurations and hydraulic symbols",
page 180/page 180
Ö Chap. "Characteristic curves D672K valves with direct-operated pilot
valve D633K", page 183
11.4 Technical data D672K – ISO 4401-07/NG16
Technical data D672K – ISO 4401-07/NG16
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 176
11.4.1 Mounting surface
Technical data for
the mounting surface
11.4.1.1 Mounting pattern of mounting surface
The holes in the mounting surface must correspond to ISO 4401-07-07-0-05.
The holes (Fig. 55) apply for the digital proportional valve in the D672K series
• two-stage, with direct-operated pilot valve D633K
Mounting pattern of
mounting surface
according to
ISO 4401-07-07-0-05
D672K
If the valve is mounted on the mounting surface, it projects length-
wise (x-axis) over the mounting surface.
Valve dimensions:
Ö Chap. " Dimensions (installation drawing), with fail-safe F and
D", page 179
14
12
125
0
0
98
PATB X YG
2
G
2
F
1
F
2
F
3
F
4
F
2
F
2
dia. 20
(0.79)
dia. 20
(0.79)
dia. 20
(0.79)
dia. 20
(0.79)
dia. 6.3
(0.25)
dia. 6.3
(0.25)
dia. 4 dia. 4 M10 M10 M10 M10 M6 M6
X 50 34.1 18.3 65.9 76.6 88.1 76.6 18.3 0 101.6 101.6 0 34.1 50
Y 14.3 55.6 14.3 55.6 15.9 57.2 0 69.9 0 0 69.9 69.9 -1.6 71.5
Fig. 55: Holes in the mounting surface for the D672K series (dimensions in mm and (in))
• For maximum flow, the ports for P, T, A, and B must contrary
to the standard be designed with a diameter of 20 mm
(0.79 in).
•F
1
…F
4
are threaded holes for attachment screws in the mounting sur-
face of the valve.
•G
1
and G
2
are holes for accommodating the transposition-
proof pins of the valve.
Technical data D672K – ISO 4401-07/NG16
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 177
11.4.2 Data D672K with direct-operated pilot valve D633K
Valve design Proportional valve, two-stage, with standard spool General
Technical data
Pilot valve D633K standard or trimmed
Nominal size and holes NG16, mounting pattern according to ISO 4401-07-07-0-05
Ö Fig. 55, page 176
Mounting position In any position, fixed or movable
Diameter of the con-
nection holes and
threads of the fastening
holes
P, A, T, and B 20 mm
X and Y 6.3 mm
F
1
to F
4
M10
F
1
to F
4
M10
G
1
and G
2
4mm
Ö Fig. 55, page 176
Mass approx. 18.5 kg (40.8 lb)
Valves with fail-safe functions H and K approx. 20 kg (44 lb)
Dimensions Ö "Dimensions (installation drawing), with fail-safe F and D", page 179
Ambient
temperature
1)
for transport/storage
2)
recommended 15 °C to 25 °C
permissible –40 °C to 80 °C
for operation (–40 °C on request) –20 °C to 60 °C
depending on the certified temperature classes
Permissible ambient
conditions
Rel. humidity
for storage
< 65 % not condensing
Vibration resistance
3)
10 g, 3 axes, Frequency: 10 to 2,000 Hz (according to EN 60068-2-6)
Shock resistance
3
50 g, 6 directions, half-sine 3 ms (as per EN 60068-2-27)
Valve configurations 4-way, 3-way, 2/2-way and 2-way operation
Ö Chap. "3.3.2 Valve configurations and hydraulic symbols", page 34
Hydraulic data
Operating pressure
4)
of the pilot valve
via T or Y p_T or p_y +10 bar
Operating pressure range X port 10 to 350 bar
max. pressure Y port
5
70 bar
Maximum operating
pressure range of
main stage
Ports P, A, and B 350 bar
Port T for Y internal
5)
70 bar
Port T for Y external 350 bar
Maximum flow Q
max
600 l/min (158.5 gpm)
Ö Chap. "4.1 Flow diagram (4-way operation)", page 49
Rated flow Q
N
for ∆p
N
= 5 bar per
control land
150 / 250 l/min (40 / 66 gpm)
(depending on the series variant Ö Chap. " Type designa-
tion", "Digit 2, rated flow Q
N
", page 157)
leakage flow
Main stage Q
L
2.5 l/min (0.7 gpm)
(
≈ zero overlap)
Pilot flow static Pilot valve standard 0.5 l/min (0.1 gpm)
trimmed 0.5 l/min (0.1 gpm)
Pilot flow at 100 %
jump
Pilot valve standard 35 l/min (9.3 gpm)
trimmed 26 l/min (6.9 gpm)
Hydraulic fluid
Permissible fluids Mineral-oil-based hydraulic oil as per DIN 51524-1 1 to 3 and ISO11158
Other fluids on request
Permissible temperature (–40 ° on request) –20 ° to 80 ° depending on the certified temperature
classes
Viscosity
ν recommended 15 to 45 mm²/s
permissible 5 to 400 mm²/s
Purity class
6)
,
recommended
(ISO 4406)
for functional safety <18/15/12
for life cycle (wear ) <17/14/11
Tab. 37: Technical data D672K with direct-operated pilot valve D633K (part 1 of 2)
Technical data D672K – ISO 4401-07/NG16
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 178
Step response time for
0 to 100 % spool stroke
Pilot valve standard 11 ms
trimmed 13 ms
Step response and frequency response Ö page 184
Static and
dynamic data
Threshold < 0.1 %
Hysteresis <0.2%
Zero shift
at ∆T=55K
<1%
Manufacturing
tolerance ±10 %
Relative duty cycle 100 % Electrical data
Protection type IP66 with mounted mating connectors (according to EN 60529)
Supply voltage Nominal 24 V (18 to 32 V) DC based on GND.
Only use SELV-/PELV power supply according to EN 60204-1
At supply voltages less than 18 V, the valve is rendered in the fail-safe
state.
Ö Chap. "3.2.3 Fail-safe events", page 28
Max. current consump-
tion static 0.3 A
Max. current consump-
tion dynamic 1.2 A
External fuse protec-
tion for each valve 1.6 A slow-blowing fuse
EMC protection
requirements
Immunity to interference as per EN 61000-6-2:2005
(evaluation criterion A)
Emitted interference as per EN 61000-6-4:2005 (CAN bus and
Profibus DP) or as per EN 61000-6-3:2005 (EtherCAT)
Ö Chap. "11.2 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)", page 163
Connectors Ö Chap. "7 Electrical connection", page 61
Ö Chap. "7.4.1 Pin assignment of connector X1", page 69
Triggering electronics Digital control electronics integrated into the valve
1)
The ambient temperature and the temperature of the hydraulic fluid influence the temperature of
the valve electronics. In order to ensure that the electronic components integrated in the valve last
as long as possible, we recommend that the hydraulic fluid be kept at as low a temperature as pos-
sible at as low an ambient temperature as possible. A reference temperature is measured in the
valve electronics. Fault-free operation is guaranteed up to a reference temperature of 85 °C
(185 °F). At reference temperatures over 85 °C (185°F) a warning is output via the field bus on
valves with field bus interfaces. At reference temperatures over 105 °C (221°F) the valve electron-
ics are deactivated; the valve adopts the 'DISABLED' valve status and thus the mechanical fail-safe
state.
Ö Chap. "3.2 Safety function/fail-safe", page 25
2)
Temperature fluctuations>10 °C must be avoided during storage.
3)
Transportation and storage should be as vibration- and shock-free as possible.
4)
Hydraulic data was measured measured at operating pressure p
P
= 210 bar (3,046 psi), viscosity
of hydraulic fluid ν =32mm
2
/s and temperature of hydraulic fluid T = 40 °C (104 °F)
Ö Chap. "6 Mounting and Connection to the Hydraulic System", page 56
5)
Pressure peaks up to 210 bar permissible
6)
The cleanliness of the hydraulic fluid has a great effect on functional safety (reliable spool
positioning, high resolution) and wear of the spool lands (pressure gain, leakage losses).
Tab. 37: Technical data D672K with direct-operated pilot valve D633K (part 2 of 2)
Technical data D672K – ISO 4401-07/NG16
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 179
Dimensions (installation drawing), with fail-safe F and D
*) Dimension with fixed cabling of the pilot valve with explosion-proof wiring. If the cabling of the pi-
lot valve makes use of explosion-proof plug connectors, the installation space of the valve in-
creases by 50 mm.
Two-stage digital proportional valve D672K series with direct-operated pilot valve D633K
Fig. 56: Installation drawing for D672K (dimensions in mm and (in))
21
253
[9.953]
219
[8.634]
110.5
[4.35]
198
[7.787]
186
[7.315]
149.5
[5.886]
104.5
[4.114]
462
[18.181]
163
[6.417]
299
[11.764]
163
[6.417]
95.5
[3.76]
60.5
[2.382]
25.5
[1.004]
130.5
[5.138]
44.5
[1.752]
1.3
[.051]
2
[.079]
204.5
[8.051]
278
[10.945]
*
107
[4.213]
46
[1.811]
93
[3.652]
~90
[3.543]
Ø13.9
[.547]
Ø11
[.433]
Ø26.5
[1.043]
2x
4x
4x
168
[6.63]
214
[8.441]
225
[8.866]
242
[9.524]
68.5
[2.697]
Pos. Designation Additional information
1 Type plate Ö Fig. 45, page 154
2 Ex type plate Ö Fig. 46, page 155
Installation space of the plug connector when mounted: Ö Fig. 14, page 67
Technical data D672K – ISO 4401-07/NG16
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 180
Valve configurations and hydraulic symbols
Fail-safe function F
4-way version
X and Y optionally external
or internal
Fail-safe function M
2/2-way version
only X and Y external
Execute flow direction
according to symbols.
A B
P
T
XY
AB
PTX Y
Technical data D672K – ISO 4401-07/NG16
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 181
Dimensions (installation drawing), mechan./hydr. fail-safe H and K
*) Dimension with fixed cabling of the pilot valve with explosion-proof wiring. If the cabling of the pi-
lot valve makes use of explosion-proof plug connectors, the installation space of the valve in-
creases by 50 mm.
Two-stage digital proportional valve D672K series with direct-operated pilot valve D633K with fail-
safe function H and K for applications with safety requirements
Fig. 57: Installation drawing for D672K (dimensions in mm and (in))
21
46
[1.811]
93
[3.654]
168
[6.63]
214
[8.441]
225
[8.866]
242
[9.524]
163
[6.417]
2
[.079]
Ø13.9
[.547]
Ø11
[.433]
4x
Ø26.5
[1.043]
2x
4x
253
[9.953]
219
[8.634]
110.5
[4.35]
111
[4.386]
198
[7.787]
186
[7.315]
149.5
[5.886]
104.5
[4.114]
462
[18.181]
163
[6.417]
95.5
[3.76]
60.5
[2.382]
25.5
[1.004]
130.5
[5.138]
137
[5.394]
162
[6.368]
38.5
[1.516]
10
[.409]
44.5
[1.752]
1.3
[.051]
167
[6.575]
264.5
[10.413]
338
[13.307]
107
[4.213]
~90
[3.543]
68.5
[2.697]
p
z
: 25 … 350 bar, G1/4
*
Pos. Designation Additional information
1 Type plate Ö Fig. 45, page 154
2 Ex type plate Ö Fig. 46, page 155
Installation space of the plug connector when mounted: Ö Fig. 14, page 67
Technical data D672K – ISO 4401-07/NG16
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 182
Fail-safe function H
4-way version
X and Y optionally external
or internal
Fail-safe function K
4-way version
X and Y optionally external
or internal
Fail-safe function K
2/2-way version
only X and Y external
defined AtT
defined middle
defined middle through
mechanical stroke limitation
Execute flow direction
according to symbols.
AB
PX
Z
YT
A
PT Y
B
XY
AB
PX
Z
YT
A
PT Y
B
XY
AB
PX
Z
YT
A
PT Y
B
Technical data D672K – ISO 4401-07/NG16
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 183
Flow diagram Flow diagram (4-way operation)
Ö Chap. "4.1 Flow diagram (4-way operation)", page 49
Flow signal characteristic
curve
Flow signal characteristic curve at rated pressure drop ∆p
N
= 10 bar, that is,
∆p
N
= 5 bar per control land:
Spool A ≈ zero overlap, linear characteristic curve
Spool D 10 % positive overlap, linear characteristic curve
Spool Y
≈ zero overlap, kinked characteristic curve
P01 type: standard spool rated flow 150 l/min
P02 type: standard spool rated flow 250 l/min
Fig. 58: Valve D672K, flow-signal characteristic curve
Characteristic curves D672K valves with direct-operated pilot valve D633K
All characteristic curves in the section "Characteristic curves
D672K valves with pilot valve D633K" are typical characteristic
curves for the D672K valve with pilot valve D633K measured at op-
erating pressure p
P
= 210 bar (3,046 psi), viscosity of hydraulic
fluid ν =32mm
2
/s and temperature of hydraulic fluid T = 40 °C
(104 °F)
Flow Q [l/min]
Signal [%]
20 40 60 80 100
50
100
150
200
250
0
P01
P02
0
Technical data D672K – ISO 4401-07/NG16
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 184
Step response for D672K
valves with direct-
operated pilot valve
D633K, standard
Fig. 59: Step response for D672K valves, standard
Frequency response for
D672K valves with direct-
operated pilot valve
D633K, standard
Fig. 60: Frequency response for D672K valves, standard
Spool stroke [%]
Time [ms]
0 5 10 15 20
-10
0
25
50
75
100
140 bar
70 bar
Amplitude ratio [dB]
Frequency [Hz]
Phase lag [degrees]
1 10 100 200
-9
-120
-6
-90
-3
-60
0
-30
3
0
90%
25%
5%
Technical data D672K – ISO 4401-07/NG16
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 185
Step response for D672K
valves with direct-
operated pilot valve
D633K, trimmed
Fig. 61: Step response for D672K valves, trimmed
Frequency response for
D672K valves with direct-
operated pilot valve
D633K, trimmed
Fig. 62: Frequency response for D672K valves, trimmed
Spool stroke [%]
Time [ms]
0 5 10 15 20
-10
0
25
50
75
100
140 bar
70 bar
Amplitude ratio [dB]
Frequency [Hz]
Phase lag [degrees]
1 10 100 200
-9
-120
-6
-90
-3
-60
0
-30
3
0
90%
25%
5%
Technical data D673K – ISO 4401-08/NG25
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 186
The technical data apply for proportional valves in the D673K series
• two-stage, with direct-operated pilot valve D633K
Ö Chap. "11.5.2 Data D673K with direct-operated pilot valve D633K",
page 188
Ö Chap. "Technical data for the mounting surface", page 187
Ö Chap. " Dimensions (installation drawing), with fail-safe F and D",
page 190
Ö Chap. "Valve configurations and hydraulic symbols", page 191/page 191
Ö Chap. "Characteristic curves D673K valves with direct-operated pilot
valve D633K", page 194
11.5 Technical data D673K – ISO 4401-08/NG25
Technical data D673K – ISO 4401-08/NG25
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 187
11.5.1 Mounting surface
Technical data for
the mounting surface
11.5.1.1 Mounting pattern of mounting surface
The holes in the mounting surface must correspond to ISO 4401-08-08-0-05.
The holes (Fig. 63) apply for the digital proportional valve in the D673K series
• two-stage, with direct-operated pilot valve D633K
Mounting pattern of
mounting surface
according to
ISO 4401-08-08-0-05
D673K
If the valve is mounted on the mounting surface, it projects length-
wise (x-axis) over the mounting surface.
Valve dimensions:
Ö Chap. " Dimensions (installation drawing), with fail-safe F and
D", page 190
0
12
16
124
154
0
PATB X Y G
2
G
2
F
1
F
2
F
3
F
4
F
2
F
2
dia. 28
(1.1)
dia. 28
(1.1)
dia. 28
(1.1)
dia. 28
(1.1)
dia. 11.2
(0.44)
dia. 11.2
(0.44)
dia. 7.5
(0.30)
dia. 7.5
(0.30)
M12 M12 M12 M12 M12 M12
X 77 53.2 29.4 100.8 17.5 112.7 94.5 29.4 0 130.2 130.2 0 53.2 77
Y 17.5 74.6 17.5 74.6 73 19 -4.8 92.1 0 0 92.1 92.1 0 92.1
Fig. 63: Holes in the mounting surface for the D673K series (dimensions in mm and (in))
• For maximum flow, the ports for P, T, A, and B must contrary
to the standard be designed with a diameter of 28 mm (1.1 in).
•F
1
…F
4
are threaded holes for attachment screws in the mounting sur-
face of the valve.
•G
1
and G
2
are holes for accommodating the transposition-
proof pins of the valve.
Technical data D673K – ISO 4401-08/NG25
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 188
11.5.2 Data D673K with direct-operated pilot valve D633K
Valve design Proportional valve, two-stage, with standard spools General
Technical data
Pilot valve D633K standard or trimmed
Nominal size and holes NG25, mounting pattern according to ISO 4401-08-08-0-05
Ö Fig. 63, page 187
Mounting position In any position, fixed or movable
Diameter of the con-
nection holes and
threads of the fastening
holes
P, A, T, B, and X 28 mm
X and Y 11.2 mm
F
1
to F
6
M12
G
1
and G
2
7.5 mm
Ö Fig. 63, page 187
Mass approx. 26.5 kg (58.4 lb)
Valves with fail-safe functions H and K approx. 28 kg (61.7 lb)
Dimensions Ö "Dimensions (installation drawing), with fail-safe F and D",
page 190/page 190
Ambient
temperature
1)
for transport/storage
2)
recommended 15 °C to 25 °C
permissible –40 °C to 80 °C
for operation (–40 °C on request) –20 °C to 60 °C
depending on the certified temperature classes
Permissible ambient
conditions
Rel. humidity
for storage
< 65 % not condensing
Vibration resistance
3)
10 g, 3 axes, Frequency: 10 to 2,000 Hz (according to EN 60068-2-6)
Shock protection
3
50 g, 6 directions, half-sine 3 ms (as per EN 60068-2-27)
Valve configurations 4-way, 3-way, 2/2-way and 2-way operation
Ö Chap. "3.3.2 Valve configurations and hydraulic symbols", page 34
Hydraulic data
Operating pressure
4)
of the pilot valve
via T or Y p_T or p_y +10 bar
Operating pressure range X port 10 to 350 bar
max. pressure Y port
5
70 bar
Maximum operating
pressure range of main
stage
Ports P, A, and B 350 bar
Port T for Y internal
5)
70 bar
Port T for Y external 350 bar
Maximum flow Q
max
1500 l/min (396 gpm)
Ö Chap. "4.1 Flow diagram (4-way operation)", page 49
Rated flow Q
N
for ∆p
N
= 5 bar per
control land
350 l/min (92.5 gpm)
Leakage flow
Main stage Q
L
3.0 l/min (0.8 gpm)
(
≈ zero overlap)
Pilot flow static Pilot valve standard 0.5 l/min (0.1 gpm)
trimmed 0.5 l/min (0.1 gpm)
Pilot flow at 100 %
jump
Pilot valve standard 35 l/min (9.2 gpm)
trimmed 26 l/min (6.9 gpm)
Hydraulic fluid
Permissible fluids Mineral-oil-based hydraulic oil as per DIN 51524-1 1 to 3 and ISO11158
Other fluids on request
Permissible temperature (–40 ° on request) –20 ° to 80 ° depending on the certified temperature
classes
Viscosity
ν recommended 15 to 45 mm²/s
permissible 5 to 400 mm²/s
Purity class
6)
,
recommended
(ISO 4406)
for functional safety < 18/15/12
for life cycle (wear ) < 17/14/11
Tab. 38: Technical data D673K with direct-operated pilot valve (part 1 of 2)
Technical data D673K – ISO 4401-08/NG25
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 189
Step response time for
0 to 100 % spool stroke
Pilot valve standard 15 ms
trimmed 18 ms
Step response and frequency response Ö page 195
Static and
dynamic data
Threshold < 0.1 %
Hysteresis <0.2%
Zero shift
at ∆T=55K
<1%
Manufacturing
tolerance ±10 %
Relative duty cycle 100 % Electrical data
protection type IP66 with mounted mating connectors (according to EN 60529)
Supply voltage Nominal 24 V (18 to 32 V) DC based on GND.
Only use SELV-/PELV power supply according to EN 60204-1
At supply voltages less than 18 V, the valve is rendered in the fail-safe
state.
Ö Chap. "3.2.3 Fail-safe events", page 28
Max. current consump-
tion static 0.3 A
Max. current consump-
tion dynamic 1.2 A
External fuse protec-
tion for each valve 1.6 A slow-blowing fuse
EMC protection
requirements
Immunity to interference as per EN 61000-6-2:2005
(evaluation criterion A)
Emitted interference as per EN 61000-6-4:2005 (CAN bus and
Profibus DP) or as per EN 61000-6-3:2005 (EtherCAT)
Ö Chap. "11.2 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)", page 163
Connectors Ö Chap. "7 Electrical connection", page 61
Ö Chap. "7.4.1 Pin assignment of connector X1", page 69
Triggering electronics Digital control electronics integrated into the valve
1)
The ambient temperature and the temperature of the hydraulic fluid influence the temperature of the
valve electronics. In order to ensure that the electronic components integrated in the valve last as long
as possible, we recommend that the hydraulic fluid be kept at as low a temperature as possible at as
low an ambient temperature as possible. A reference temperature is measured in the valve electron-
ics. Fault-free operation is guaranteed up to a reference temperature of 85 °C (185 °F). At reference
temperatures over 85 °C (185°F) a warning is output via the field bus on valves with field bus inter-
faces. At reference temperatures over 105 °C (221°F) the valve electronics are deactivated; the valve
adopts the 'DISABLED' valve status and thus the mechanical fail-safe state.
Ö Chap. "3.2 Safety function/fail-safe", page 25
2)
Temperature fluctuations>10 °C must be avoided during storage.
3)
Transportation and storage should be as vibration- and shock-free as possible.
4)
Hydraulic data was measured measured at operating pressure p
P
= 210 bar (3,046 psi), viscosity of
hydraulic fluid ν =32mm
2
/s and temperature of hydraulic fluid T = 40 °C (104 °F)
Ö Chap. "6 Mounting and Connection to the Hydraulic System", page 56
5)
Pressure peaks up to 210 bar permissible
6)
The cleanliness of the hydraulic fluid has a great effect on functional safety (reliable spool
positioning, high resolution) and wear of the spool lands (pressure gain, leakage losses).
Tab. 38: Technical data D673K with direct-operated pilot valve (part 2 of 2)
Technical data D673K – ISO 4401-08/NG25
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 190
Dimensions (installation drawing), with fail-safe F and D
*) Dimension with fixed cabling of the pilot valve with explosion-proof wiring. If the cabling of the pi-
lot valve makes use of explosion-proof plug connectors, the installation space of the valve in-
creases by 50 mm.
Two-stage digital proportional valve D673K series with direct-operated pilot valve D633K
Fig. 64: Installation drawing for D673K (dimensions in mm and (in))
21
90.5
[3.563]
57
[2.244]
227.5
[8.957]
301
[11.85]
*
130
[5.118]
~90
[3.543]
118
[4.657]
228
[8.976]
58.5
[2.303]
118.5
[4.665]
99.5
[3.917]
64.5
[2.539]
29.5
[1.161]
134.5
[5.295]
192
[7.547]
180
[7.075]
137.5
[5.413]
143
[5.646]
98
[3.874]
521
[20.5]
228
[8.976]
213
[8.394]
172
[6.787]
218
[8.598]
229
[9.024]
246
[9.681]
Ø13.5
[.531]
Ø25
[.984]
Ø39
[1.535]
6x
2x
4x
2
[.079]
Pos. Designation Additional information
1 Type plate Ö Fig. 45, page 154
2 Ex type plate Ö Fig. 46, page 155
Installation space of the plug connector when mounted: Ö Fig. 14, page 67
Technical data D673K – ISO 4401-08/NG25
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 191
Valve configurations and hydraulic symbols
Fail-safe function F
4-way version
X and Y optionally external
or internal
Fail-safe function M
2/2-way version
only X and Y external
Execute flow direction
according to symbols.
A B
P
T
XY
AB
PTX Y
Technical data D673K – ISO 4401-08/NG25
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 192
Dimensions (installation drawing), mechan./hydr. fail-safe H and K
*) Dimension with fixed cabling of the pilot valve with explosion-proof wiring. If the cabling of the pi-
lot valve makes use of explosion-proof plug connectors, the installation space of the valve in-
creases by 50 mm.
Two-stage digital proportional valve D673K series with direct-operated pilot valve D633K with fail-
safe function H and K for applications with safety requirements
Fig. 65: Installation drawing for D673K (dimensions in mm and (in))
21
90.5
[3.563]
57
[2.244]
190
[7.48]
288
[11.319]
361
[14.213]
*
130
[5.118]
~90
[3.543]
118
[4.657]
228
[8.976]
58.5
[2.303]
118.5
[4.665]
Ø13.5
[.531]
6x
2x
2
[.079]
99.5
[3.917]
64.5
[2.539]
29.5
[1.161]
134.5
[5.295]
160
[6.299]
185
[7.274]
172
[6.787]
218
[8.598]
229
[9.023]
246
[9.681]
192
[7.547]
180
[7.075]
137.5
[5.413]
143
[5.646]
98
[3.874]
228
[8.976]
213
[8.394]
138
[5.449]
Ø25
[.984]
Ø39
[1.535]
4x
521
[20.5]
2
[.083]
26
[1.024]
p
z
: 25 … 350 bar, G1/4
Pos. Designation Additional information
1 Type plate Ö Fig. 45, page 154
2 Ex type plate Ö Fig. 46, page 155
Installation space of the plug connector when mounted: Ö Fig. 14, page 67
Technical data D673K – ISO 4401-08/NG25
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 193
Fail-safe function H
4-way version
X and Y optionally external
or internal
Fail-safe function K
4-way version
X and Y optionally external
or internal
Fail-safe function K
2/2-way version
only X and Y external
defined AtT
defined middle defined middle through
mechanical stroke limitation
Execute flow direction
according to symbols.
AB
PX
Z
YT
A
PT Y
B
XY
AB
PX
Z
YT
A
PT Y
B
XY
AB
PX
Z
YT
A
PT Y
B
Technical data D673K – ISO 4401-08/NG25
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 194
Flow diagram Flow diagram (4-way operation)
Ö Chap. "4.1 Flow diagram (4-way operation)", page 49
Flow signal characteristic
curve
Flow signal characteristic curve at rated pressure drop ∆p
N
= 10 bar, that is,
∆p
N
= 5 bar per control land:
Spool A ≈ zero overlap, linear characteristic curve
Spool D 10 % positive overlap, linear characteristic curve
Spool Y
≈ zero overlap, kinked characteristic curve
L03 type: stub shaft spool rated volume flow 350 l/min
Fig. 66: Valve D673K, flow-signal characteristic curve
Characteristic curves D673K valves with direct-operated pilot valve D633K
All characteristic curves in the section "Characteristic curves
D673K valves with pilot valve D633K" are typical characteristic
curves for the D673K valve measured at operating pressure
p
P
= 210 bar (3,046 psi), viscosity of hydraulic fluid ν =32mm
2
/s
and temperature of hydraulic fluid T = 40 °C (104 °F)
Flow Q [l/min]
Signal [%]
20 40 60 80 100
100
200
300
400
0
0
L03
Technical data D673K – ISO 4401-08/NG25
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 195
Step response for D673K
valves with direct-
operated pilot valve
D633K, standard
Fig. 67: Step response for D673K valves, standard
Frequency response for
D673K valves with direct-
operated pilot valve
D633K, standard
Fig. 68: Frequency response for D673K valves, standard
Spool stroke [%]
Time [ms]
0 10 20 30 40
-10
0
25
50
75
100
140 bar
70 bar
Amplitude ratio [dB]
Frequency [Hz]
Phase lag [degrees]
1 10 100 200
-9
-120
-6
-90-3
-60
0
-30
3
0
90%
25%
5%
Technical data D673K – ISO 4401-08/NG25
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 196
Step response for D673K
valves with direct-
operated pilot valve
D633K, trimmed
Fig. 69: Step response for D673K valves, trimmed
Frequency response for
D673K valves with direct-
operated pilot valve
D633K, trimmed
Fig. 70: Frequency response for D673K valves, trimmed
Spool stroke [%]
Time [ms]
0 10 20 30 40
-10
0
25
50
75
100
140 bar
70 bar
Amplitude ratio [dB]
Frequency [Hz]
Phase lag [degrees]
1 10 100 200
-9
-120
-6
-90-3
-60
0
-30
3
0
90%
25%
5%
Technical data D674K – ISO 4401-08/NG25
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 197
The technical data apply for proportional valves in the D674K series
• two-stage, with direct-operated pilot valve D633K
Ö Chap. "11.6.2 Data D674K with direct-operated pilot valve D633K",
page 199
Ö Chap. "Mounting surface", page 198
Ö Chap. "Dimensions (installation drawing), with fail-safe F and D",
page 201
Ö Chap. "Valve configurations and hydraulic symbols", page 202
Ö Chap. "Characteristic curves D674K valves with direct-operated pilot
valve D633K", page 205
11.6 Technical data D674K – ISO 4401-08/NG25
Technical data D674K – ISO 4401-08/NG25
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 198
11.6.1 Mounting surface
Technical data for
the mounting surface
11.6.1.1 Mounting pattern of mounting surface
The holes in the mounting surface must correspond to ISO 4401-08-08-0-05.
The holes (Fig. 71) apply for the digital proportional valve in the D674K series
• two-stage, with direct-operated pilot valve D633K
Mounting pattern of
mounting surface
according to
ISO 4401-08-08-0-05
D674K
If the valve is mounted on the mounting surface, it projects length-
wise (x-axis) over the mounting surface.
Valve dimensions:
Ö Chap. " Dimensions (installation drawing), with fail-safe F and
D", page 201
0
12
16
124
154
0
PATB X Y G
2
G
2
F
1
F
2
F
3
F
4
F
2
F
2
dia. 32
(1.26)
dia. 32
(1.26)
dia. 32
(1.26)
dia. 32
(1.26)
dia. 11.2
(0.44)
dia. 11.2
(0.44)
dia. 7.5
(0.30)
dia. 7.5
(0.30)
M12 M12 M12 M12 M12 M12
X 77 53.2 29.4 100.8 17.5 112.7 94.5 29.4 0 130.2 130.2 0 53.2 77
Y 17.5 74.6 17.5 74.6 73 19 -4.8 92.1 0 0 92.1 92.1 0 92.1
Fig. 71: Holes in the mounting surface for the D674K series (dimensions in mm and (in))
• For maximum flow, the ports for P, T, A, and B must contrary
to the standard be designed with a diameter of 32 mm
(1.26 in).
•F
1
…F
4
are threaded holes for attachment screws in the mounting sur-
face of the valve.
•G
1
and G
2
are holes for accommodating the transposition-
proof pins of the valve.
Technical data D674K – ISO 4401-08/NG25
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 199
11.6.2 Data D674K with direct-operated pilot valve D633K
Valve design Proportional valve, two-stage, with standard spools General
Technical data
Pilot valve D633K standard or trimmed
Nominal size and holes NG25, mounting pattern according to ISO 4401-08-08-0-05
Ö Fig. 71, page 198
Mounting position In any position, fixed or movable
Diameter of the con-
nection holes and
threads of the fastening
holes
P, A, T, B, and X 32 mm
X and Y 11.2 mm
F
1
to F
6
M10
G
1
and G
2
7.5 mm
Ö Fig. 71, page 198
Mass approx. 26.5 kg (58.4 lb)
Valves with fail-safe functions H and K approx. 28 kg (61.7 lb)
Dimensions Ö "Dimensions (installation drawing), with fail-safe F and D", page 201/
Ambient
temperature
1)
for transport/storage
2)
recommended 15 °C to 25 °C
permissible –40 °C to 80 °C
for operation (–40 on request) –20 °C to 60 °C
Depending on the certified temperature classes
Permissible ambient
conditions
Rel. humidity
for storage
< 65 % not condensing
Vibration resistance
3)
10 g, 3 axes, Frequency: 10 to 2,000 Hz (according to EN 60068-2-6)
Shock resistance
3
50 g, 6 directions, half-sine 3 ms (as per EN 60068-2-27)
Valve configurations 4-way, 3-way, 2/2-way and 2-way operation
Ö Chap. "3.3.2 Valve configurations and hydraulic symbols", page 34
Hydraulic data
Operating pressure
4)
of the pilot valve
via T or Y p_T or p_y +10 bar
Operating pressure range X port 10 to 350 bar
max. pressure Y port
5
70 bar
Maximum operating
pressure range of main
stage
Ports P, A, and B 350 bar
Port T for Y internal
5)
70 bar
Port T for Y external 350 bar
Maximum flow Q
max
1500 l/min (396 gpm)
Ö Chap. "4.1 Flow diagram (4-way operation)", page 49
Rated flow Q
N
for ∆p
N
= 5 bar per
control land
550 l/min (145 gpm)
Leakage flow
Main stage Q
L
3.0 l/min (0.79 gpm)
(
≈ zero overlap)
Pilot flow static Pilot valve standard 0.5 l/min (0.1 gpm)
trimmed 0.5 l/min (0.1 gpm)
Pilot flow at 100 %
jump
Pilot valve standard 35 l/min (9.2 gpm)
trimmed 26 l/min (6.9 gpm)
Hydraulic fluid
Permissible fluids Mineral-oil-based hydraulic oil as per DIN 51524-1 1 to 3 and ISO11158
Other fluids on request
Permissible temperature (–40 ° on request) –20 ° to 80 ° depending on the certified temperature
classes
Viscosity
ν recommended 15 to 45 mm²/s
permissible 5 to 400 mm²/s
Purity class
6)
,
recommended
(ISO 4406)
for functional safety < 18/15/12
for life cycle (wear ) <17/14/11
Tab. 39: Technical data D674K with direct-operated pilot valve D633K (part 1 of 2)
Technical data D674K – ISO 4401-08/NG25
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 200
Step response time for
0 to 100 % spool stroke
Pilot valve standard 17 ms
trimmed 23 ms
Step response and frequency response Ö page 206
Static and
dynamic data
Threshold < 0.1 %
Hysteresis <0.2%
Zero shift
at ∆T=55K
<1%
Manufacturing
tolerance ±10 %
Relative duty cycle 100 % Electrical data
protection type IP66 with mounted mating connectors (according to EN 60529)
Supply voltage Nominal 24 V (18 to 32 V) DC based on GND.
Only use SELV-/PELV power supply according to EN 60204-1
At supply voltages less than 18 V, the valve is rendered in the fail-safe
state.
Ö Chap. "3.2.3 Fail-safe events", page 28
Max. current consump-
tion static 0.3 A
Max. current consump-
tion dynamic 1.2 A
External fuse protec-
tion for each valve 1.6 A slow-blowing fuse
EMC protection re-
quirements
Immunity to interference as per EN 61000-6-2:2005
(evaluation criterion A)
Emitted interference as per EN 61000-6-4:2005 (CAN bus and
Profibus DP) or as per EN 61000-6-3:2005 (EtherCAT)
Ö Chap. "11.2 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)", page 163
Connectors Ö Chap. "7 Electrical connection", page 61
Ö Chap. "7.4.1 Pin assignment of connector X1", page 69
Triggering electronics Digital control electronics integrated into the valve
1)
The ambient temperature and the temperature of the hydraulic fluid influence the temperature of the
valve electronics. In order to ensure that the electronic components integrated in the valve last as long
as possible, we recommend that the hydraulic fluid be kept at as low a temperature as possible at as
low an ambient temperature as possible. A reference temperature is measured in the valve electron-
ics. Fault-free operation is guaranteed up to a reference temperature of 85 °C (185 °F). At reference
temperatures over 85 °C (185°F) a warning is output via the field bus on valves with field bus inter-
faces. At reference temperatures over 105 °C (221°F) the valve electronics are deactivated; the valve
adopts the 'DISABLED' valve status and thus the mechanical fail-safe state.
Ö Chap. "3.2 Safety function/fail-safe", page 25
2)
Temperature fluctuations>10 °C must be avoided during storage.
3)
Transportation and storage should be as vibration- and shock-free as possible.
4)
Hydraulic data was measured measured at operating pressure p
P
= 210 bar (3,046 psi), viscosity of
hydraulic fluid ν =32mm
2
/s and temperature of hydraulic fluid T = 40 °C (104 °F)
Ö Chap. "6 Mounting and Connection to the Hydraulic System", page 56
5)
Pressure peaks up to 210 bar permissible
6)
The cleanliness of the hydraulic fluid has a great effect on functional safety (reliable spool
positioning, high resolution) and wear of the spool lands (pressure gain, leakage losses).
Tab. 39: Technical data D674K with direct-operated pilot valve D633K (part 2 of 2)
Technical data D674K – ISO 4401-08/NG25
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 201
Dimensions (installation drawing), with fail-safe F and D
*) Dimension with fixed cabling of the pilot valve with explosion-proof wiring. If the cabling of the pi-
lot valve makes use of explosion-proof plug connectors, the installation space of the valve in-
creases by 50 mm.
Two-stage digital proportional valve D674K series with direct-operated pilot valve D633K
Fig. 72: Installation drawing for D674K (dimensions in mm and (in))
21
90.5
[3.563]
57
[2.244]
227.5
[8.957]
301
[11.85]
*
130
[5.118]
~90
[3.543]
118
[4.657]
228
[8.976]
58.5
[2.303]
118.5
[4.665]
99.5
[3.917]
64.5
[2.539]
29.5
[1.161]
134.5
[5.295]
192
[7.547]
180
[7.075]
137.5
[5.413]
143
[5.646]
98
[3.874]
521
[20.5]
228
[8.976]
213
[8.394]
172
[6.787]
218
[8.598]
229
[9.024]
246
[9.681]
Ø13.5
[.531]
Ø25
[.984]
Ø39
[1.535]
6x
2x
4x
2
[.079]
Pos. Designation Additional information
1 Type plate Ö Fig. 45, page 154
2 Ex type plate Ö Fig. 46, page 155
Installation space of the plug connector when mounted: Ö Fig. 14, page 67
Technical data D674K – ISO 4401-08/NG25
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 202
Valve configurations and hydraulic symbols
Fail-safe function F
4-way version
X and Y optionally external
or internal
Fail-safe function M
2/2-way version
only X and Y external
Execute flow direction
according to symbols.
A B
T
P
X
Y
AB
PTX Y
Technical data D674K – ISO 4401-08/NG25
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 203
Dimensions (installation drawing), mechan./hydr. fail-safe H and K
*) Dimension with fixed cabling of the pilot valve with explosion-proof wiring. If the cabling of the pi-
lot valve makes use of explosion-proof plug connectors, the installation space of the valve in-
creases by 50 mm.
Two-stage digital proportional valve D674K series with direct-operated pilot valve D633K with fail-
safe function H and K for applications with safety requirements
Fig. 73: Installation drawing for D674K (dimensions in mm and (in))
21
90.5
[3.563]
57
[2.244]
190
[7.48]
288
[11.319]
361
[14.213]
*
130
[5.118]
~90
[3.543]
118
[4.657]
228
[8.976]
58.5
[2.303]
118.5
[4.665]
Ø13.5
[.531]
6x
2x
2
[.079]
99.5
[3.917]
64.5
[2.539]
29.5
[1.161]
134.5
[5.295]
160
[6.299]
185
[7.274]
172
[6.787]
218
[8.598]
229
[9.023]
246
[9.681]
192
[7.547]
180
[7.075]
137.5
[5.413]
143
[5.646]
98
[3.874]
228
[8.976]
213
[8.394]
138
[5.449]
Ø25
[.984]
Ø39
[1.535]
4x
521
[20.5]
2
[.083]
26
[1.024]
p
z
: 25 … 350 bar, G1/4
Pos. Designation Additional information
1 Type plate Ö Fig. 45, page 154
2 Ex type plate Ö Fig. 46, page 155
Installation space of the plug connector when mounted: Ö Fig. 14, page 67
Technical data D674K – ISO 4401-08/NG25
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 204
Fail-safe function H
4-way version
X and Y optionally external
or internal
Fail-safe function K
4-way version
X and Y optionally external
or internal
Fail-safe function K
2/2-way version
only X and Y external
defined AtT
defined middle
defined middle through
mechanical stroke limitation
Execute flow direction
according to symbols.
AB
PX
Z
YT
A
PT Y
B
XY
AB
PX
Z
YT
A
PT Y
B
XY
AB
PX
Z
YT
A
PT Y
B
Technical data D674K – ISO 4401-08/NG25
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 205
Flow diagram Flow diagram (4-way operation)
Ö Chap. "4.1 Flow diagram (4-way operation)", page 49
Flow signal characteristic
curve
Flow signal characteristic curve at rated pressure drop ∆p
N
= 10 bar, that is,
∆p
N
= 5 bar per control land:
Spool A ≈ zero overlap, linear characteristic curve
Spool D 10 % positive overlap, linear characteristic curve
Spool Y
≈ zero overlap, kinked characteristic curve
L05 type: stub shaft spool rated volume flow 550 l/min
Fig. 74: Valve D674K, flow-signal characteristic curve
Characteristic curves D674K valves with direct-operated pilot valve D633K
All characteristic curves in the section "Characteristic curves
D674K valves with pilot valve D633K" are typical characteristic
curves for the D674K valve with pilot valve D633K measured at op-
erating pressure p
P
= 210 bar (3,046 psi), viscosity of hydraulic
fluid ν =32mm
2
/s and temperature of hydraulic fluid T = 40 °C
(104 °F)
Flow Q [l/min]
Signal [%]
20 40 60 80 1000
600
500
400
300
200
100
0
B T
TA
AP
B
P
L05
Technical data D674K – ISO 4401-08/NG25
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 206
Step response for D674K
valves with direct-
operated pilot valve
D633K, standard
Fig. 75: Step response for D674K valves, standard
Frequency response for
D674K valves with direct-
operated pilot valve
D633K, standard
Fig. 76: Frequency response for D674K valves, standard
Spool stroke [%]
Time [ms]
0 10 20 30 40 50
-10
0
25
50
75
100
140 bar
70 bar
Amplitude ratio [dB]
Frequency [Hz]
1 10 100 200
-9
-120
-6
-90-3
-60
0
-30
3
0
90%
25%
5%
Technical data D674K – ISO 4401-08/NG25
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 207
Step response for D674K
valves with direct-
operated pilot valve
D633K, trimmed
Fig. 77: Step response for D674K valves, trimmed
Frequency response for
D674K valves with direct-
operated pilot valve
D633K, trimmed
Fig. 78: Frequency response for D674K valves, trimmed
Spool stroke [%]
Time [ms]
0 10 20 30 40 50
-10
0
25
50
75
100
140 bar
70 bar
Amplitude ratio [dB]
Frequency [Hz]
Phase lag [degrees]
1 10 100 200
-9
-120
-6
-90-3
-60
0
-30
3
0
90%
25%
5%
Technical data D675K – ISO 4401-10/NG32
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 208
The technical data apply for proportional valves in the D675K series
• two-stage, with direct-operated pilot valve D633K
Ö Chap. "11.7.2 Data D675K with direct-operated pilot valve D633K",
page 210
Ö Chap. "Mounting surface", page 209
Ö Chap. "Dimensions (installation drawing), with fail-safe F and D",
page 212
Ö Chap. "Valve configurations and hydraulic symbols", page 213
Ö Chap. "Characteristic curves D675K valves with direct-operated pilot
valve D633K", page 216
11.7 Technical data D675K – ISO 4401-10/NG32
Technical data D675K – ISO 4401-10/NG32
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 209
11.7.1 Mounting surface
Technical data for
the mounting surface
11.7.1.1 Mounting pattern of mounting surface
The holes in the mounting surface must correspond to ISO 4401-10-09-0-05.
The holes (Fig. 79) apply for the digital proportional valve in the D675K series
• two-stage, with direct-operated pilot valve D633K
Mounting pattern of
mounting surface
according to
ISO 4401-10-09-0-05
D675K
If the valve is mounted on the mounting surface, it projects length-
wise (x-axis) over the mounting surface.
Valve dimensions:
Ö Chap. "Dimensions (installation drawing), with fail-safe F and D",
page 212
20
230
22
203
0
PATB X Y G
2
G
2
F
1
F
2
F
3
F
4
F
2
F
2
dia. 50
(1.97)
dia. 50
(1.97)
dia. 50
(1.97)
dia. 50
(1.97)
dia. 11.2
(0.44)
dia. 11.2
(0.44)
dia. 7.5
(0.30)
dia. 7.5
(0.30)
M12 M12 M12 M12 M12 M12
X 114.3 82.5 41.3 147.6 41.3 168.3 147.6 41.3 0 190.5 190.5 0 76.2 114.3
Y 35 123.8 35 123.8 130.2 44.5 0 158.8 0 0 158.8 158.8 0 158.8
* Dimensions not according to ISO but instead according to DIN 24340
Fig. 79: Holes in the mounting surface for the D675K series (dimensions in mm and (in))
• For maximum flow, the ports for P, T, A, and B must contrary
to the standard be designed with a diameter of 50 mm
(1.97 in).
•F
1
…F
6
are threaded holes for attachment screws in the
mounting surface of the valve.
•G
1
and G
2
are threaded holes for accommodating the transpo-
sition-proof pins of the valve.
• The position of the attached guard pin is according to
DIN 24340.
The hole G1 according to ISO is 138.6 mm and is also drilled
in the valve body.
Technical data D675K – ISO 4401-10/NG32
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 210
11.7.2 Data D675K with direct-operated pilot valve D633K
Valve design Proportional valve, two-stage, with standard spools General
Technical data
Pilot valve D633K standard or trimmed
Nominal size and holes NG32, mounting pattern according to ISO 4401-10-09-0-05
Ö Fig. 79, page 209
Mounting position In any position, fixed or movable
Diameter of the ports
and threads of the fas-
tening holes
P, A, T, and B 50 mm
X and Y 11.2 mm
F
1
to F
6
M20
G
1
and G
2
7.5 mm
Ö Fig. 79, page 209
Mass approx. 76.5 kg (168.7 lb)
Valves with fail-safe functions H and K approx. 78 kg (172 lb)
Dimensions Ö Chap. "Dimensions (installation drawing), with fail-safe F and D",
page 212
Ambient
temperature
1)
for transport/storage
2)
recommended 15 °C to 25 °C
permissible –40 °C to 80 °C
for operation (–40 on request) –20 °C to 60 °C
Depending on the certified temperature classes
Permissible ambient
conditions
Rel. humidity
for storage
< 65 % not condensing
Vibration resistance
3)
10 g, 3 axes, Frequency: 10 to 2,000 Hz (according to EN 60068-2-6)
Shock resistance
3
50 g, 6 directions, half-sine 3 ms (as per EN 60068-2-27)
Valve configurations 4-way, 3-way, 2/2-way and 2-way operation
Ö Chap. "3.3.2 Valve configurations and hydraulic symbols", page 34
Hydraulic data
Operating pressure
4)
of the pilot valve
via T or Y p_T or p_y +10 bar
Operating pressure range X port 10 to 350 bar
max. pressure Y port
5
50 bar
Maximum operating
pressure range of main
stage
Ports P, A, and B 350 bar
Port T for Y internal
5)
50 bar
Port T for Y external 350 bar
Maximum flow Q
max
3600 l/min (951 gpm)
Ö Chap. "4.1 Flow diagram (4-way operation)", page 49
Rated flow Q
N
for ∆p
N
= 5 bar per
control land
Standard
and trimmed 1000 / 1500 l/min (264 /396 gpm)
(depending on the series variant Ö Chap. " Type designa-
tion", "Digit 2, rated flow Q
N
", page 157)
Leakage flow
Main stage Q
L
7.0 l/min (1.85 gpm)
(
≈ zero overlap)
Pilot flow static Pilot valve standard and trimmed
1.4 l/min (0.37 gpm)
Pilot flow at 100 %
jump
Pilot valve standard 35 l/min (9.25 gpm)
trimmed 26 l/min (6.9 gpm)
Hydraulic fluid
Permissible fluids Mineral-oil-based hydraulic oil as per DIN 51524-1 1 to 3 and ISO11158
Other fluids on request
Permissible temperature (–40 ° on request) –20 ° to 80 ° depending on the certified temperature
classes
Viscosity
ν recommended 15 to 45 mm²/s
permissible 5 to 400 mm²/s
Purity class
6)
,
recommended
(ISO 4406)
for functional safety < 18/15/12
for life cycle (wear ) <17/14/11
Tab. 40: Technical data D675K with direct-operated
pilot valve D633K (part 1 of 2)
Technical data D675K – ISO 4401-10/NG32
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 211
Step response time for
0 to 100 % spool stroke
standard with 1000 l/min rated flow 30 ms
with 1500 l/min rated flow 37 ms
trimmed with 1000 l/min rated flow 35 ms
with 1500 l/min rated flow 43 ms
Step response and frequency response Ö page 218
Static and
dynamic data
Threshold < 0.1 %
Hysteresis <0.2%
Zero shift
at ∆T=55K
<2%
Manufacturing
tolerance ±10 %
Relative duty cycle 100 % Electrical data
protection type IP66 with mounted mating connectors (according to EN 60529)
Supply voltage Nominal 24 V (18 to 32 V) DC based on GND.
Only use SELV-/PELV power supply according to EN 60204-1
At supply voltages less than 18 V, the valve is rendered in the fail-safe
state.
Ö Chap. "3.2.3 Fail-safe events", page 28
Max. current consump-
tion static 0.3 A
Max. current consump-
tion dynamic 1.2 A
External fuse protec-
tion for each valve 1.6 A slow-blowing fuse
EMC protection re-
quirements
Immunity to interference as per EN 61000-6-2:2005
(evaluation criterion A)
Emitted interference as per EN 61000-6-4:2005 (CAN bus and
Profibus DP) or as per EN 61000-6-3:2005 (EtherCAT)
Ö Chap. "11.2 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)", page 163
Connectors Ö Chap. "7 Electrical connection", page 61
Ö Chap. "7.4.1 Pin assignment of connector X1", page 69
Triggering electronics integrated into the valve
1)
The ambient temperature and the temperature of the hydraulic fluid influence the temperature of the
valve electronics. In order to ensure that the electronic components integrated in the valve last as long
as possible, we recommend that the hydraulic fluid be kept at as low a temperature as possible at as
low an ambient temperature as possible. A reference temperature is measured in the valve electron-
ics. Fault-free operation is guaranteed up to a reference temperature of 85 °C (185 °F). At reference
temperatures over 85 °C (185°F) a warning is output via the field bus on valves with field bus inter-
faces. At reference temperatures over 105 °C (221°F) the valve electronics are deactivated; the valve
adopts the 'DISABLED' valve status and thus the mechanical fail-safe state.
Ö Chap. "3.2 Safety function/fail-safe", page 25
2)
Temperature fluctuations>10 °C must be avoided during storage.
3)
Transportation and storage should be as vibration- and shock-free as possible.
4)
Hydraulic data was measured measured at operating pressure p
P
= 210 bar (3,046 psi), viscosity of
hydraulic fluid ν =32mm
2
/s and temperature of hydraulic fluid T = 40 °C (104 °F)
Ö Chap. "6 Mounting and Connection to the Hydraulic System", page 56
5)
Pressure peaks up to 210 bar permissible
6)
The cleanliness of the hydraulic fluid has a great effect on functional safety (reliable spool
positioning, high resolution) and wear of the spool lands (pressure gain, leakage losses).
Tab. 40: Technical data D675K with direct-operated
pilot valve D633K (part 2 of 2)
Technical data D675K – ISO 4401-10/NG32
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 212
Dimensions (installation drawing), with fail-safe F and D
*) Dimension with fixed cabling of the pilot valve with explosion-proof wiring. If the cabling of the pi-
lot valve makes use of explosion-proof plug connectors, the installation space of the valve in-
creases by 50 mm.
Two-stage digital proportional valve D675K series with direct-operated pilot valve D633K
Fig. 80: Installation drawing for D675K (dimensions in mm and (in))
2
1
228
[8.957]
216
[8.484]
182
[7.15]
179
[7.055]
134
[5.283]
681
[26.823]
353
[13.89]
249
[9.803]
353
[13.89]
160
[6.299]
59
[2.323]
2.7
[.106]
351.5
[13.839]
425
[16.732]
254
[10]
~90
[3.543]
194
[7.638]
Ø60
[2.362]
4x
99
[3.898]
199
[7.836]
145.5
[5.728]
110.5
[4.35]
75.5
[2.972]
180.5
[7.106]
218
[8.598]
264
[10.409]
275
[10.835]
292
[11.492]
Ø22
[.866]
6x
*
Pos. Designation Additional information
1 Type plate Ö Fig. 45, page 154
2 Ex type plate Ö Fig. 46, page 155
Installation space of the plug connector when mounted: Ö Fig. 14, page 67
Technical data D675K – ISO 4401-10/NG32
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 213
Valve configurations and hydraulic symbols
Fail-safe function F
4-way version
X and Y optionally external
or internal
Fail-safe function M
2/2-way version
only X and Y external
Execute flow direction
according to symbols.
A B
P
T
XY
AB
PTX Y
Technical data D675K – ISO 4401-10/NG32
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 214
Dimensions (installation drawing), mechan./hydr. fail-safe H and K
*) Dimension with fixed cabling of the pilot valve with explosion-proof wiring. If the cabling of the pi-
lot valve makes use of explosion-proof plug connectors, the installation space of the valve in-
creases by 50 mm.
Two-stage digital proportional valve D675K series with direct-operated pilot valve D633K with fail-
safe function H and K for applications with safety requirements
Fig. 81: Installation drawing for D675K (dimensions in mm and (in))
2
1
160
[6.299]
59
[2.323]
386.5
[15.217]
460
[18.11]
289
[11.378]
~90
[3.543]
194
[7.638]
353
[13.89]
228
[8.957]
216
[8.484]
182
[7.15]
179
[7.055]
134
[5.283]
184
[7232]
145.5
[5.728]
110.5
[4.35]
180.5
[7.106]
141
[5.567]
199
[7.837]
218
[8.598]
264
[10.409]
275
[10.835]
292
[11.492]
2.7
[.106]
Ø60
[2.362]
4x
Ø22
[.866]
6x
283
[11.152]
258.5
[10.177]
681
[26.823]
353
[13.89]
249
[9.803]
99
[3.898]
75.5
[2.972]
*
p
z
: 25 … 350 bar, G1/4
Pos. Designation Additional information
1 Type plate Ö Fig. 45, page 154
2 Ex type plate Ö Fig. 46, page 155
Installation space of the plug connector when mounted: Ö Fig. 14, page 67
Technical data D675K – ISO 4401-10/NG32
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 215
Fail-safe function H
4-way version
X and Y optionally external
or internal
Fail-safe function K
4-way version
X and Y optionally external
or internal
Fail-safe function K
2/2-way version
only X and Y external
defined AtT defined middle defined middle through
mechanical stroke limitation
Execute flow direction
according to symbols.
AB
PX
Z
YT
A
PT Y
B
XY
AB
PX
Z
YT
A
PT Y
B
XY
AB
PX
Z
YT
A
PT Y
B
Technical data D675K – ISO 4401-10/NG32
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 216
Flow diagram Flow diagram (4-way operation)
Ö Chap. "4.1 Flow diagram (4-way operation)", page 49
Flow signal characteristic
curve
Flow signal characteristic curve at rated pressure drop ∆p
N
= 10 bar, that is,
∆p
N
= 5 bar per control land:
Spool A ≈ zero overlap, linear characteristic curve
Spool D 10 % positive overlap, linear characteristic curve
Spool V 20 % positive overlap, kinked characteristic curve
Spool Y
≈ zero overlap, kinked characteristic curve
P10 type: standard spool rated flow 1000 l/min
Fig. 82: Valve D675K, flow-signal characteristic curve 1000 l/min
Characteristic curves D675K valves with direct-operated pilot valve D633K
All characteristic curves in the section "Characteristic curves
D675K valves with pilot valve D633K" are typical characteristic
curves for the D675K valve with pilot valve D633K measured at op-
erating pressure p
P
= 210 bar (3,046 psi), viscosity of hydraulic
fluid ν =32mm
2
/s and temperature of hydraulic fluid T = 40 °C
(104 °F)
Flow Q [l/min]
Signal [%]
100
0
1600
1400
1200
1000
400
200
800
600
20 40 60 800
P10
B
T
Technical data D675K – ISO 4401-10/NG32
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 217
Spool A
≈ zero overlap, linear characteristic curve
Spool D 10 % positive overlap, linear characteristic curve
Spool V 20 % positive overlap, kinked characteristic curve
Spool Y
≈ zero overlap, kinked characteristic curve
P15 type: standard spool rated flow 1500 l/min
Fig. 83: Valve D675K, flow-signal characteristic curve 1500 l/min
Flow Q [l/min]
Signal [%]
100
0
1600
1400
1200
1000
400
200
800
600
20 40 60 800
P15
B
T
Technical data D675K – ISO 4401-10/NG32
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 218
Step response for D675K
valves with direct-
operated pilot valve
D633K, standard, stub
shaft spool K10
Fig. 84: Step response for D675K valves, standard, stub shaft spool K10
Step response for D675K
valves with direct-
operated pilot valve
D633K, standard, stub
shaft spool K10
Fig. 85: Frequency response for D675K valves, standard, stub shaft spool K10
Spool stroke [%]
Time [ms]
0 20 40 60 80 100
-10
0
25
50
75
100
140 bar
70 bar
Amplitude ratio [dB]
Frequency [Hz]
Phase lag [degrees]
1 10 100
-9
-120
-6
-90
-3
-60
0
-30
3
0
90%
25%
5%
Technical data D675K – ISO 4401-10/NG32
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 219
Step response for D675K
valves with direct-
operated pilot valve
D633K, trimmed, stub
shaft spool K10
Fig. 86: Step response for D675K valves, trimmed, stub shaft spool K10
Frequency response for
D675K valves with direct-
operated pilot valve
D633K, trimmed, stub
shaft spool K10
Fig. 87: Frequency response for D675K valves, trimmed, stub shaft spool K10
Spool stroke [%]
Time [ms]
0 20 40 60 80 100
-10
0
25
50
75
100
140 bar
70 bar
Amplitude ratio [dB]
Frequency [Hz]
Phase lag [degrees]
1 10 100
-9
-120
-6
-90
-3
-60
0
-30
3
0
90%
25%
5%
5%
Technical data D675K – ISO 4401-10/NG32
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 220
Step response for D675K
valves with direct-
operated pilot valve
D633K, standard, stub
shaft spool K15
Fig. 88: Step response for D675K valves, standard, stub shaft spool K15
Frequency response for
D675K valves with direct-
operated pilot valve
D633K, standard, stub
shaft spool K15
Fig. 89: Frequency response for D675K valves, standard, stub shaft spool K15
Spool stroke [%]
Time [ms]
0 20 40 60 80 100
-10
0
25
50
75
100
140 bar
70 bar
Amplitude ratio [dB]
Frequency [Hz]
Phase lag [degrees]
1 10 100
-9
-120
-6
-90
-3
-60
0
-30
3
0
90%
25%
5%
Technical data D675K – ISO 4401-10/NG32
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 221
Step response for D675K
valves with direct-
operated pilot valve
D633K, trimmed, stub
shaft spool K15
Fig. 90: Step response for D675K valves, trimmed, stub shaft spool K15
Frequency response for
D675K valves with direct-
operated pilot valve
D633K, trimmed, stub
shaft spool K15
Fig. 91: Frequency response for D675K valves, trimmed, stub shaft spool K15
Spool stroke [%]
Time [ms]
0 20 40 60 80 100
-10
0
25
50
75
100
140 bar
70 bar
Amplitude ratio [dB]
Frequency [Hz]
Phase lag [degrees]
1 10 100
-9
-120
-6
-90
-3
-60
0
-30
3
0
90%
25%
5%
12 Accessories, Spare Parts, and Tools Accessories for valves in the D67XK series
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 222
12 Accessories, Spare Parts, and Tools
12.1 Accessories for valves in the D67XK
series
CAUTION
Danger of personal and property damage due to defective
accessories and defective spare parts!
Unsuitable or defective accessories or unsuitable or defective
spare parts may cause damage, malfunctions or failure of the
valve or the machine.
f Use only original accessories and original spare parts.
f Ö Chap. "12 Accessories, Spare Parts, and Tools",
page 222
f Warranty and liability claims for personal injury and damage
to property are among other things excluded if they are
caused by the use of unsuitable or defective accessories or
unsuitable or defective spare parts.
f Ö Chap. "1.8 Warranty and liability", page 11
The accessories are Not included in scope of delivery
Ö Chap. "5.2 Scope of delivery of the valve", page 54
Cables of the connection cable that are not used must be insulated
or insulated and placed in the control cabinet.
Item designation
Number
required Comments Item number
Item name: Adapter cable M8-M12, 2 m
(not approved for hazardous areas)
1 CA40934-001
USB start-up module
(for service connector X10)
not approved for use in hazardous areas
1
C43094-001
Configuration/start-up cable, 2 m not approved for
hazardous areas
1 TD3999-137
SELV/PELV power pack (24 V DC, 10 A)
not approved for hazardous areas
1 D137-003-001
Power supply cord, 2 m (not approved for hazardous
areas)
1 B95924-002
Configuration / commissioning software
(Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software)
1 B99104
Present documentation
User manual type series D67XK, German 1 CDS29588-002
User manual type series D67XK, English 1 CDS29588-en
M8-M12 adapter cable 1 CA40934-001
Mating connector X1 1 Without cable, plug exlink, Fa. CEAG CB22154-001
Mating connector X2 1 Without cable, plug exlink, Fa. CEAG CB22150-001
Mating connector X5, X6, X7 3 Without cable, plug exlink, Fa. CEAG CB22148-001
Mating connector CAN X3, X4 2 Without cable, plug exlink, Fa. CEAG CB22142-001
Mating connector Profibus X3, X4 2 Without cable, plug exlink, Fa. CEAG CB22145-001
Mating connector Ethercat X3, X4 2 Without cable, plug exlink, Fa. CEAG CB22152-001
Tab. 41: Accessories and tools for all proportional valves in the D67XK series (part 1 of 2)
12 Accessories, Spare Parts, and Tools Accessories for valves in the D67XK series
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 223
Connection cable X1 1 Mud-resistant cable with plug exlink,
Fa. CEAG, cable length 20 m
CB22155-001
Connection cable X2 1 Mud-resistant cable with plug exlink,
Fa. CEAG, cable length 20 m
CB22151-001
Connection cable CAN X3, X4 2 Mud-resistant cable with plug exlink,
Fa. CEAG, cable length 20 m
CB22346-001
Connection cable CAN X3, X4 1 Mud-resistant cable with plug exlink,
Fa. CEAG, cable length 20 m
With integrated terminal resistor - this cable
can only be used to connect the last valve
in the fieldbus chain
CB22144-001
Connection cable CAN X3, X4 2 Mud-resistant cable with plug exlink,
Fa. CEAG, cable length 20 m
This cable must be used if 24 V supply
should be looped over the CAN bus. The
terminal resistor must be effected externally
CB22143-001
Connection cable Profibus X3, X4 2 Mud-resistant cable with plug exlink,
Fa. CEAG, cable length 20 m
CB22146-001
Connection cable Profibus X3, X4 1 Mud-resistant cable with plug exlink,
Fa. CEAG, cable length 20 m
With integrated terminal resistor - this cable
can only be used to connect the last valve
in the fieldbus chain
CB22147-001
Connection cable Ethercat X3, X4 2 Mud-resistant cable with plug exlink,
Fa. CEAG, cable length 20 m
CB22153-001
Connection cable X5, X6, X7 3 Mud-resistant cable with plug exlink,
Fa. CEAG, cable length 20 m
CB22149-001
Connection cable pilot valve 1 Available optionally a pluggable cable with
plug exlink, Fa. CEAG instead of the fixed
cabling
This option must be specified when
the valve is ordered
CB22861-001
Available documents
User manual D67xK series, German 1 CDS29588-de
User manual D67xK series, English 1 CDS29588-en
Supplemental documents
Manual: Moog Valve and Pump Configuration
Software, German
1 on request
Manual: Moog Valve and Pump Configuration
Software, English
1 on request
TN 494 1 Permissible lengths for electrical connec-
tion lines from valves with integrated elec-
tronics
CA48851
TN 353 1 Potential equalization and protective
grounding for hydraulic valves with inte-
grated electronics
CA58437
TN 502 1 Valves with EtherCAT interface CA566678
User manual for Digital Interface Valves with
EtherCAT Interface
1 Valves with EtherCAT interface CDS33722-en
Firmware B9926-DV013-B-211
Documents can be found and downloaded by specifying the item number:
German-language documents a http://www.moog.de/german/about-moog-inc/industrial-group-literature-library/
English-language documents at http://www.moog.com/industrial/literature
Item designation
Number
required Comments Item number
Tab. 41: Accessories and tools for all proportional valves in the D67XK series (part 2 of 2)
12 Accessories, Spare Parts, and Tools Tools for valves in the D67XK series
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 224
12.2 Tools for valves in the D67XK series
Item designation Comments Item number
Tools for the mating connectors of the connec-
tors
Crimping tool for mating connector see operating
instructions
eX-Link, CEAG
Tab. 42: Spare parts for valves in the D67XK series
12 Accessories, Spare Parts, and Tools NG-dependent accessories and spare parts
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 225
12.3 NG-dependent accessories and spare
parts
12.3.1 Proportional valves in the D671K series
The accessories are Not included in scope of delivery
Ö Chap. "5.2 Scope of delivery of the valve", page 54
Item designation
Number
required Comments Item number
Flushing plates
for ports P, A, B, T, T1, X, Y 1 B67728001
for ports P, T, T1 and X, Y 1 B67728-002
for ports P, T, T1, X, Y 1 B67728-003
Connecting plates
Service sealing set lower level NBR 85 Shore
FKM 85 Shore
B97215-N681-10
B97215-V681-10
Contains following O-rings:
for ports A, B, P, T1 and X 6 ID 12.4 x dia. 1.8
[mm] (0.49 x 0.07 in)
NBR 85 Shore
FKM 85 Shore
-45122-004
-42082-004
for port Y 1 ID 15.6 x dia. 1.8
[mm] (0.61 x 0.07 in)
NBR 85 Shore
FKM 85 Shore
-45122-011
-42082-011
Service sealing set pilot valve or fail-safe
valve
1
1
Set
Set
NBR 85 Shore
FKM 85 Shore
B97215-N630F63
B97215-V630F63
Attachment screws 4 M6x40 EN ISO 4762 10.9
Tightening torque: 11 Nm (8 lbf ft) ± 10 %
A03665--060--040
Tab. 43: Spare parts and accessories in the D671K series with direct-operated pilot valve D633K
12 Accessories, Spare Parts, and Tools NG-dependent accessories and spare parts
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 226
12.3.2 Proportional valves in the D672K series
12.3.3 Proportional valves in the D673K and D674K
series
Item designation
Number
required Comments Item number
Flushing plate -76741
Connecting plate B97138-001
Attachment screws
attachment screws 4 M10x60 EN ISO 4762 10.9
Tightening torque: 54 Nm (40 lbf ft) ± 10 %
A03665-100-060
attachment screws 2 M6x55 EN ISO 4762 10.9
Tightening torque: 11 Nm (8 lbf ft) ± 10 %
A03665-060-055
Service sealing set lower level NBR 85 Shore
FKM 85 Shore
B97215-N6X2-16
B97215-V6X2-16
Contains following O-rings:
for ports A, B, P and T 4 ID 21.89 x dia. 2.6
[mm] (0.86 x 0.07 in)
NBR 85 Shore
FKM 85 Shore
-45122-129
-42082-129
for ports X and Y 2 ID 10.82 x dia. 1.8
[mm] (0.43 x 0.07 in)
NBR 85 Shore
FKM 85 Shore
-45122-022
-42082-022
Service sealing set pilot valve
or fail-safe valve
1
1
Set
Set
NBR 85 Shore
FKM 85 Shore
B97215-N630F63
B97215-V630F63
Tab. 44: Spare parts and accessories in the D672K series with direct-operated pilot valve D633K
Item designation
Number
required Comments Item number
Flushing plate -76047-001
Connecting plate A25855-009
attachment screws 6 M12x75 EN ISO 4762 10.9
Tightening torque: 94 Nm (69 lbf ft) ± 10 %
A03665-120-075
Service sealing set lower stage NBR 85 Shore
FKM 85 Shore
B97215-N6X4-25
B97215-V6X4-25
Contains following O-rings:
for ports A, B, P and T 4 ID 34.60 x dia. 2.6
[mm] (1.36 x 0.10 in)
NBR 85 Shore
FKM 85 Shore
-45122-113
-42082-113
for ports X and Y 2 ID 20.92 x dia. 2.6
[mm] (0.82 x 0.10 in)
NBR 85 Shore
FKM 85 Shore
-45122-195
-42082-195
Service sealing set pilot valve
or fail-safe valve
1
1
Set
Set
NBR 85 Shore
FKM 85 Shore
B97215-N630F63
B97215-V630F63
Tab. 45: Spare parts and accessories in the D673K and D674K series with direct-operated pilot valve D633K
12 Accessories, Spare Parts, and Tools NG-dependent accessories and spare parts
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 227
12.3.4 Proportional valves in the D675K series
Item designation
Number
required Comments Item number
Flushing plate not available
Connecting plate A25855-001
attachment screws 6 M20x90 EN ISO 4762 10.9
Tightening torque:
460 Nm (339 lbf ft) ± 10 %
A03665-200-090
Service sealing set lower stage HNBR 85 Shore
FKM 85 Shore
B97215-S6X5-32
B97215-K6X5-32
Contains following O-rings:
for ports A, B, P and T 4 ID 53.60 x dia. 3.5
[mm] (2.11 x 0.14 in)
HNBR 85 Shore
FKM 85 Shore
B97217-227H
B97217-227V
for ports X and Y 2 ID 14.00 x dia. 1.8
[mm] (0.55 x 0.07 in)
HNBR 85 Shore
FKM 85 Shore
B97217-015H
B97217-015V
Service sealing set pilot valve
or fail-safe valve
1
1
Set
Set
NBR 85 Shore
FKM 85 Shore
B97215-N630F63
B97215-V630F63
Service sealing set fail-safe adapter plate
1
1
Set
Set
NBR 85 Shore
FKM 85 Shore
B97215-N681-10
B97215-V681-10
Tab. 46: Spare parts and accessories in the D675K series with direct-operated pilot valve D633K
13 Ordering Information
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 228
13 Ordering Information
M
odel no. (specified by the factory)
Specification status
Model variant
Explosion-proof
model
Variant
1 Spool model Series
P Standard spool D671K to D674K
K Stub shaft spool D675K
B Standard spool (5-way) D671K (with P
1
connection)
Type designation
D671 - D675
X
. . . . -
K
. ......
2 34561
2 Rated flow
B 70 bar
H 280 bar
K 350 bar
(at ∆ p = 5 bar per control edge) Series
3
0 30 D671K
6
0 60 D671K
8
0 80 D671K
0
1 150 D672K
0
2 250 D672K
0
3 350 D673K
0
5 550 D674K
10 1000 D675K
15 1500 D675K
3 Maximum operating pressure
With internal control connection X, the max. operating pressure corresponds to the max. pilot pressure.
The valve electronics are adapted to the control pressure.
4 Spool model
A 4-way: ~ Zero overlap, linear characteristic curve
D 4-way: 10 % positive overlap, linear characteristic curve
R 4-way: 10 % positive overlap, broken characteristic curve
Q 5-way: P → A, P
1
→ B, A → T, 5 % positive overlap, linear characteristic curve (only D671-B)
Y 4-way: ~ Zero overlap, kinked characteristic curve
Z 2x2-way: A → T, B → T
1
: (D671)
P → B, T → A: only X and Y external (D672 to D675)
Others on request.
6 Fail-safe function
M Middle position
F P → B, A → T
D P → A, B → T
K Middle position
H P → B, A → T
Others on request.
5 Pilot valve
R Direct-operated pilot valve D633K, replaceable cable with exlink plugs
S Direct-operated pilot valve D633K, fixed cabling with ex-proof cable glands, not replaceable D671K ... D675K
D671K ... D675K
13 Ordering Information
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 229
. .....
15
. .
1689107
-..2
12 13 1411
10 Signals for 100% spool stroke
Input signal Measurement output
D ±10 V 2 to 10 V
E 4 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA
M ±10 V 4 to 20 mA
X ±10 mA
9 Field bus
Y Others on request.
4 to 20 mA
Field bus
13 Enable function
When the enable signal is deactivated the spool takes up a settable controlled neutral position.
B When the enable signal is deactivated the spool takes up the defined end position A → T and B → T.
K When the enable signal is deactivated the spool takes up a settable controlled neutral position.
L When the enable signal is deactivated the spool takes up the defined end position A → T and B → T.
A
Others on request.
14 Fieldbus connectors X3, X4
15 Specified by the factory
16 Specified by the factory
CAN
H Profibus DP
J EtherCAT
O Without fieldbus interface
G
7 Control type Limitations for the selection: see hydraulic symbols
Intake X Outlet Y
4 internal internal
5 external internal
6 external external
7 internal external
8 Sealing material Series
V
H
A
FKM
HNBR
T-ECOPUR (-40° C)
D671K to D675K
D671K to D675K
B
S
FKM44 (-40° C)
Edge seal HNBR
Others on request.
D671K to D675K
D675K
D671K to D674K
9 Valve connector X1
J 7-pole
11 Electrical supply
2 24 V DC
14 Keyword index A…A
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 230
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
14 Keyword index
β
x
: filter fineness
required filter fineness for filling filter for filling the hydraulic
system • 132
∆p: pressure difference
pressure difference ∆p• 50
∆p
N
: rated pressure difference
rated pressure difference ∆p
N
• 50
2/2-way seat valve • 27
connector X9 in the block diagram of the valve/pump
electronics • 66
A
A/D
A/D converter in the block diagram of the valve electronics •
20
Abbreviations
list of abbreviations • 247
A/D (analog-digital converter)
ACV (Axis Control Valve, valve with axis control
functionality)
CAN (Controller Area Network)
CiA (CAN in Automation e. V.)
D/A (digital-analog converter)
DDV (Direct Drive Valve)
DIN (Deutsches Institut für Normung e. V.)
DSP (Draft Standard Proposal)
EMC (electromagnetic compatibility)
EN (European standard)
ESD (Electrostatic Discharge)
EU (European Union)
FKM (fluorocarbon rubber, material for gaskets, such as
O-rings)
GND (Ground)
HNBR (Hydrogenated Nitrile Butadiene Rubber, material for
gaskets, such as O-rings)
ID (Identifier)
ID (Inner Diameter, e.g. of O-rings)
IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission)
IP (International Protection)
ISM (industrial, scientific and medical, e.g. for ISM devices)
ISO (International Organization for Standardization)
LED (Light Emitting Diode)
LSS (Layer Setting Services)
LVDT (Linear Variable Differential Transformer)
NBR (Nitrile Butadiene Rubber, material for gaskets, such
as O-rings)
NG (nominal size of the valve)
PC (Personal Computer)
PE (Protective Earth)
PELV (Protective Extra Low Voltage)
PID (Proportional Integral Differential, e. g. in PID controller)
PWM (Pulse Width Modulation)
SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage)
SW (Width Across Flats for wrenches)
TN (Technical Note)
TÜV (Technischer Überwachungsverein)
USB (Universal Serial Bus)
UV (Ultraviolet)
VDE (Verband der Elektrotechnik Elektronik
Informationstechnik e. V.)
VDI (Verein Deutscher Ingenieure e. V.)
Accessories, ordering information D67X • 222
acoustic emissions • 9
Acronyms • 247
Activation • 23, 39
ACV
transducer connectors X2, X5…X7
in the block diagram of the valve electronics • 20
Adapter for service connector X10 • 130
Air humidity, permissible relative air humidity for storage
D671 series • 166
D672 series • 177
D673 series • 188
D674 series • 199
D675 series • 210
Allocation of interfaces to connectors • 68
14 Keyword index B…C
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 231
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
Ambient conditions
permissible ambient conditions
D671 series • 166
D672 series • 177
D673 series • 188
D674 series • 199
D675 series • 210
potentially explosive environment • 152
Ambient temperature, permissible ambient temperature
D671 series • 166
D672 series • 177
D673 series • 188
D674 series • 199
D675 series • 210
Armature of the linear force motor, in the representative
depiction • 19
attachment screws
Order information D671 • 225
Order information D672 • 226
Order information D673, D674 • 226
Order information D675 • 227
Attachment screws for the shipping plate • 59
Tightening torque (removal) • 145
width across flats • 58, 143
attachment screws for the shipping plate (removal) • 145
B
Block diagram of the valve/pump electronics • 66
Block diagrams
flow control (Q-control) • 33
valve electronics • 20
C
C
typ
typical capacitance • 98
Cables
cable length in CAN networks • 109
cable length in Profibus-DP networks • 112
cable routing inside machines • 97
calculation
maximum length • 99
typical capacitance C
typ
• 98
typical resistance R
typ
• 98
voltage drop per unit length • 99
dimensioning • 98
permissible lengths • 98–102
pin assignment of the cables for EtherCAT networks • 115
requirements • 94
suitable cables for
CAN networks • 109
EtherCAT networks • 115
Profibus-DP networks • 113
CAN
CAN bus interface • 48
CAN bus
general information • 77
pin assignment • 78
Technical data • 77
CAN (Controller Area Network)
literature, additional, CAN fundamentals • 250
CAN networks
cable cross section • 109
cable length • 109
interference immunity • 107
module address • 110
number of bus nodes • 110
suitable cables • 109
transmission rate • 110
Wiring • 106–110
Procedure • 106
wiring diagram • 107
Cavitation • 50
CE labeling of the M3000
®
modules • A
Centering springs of the linear force motor
in the representative depiction • 19
Characteristic curves
flow diagram
D671 series • 49
D672 series • 49
D673 series • 49
D674 series • 49
D675 series • 49
flow signal characteristic curve • 38
D671 series • 172
D672 series • 183, 194
D674 series • 205
D675 series • 216–217
hydraulic zero • 38
CiA
Quoted CiA standards • 163
Cleaning
disposal of auxiliary materials and substances used • 9
cleaning
cleaning connecting and mounting surfaces • 60
Cleanliness level of the hydraulic fluid • 133
D671 series • 166
D672 series • 177
D673 series • 188
D674 series • 199
D675 series • 210
Clock pulse output (signal of SSI transducer) • 76
Command signal U
Command
of input voltage • 103
Command signals for 100% spool stroke in the type
designation • 161
Command signals, single-ended • 103
configuration of the valves • 47
configuration via the fieldbus interface • 128
configuration via the service interface • 130
factory setting of the valves • 131
Configuration/start-up cable • 130
Ordering information D67X • 222
Connecting plates • 225, 227
Order information D672 • 226
Order information D673, D674 • 226
Connecting surface
cleaning • 60
troubleshooting in event of a leak • 147
Connection of the valve
connection to the hydraulic system • 56, 59–60
hydraulic connection • 56, 59–60
14 Keyword index D…E
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 232
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
Connector
Connector X1 • 23, 39
in the block diagram of the valve electronics • 20
in the connector overview • 67
Fieldbus connectors X3 and X4 • 23–24
dust protection caps • 124
in the block diagram of the valve electronics • 20
fieldbus connectors X3 and X4
in the connector overview • 67
overview (arrangement of connectors on the valve
electronics housing) • 67
service connector X10 • 23–24
adapter • 130
dust protection cap • 124
in the block diagram of the valve electronics • 20
in the connector overview • 67
transducer connectors X2, X5…X7
in the block diagram of the valve electronics • 20
X1 (connector)
in the block diagram of the valve/pump electronics • 66
pin assignment • 69
X2 (digital signal interface)
in the block diagram of the valve/pump electronics • 66
X3 and X4 (fieldbus connectors)
in the block diagram of the valve/pump electronics • 66
X5…X7 (analog input connectors)
in the block diagram of the valve/pump electronics • 66
X8 (external LVDT connector)
in the block diagram of the valve/pump electronics • 66
X9 (2/2-way seat valve connector)
in the block diagram of the valve/pump electronics • 66
X10 (service connector)
in the block diagram of the valve/pump electronics • 66
X11 (pilot valve connector)
in the block diagram of the valve/pump electronics • 66
Connector X1 • 69
Connector overview, arrangement of connectors on the valve
electronics housing • 67
Connector X1 • 23, 39
in the block diagram of the valve electronics • 20
in the connector overview • 67
Connector X10
in the block diagram of the valve/pump electronics • 66
pin assignment • 86
Connector X11 • 86
in the block diagram of the valve/pump electronics • 66
pin assignment • 86
Control loops
troubleshooting in event of instabilities
instability of the external control loop • 149
instability of the internal valve control loops • 149
Control ports A and B
diameter
D671 series • 165
D672 series • 176
D673 series • 187
D674 series • 198
D675 series • 209
position in the holes in the mounting surface
D671 series • 165
D672 series • 176
D673 series • 187
D674 series • 198
D675 series • 209
Control type hydraulic intake/drain in the type designation •
160
Conversion of actual value output signals I
out
(4–20 mA)
into 2–10 V • 104
copyright
for this manual • A
Current command signal I
Command
• 103
Cutaway drawings
Two-stage proportional valve • 18
Cutaway views
linear force motor • 19
Two-stage proportional valve • 18
D
D/A
D/A converter in the block diagram of the valve electronics •
20
Data matrix code
example • 163
on the nameplate • 154–155
structure of the data matrix code • 163
Date of manufacture on the nameplate • 154–155
diesel effect • 133
Digit • 158
dimensions
D671 series
With pilot valve D633 • 168, 170
D672 series
With pilot valve D633 • 179, 181
D673 series
With pilot valve D633 • 190, 192
D674 series
With pilot valve D633 • 201, 203
D675 series
With pilot valve D633 • 212, 214
Directives, overview of quoted directives • 253
disposal • 9
Documents, supplemental • 5
catalog • 5
technical notes (TNs) • 5
Documents, supplementing
ordering information • 223
Ordering information D67X • 222
dust protection caps
for fieldbus connectors X3 and X4 • 124
for service connector X10 • 124
Duty cycle
D671 series • 167
D672 series • 178
D673 series • 189
D674 series • 200
D675 series • 211
E
Electrical data
D671 series • 167
D672 series • 178
D673 series • 189
D674 series • 200
D675 series • 211
14 Keyword index F…F
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 233
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
Electrical shielding • 90–97
electrical shielding • 94
connecting the shield • 95
connection with cable leadthrough • 95
connection with plug connection • 96
insulated shielding • 97
requirement of cable routing • 97
requirement of lines • 94
Embrittlement of gaskets • 146
embrittlement of gaskets • 55
EMC
EMC protection requirements for immunity to interference
and emitted interference
D671 series • 167
D672 series • 178
D673 series • 189
D674 series • 200
D675 series • 211
Technical data • 163
EMC standards • 163
D671 series • 167
D672 series • 178
D673 series • 189
D674 series • 200
D675 series • 211
requirements during start-up • 120
EMC (Electromagnetic compatibility)
EMC Directive • 253
Emitted interference
D671 series • 167
D672 series • 178
D673 series • 189
D674 series • 200
D675 series • 211
Technical data • 163
Environmental protection
acoustic emissions • 9
disposal • 9
equipotential bonding
deficient equipotential bonding • 94
electrical shielding • 94
ground loops • 93
insulated shielding in the event of deficient equipotential
bonding • 97
maximum potential difference (7 V) • 92
of machines • 91
performance • 92
protective conductor • 92
cross section • 92
Equipotential bonding system, electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC) • 163
ESD
• 16
EtherCAT
general information • 80
literature, additional, EtherCAT fundamentals • 250
maximum number of bus nodes • 81
module address • 116
auto-increment addressing • 116
fixed node addressing • 116
pin assignment of the cables for EtherCAT networks • 115
pin assignment, connector X3 • 82
suitable cables for EtherCAT networks • 115
Technical data • 81
transmission rate • 116
wiring diagram, EtherCAT networks • 115
wiring EtherCAT networks • 114–116
Procedure • 114
EU (European Union)
Evenness, required for mounting surface • 57
Exclusion of liability • 11
Exclusion of warranty • 11
External LVDT connector X8
in the block diagram of the valve/pump electronics • 66
F
f
l
limit frequency • 101
factory setting of the valves • 131
Fail-safe events • 28
control commands • 30
drop in the pilot pressure p
X
• 29
failure of the supply voltage • 29
restarting the valve after the occurrence of a fail-safe event •
31
settable fault reaction • 30
signals at the enable input • 29
Fail-safe functions • 25
electrical fail-safe function • 28
hydraulic symbols • 35–36
mechanical fail-safe functions • 26
Valves with mechanical fail-safe function M • 26
valves with mechanical fail-safe function M
hydraulic symbols • 35
Valves with mechanical fail-safe function F and D • 26
valves with mechanical fail-safe function F and D
hydraulic symbols • 36
Fail-safe states
electrical fail-safe state • 25, 28
mechanical fail-safe state • 25, 27
Mechanical fail-safe state in the type designation • 159
fail-safe valves • 27
2/2-way seat valve • 27
hydraulic symbol • 35
Fail-safe variant, in the type designation • 159
Fieldbus
connection of the valve/pump
Safety instructions • 62
Fieldbus connectors X3 and X4 • 23–24
dust protection caps • 124
in the block diagram of the valve electronics • 20
fieldbus connectors X3 and X4
in the connector overview • 67
Fieldbus connectors X3 and X4 in the type designation • 162
14 Keyword index F…F
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 234
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
Fieldbus connectors X3 and X4
CAN bus connectors • 78
EtherCAT connectors • 82
general information • 77
in the block diagram of the valve/pump electronics • 66
Profibus-DP connectors • 80
versions of the connectors • 77
Fieldbus interface • 22
configuration of the valves via the fieldbus interface • 128
in the block diagram of the valve electronics • 20
filling filter for filling the hydraulic system
required filter fineness β
x
• 132
Filling the hydraulic system • 132
filter element
in the representative depiction of the valve • 18
Filter fineness β
x
filling filter for filling the hydraulic system • 132
Filter, filling filter for filling the hydraulic system
required filter fineness • 132
FKM
D671 series • 225
D672 series • 226
D673, D674 series • 226
D675 series • 227
Flow control (Q-control)
troubleshooting in event of instability of the internal valve
control loop • 149
flow control (Q-control) • 33
block diagram • 33
flow diagram
D671 series • 49
D672 series • 49
D673 series • 49
D674 series • 49
D675 series • 49
flow signal characteristic curve • 38
D671 series • 172
D672 series • 183, 194
D674 series • 205
D675 series • 217
hydraulic zero • 38
Flow speed • 50
Flow Q
flow signal characteristic curve • 38
D671 series • 172
D672 series • 183
D673 series • 194
D674 series • 205
D675 series • 216–217
formula for calculation • 50
leakage flow Q
L
D671 series • 166
D672 series • 177
D673 series • 188
D674 series • 199
D675 series • 210
maximum flow Q
max
D671 series • 49, 166
D672 series • 49, 177
D673 series • 49, 188
D674 series • 49, 199
D675 series • 49, 210
rated flow Q
N
D671 series • 166
D672 series • 177
D673 series • 188
D674 series • 199
D675 series • 210
Nameplate • 157
Flushing plate
Order information D671 • 225
Order information D672 • 226
Order information D673, D674 • 226
Order information D675 • 227
using when flushing the hydraulic system • 132
Formula for calculating the flow Q • 50
Formulae
approximation formula for calculating the pilot pressure p
X
•
17
formula for calculating the flow Q • 50
function
linear force motor • 19
Valves of the D67X series • 17
Fuse
D671 series • 167
D672 series • 178
D673 series • 189
D674 series • 200
D675 series • 211
Fuse protection, external fuse protection for each valve
D671 series • 167
D672 series • 178
D673 series • 189
D674 series • 200
D675 series • 211
14 Keyword index G…I
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 235
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
G
Gaskets
checking and replacing the O-rings
ports • 146
cleaning • 60
embrittlement • 55, 146
Order information D671 • 225
Order information D672 • 226
Order information D673, D674 • 226
Order information D675 • 227
Service sealing set, ordering information D671 • 225
Service sealing set, ordering information D672 • 226
Service sealing set, ordering information D673, D674 • 226
Service sealing set, ordering information D675 • 227
GND
ground contact of connector X1 • 69
Ground connection of connector X1 • 69
Ground contact (GND) of connector X1 • 69
Ground (electrical)
Ground contact (GND) of connector X1 • 69
single-ended command signals • 103
single-ended connection of the analog command inputs •
103
Ground (in kg)
D671 series • 166
D672 series • 177
D673 series • 188
D674 series • 199
D675 series • 210
Gumming of hydraulic fluid during long-term storage • 55
H
handling in accordance with safety requirements • 14, 61
Handling, in accordance with safety requirements • 14, 61
Hydraulic data
D671 series • 166
D672 series • 177
D673 series • 188
D674 series • 199
D675 series • 210
Hydraulic fluid
disposal • 9
hydraulic fluid
cleanliness level • 133
D671 series • 166
D672 series • 177
D673 series • 188
D674 series • 199
D675 series • 210
diesel effect • 133
gumming during long-term storage • 55
permissible fluids
D671 series • 166
D672 series • 177
D673 series • 188
D674 series • 199
D675 series • 210
permissible temperature range
D671 series • 166
D672 series • 177
D673 series • 188
D674 series • 199
D675 series • 210
permissible viscosity ν
D671 series • 166
D672 series • 177
D673 series • 188
D674 series • 199
D675 series • 210
required filter fineness β
x
for filling filter for filling the
hydraulic system • 132
Hydraulic symbols • 34–36
on the nameplate • 154–155
hydraulic symbols • 35
2-way operation • 34
2x2-way operation • 34
3-way operation • 36
4-way operation • 35
fail-safe function D • 36
fail-safe function F • 36
fail-safe functions M and W • 35
fail-safe valves • 35
Hydraulic system
connection of the valve to the hydraulic system • 56, 59
filling and flushing • 132
minimum flushing time • 133
required filter fineness for filling filter • 132
preparing • 132
Start-up • 133
start-up • 132–133
venting • 133
Hysteresis
D671 series • 167
D672 series • 178
D673 series • 189
D674 series • 200
D675 series • 211
I
I
Command
current command signal • 103
I
out
output current • 104
14 Keyword index L…L
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 236
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
I
Supply
supply current • 103
ID (Identifier)
ID (Inner Diameter, e.g. of O-rings)
IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission)
Immunity to interference
D671 series • 167
D672 series • 178
D673 series • 189
D674 series • 200
D675 series • 211
Technical data • 163
incremental transducer
power supply • 75
reversal point of signals • 105
speed variation of signals • 105
Index of figures • x
Index of Tables • viii
Initial start-up, safety instructions • 61
Input resistances at connectors X5…X7 • 85
Input voltage U
in
• 103
Inputs, analog command inputs
±10 mA floating • 42
±10 V floating • 42
4–20 mA floating • 44
current inputs
±10 mA floating • 42
4–20 mA floating • 44
flow control command inputs
±10 mA floating • 42
±10 V floating • 42
4–20 mA floating • 44
in the block diagram of the valve electronics • 20
signal type on the nameplate • 154–155
voltage inputs
±10 V floating • 42
Inputs, analog inputs
at connectors X5…X7
±10 V • 84
0–10 mA • 84
0–10 V • 84
4–20 mA • 85
benefits of the different signal types • 89
Connections • 74
in the block diagram of the valve/pump electronics • 66
maximum current for transducer supply • 117
on connector X1 • 69
±10 mA • 72
±10 V • 71
0–10 mA • 72
0–10 V • 71
4–20 mA • 73
overview of connections • 70
pin assignment X5…X7 • 83
power supply to the transducer • 83
signal types
at connectors X5…X7 • 84
evaluating the signal types • 89
on connector X1 • 71
single-ended connection • 103
Wiring • 117–119
2-wire transducer • 118
3-wire transducer • 118
4-wire transducer • 118
Connectors X5…X7 • 117–119
Inputs, command value input
signal type identification in the type designation • 41
Inputs, digital inputs
enable input • 23, 29,
46, 69
in the block diagram of the valve electronics • 20
in the block diagram of the valve/pump electronics • 66
signals at the enable input as fail-safe events • 29
on connector X1
enable input • 74
overview of connections • 74
Instability of the control loops, troubleshooting
instability of the internal valve control loops • 149
instability of the external control loop • 149
installation drawing
D671 series
With pilot valve D633 • 168, 170
D672 series
With pilot valve D633 • 179, 181
D673 series
With pilot valve D633 • 190, 192
D674 series
With pilot valve D633 • 201, 203
D675 series
With pilot valve D633 • 212, 214
Installation position
D671 series • 166
D672 series • 177
D673 series • 188
D674 series • 199
D675 series • 210
Installation screws
required quality class • 58
specification • 58
tightening torque • 58
width across flats • 58, 143
Intended operation • 5
IP
protection type
D671 series • 167
D672 series • 178
D673 series • 189
D674 series • 200
D675 series • 211
Item numbers
accessories • 222
L
l
max
maximum length of the supply cable • 99
Leak, troubleshooting
Connection surface of the valves • 147
linear force motor screw plug • 148
leakage flow Q
L
D671 series • 166
D672 series • 177
D673 series • 188
D674 series • 199
D675 series • 210
14 Keyword index M…N
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 237
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
Leakage port Y • 37
diameter
D671 series • 165
D672 series • 176
D673 series • 187
D674 series • 198
D675 series • 209
position in the holes in the mounting surface
D671 series • 165
D672 series • 176
D673 series • 187
D674 series • 198
D675 series • 209
LED
Status LEDs
in the block diagram of the valve/pump electronics • 66
status LEDs
in the block diagram of the valve electronics • 20
indication of operating state and network status • 138
Linear force motor
screw plug
troubleshooting in event of a leak • 148
linear force motor • 19
Armature • 19
Bearing • 19
Centering springs • 19
Coil • 19
Cross section • 19
Permanent magnets • 19
representative depiction • 19
screw plug • 19
Literature, additional
CAN fundamentals • 250
directives, quoted • 253
EtherCAT fundamentals • 250
Fundamentals of hydraulics • 249
Moog publications • 250
Profibus fundamentals • 250
standards, quoted • 250–253
supplemental documents • 5
Load impedance R
L
analog actual value outputs • 104
LSS
LSS address
example • 163
on the nameplate • 154–155
structure of the LSS address • 163
LVDT (position transducer)
in the block diagram of the valve electronics • 20
in the block diagram of the valve/pump electronics • 66
M
Machine controller, configuration of the valves • 128
Maintenance
O-ring checking and replacement
ports • 146
Maintenance (service) • 140
Manufacturer's declaration • 12
Microprocessor control
for storing the valve software parameters • 131
in the valve electronics • 20
microprocessor system
in the block diagram of the valve electronics • 20
Minimum flushing time for flushing the hydraulic system • 133
Mode of operation
linear force motor • 19
Valves of the D67X series • 17
Model number
on the nameplate • 154–155
structure of the model number • 156
Model number and type designation • 156
Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software • 48
operation • 122
ordering information D67X • 222
possible faults • 122
safety instructions • 65, 121–122
Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software,
configuration • 128
mounting • 56, 59
Installation position
D671 series • 166
D672 series • 177
D673 series • 188
D674 series • 199
D675 series • 210
mounting option
D671 series • 166
D672 series • 177
D673 series • 188
D674 series • 199
D675 series • 210
Procedure • 60
tools and materials required • 58
mounting option
D671 series • 166
D672 series • 177
D673 series • 188
D674 series • 199
D675 series • 210
Mounting surface
• 57
cleaning • 60
permissible average roughness R
a
• 57
required evenness • 57
N
ν:viscosity
permissible viscosity ν of the hydraulic fluid
D671 series • 166
D672 series • 177
D673 series • 188
D674 series • 199
D675 series • 210
Nameplate • 154–155
NBR
D671 series • 225
D672 series • 226
D673, D674 series • 226
D675 series • 227
14 Keyword index O…P
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 238
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
NG
Technical Data
D671 series • 166
D672 series • 177
D673 series • 188
D674 series • 199
D675 series • 210
Nominal size
D671 series • 166
D672 series • 177
D673 series • 188
D674 series • 199
D675 series • 210
Notes on user manual • 1
O
occupational safety and health
safe distances for cardiac pacemakers and similar devices
due to magnetic fields • 15
sound insulation measures • 15
Operating pressure in the type designation • 157
operating pressure p
P
maximum operating pressure
D671 series • 166
D672 series • 177
D673 series • 188
D674 series • 199
D675 series • 210
Maximum operating pressure on the nameplate • 154–155
Operation of the valves • 134–138
ambient conditions, permissible
D671 series • 166
D672 series • 177
D673 series • 188
D674 series • 199
D675 series • 210
intended operation • 5
necessary preparations • 137
Order numbers
accessories • 222
Ordering information D67X
accessories • 222
O-rings
checking and replacing the O-rings
ports • 146
cleaning • 60
embrittlement • 55, 146
Order information D671 • 225
Order information D673, D674 • 226
Order information D675 • 227
ordering information • 226
Service sealing set, ordering information D671 • 225
Service sealing set, ordering information D672 • 226
Service sealing set, ordering information D673, D674 • 226
Service sealing set, ordering information D675 • 227
Output current I
out
• 104
Output voltage U
out
• 104
Output, analog
spool position actual value output 4–20 mA • 46
Output, analog stroke position signal
4–20 mA (actual value output) • 46
Outputs, analog actual value output
in the block diagram of the valve electronics • 20
Outputs, analog actual value outputs
conversion of I
out
(4–20 mA) into 2–10 V • 104
Outputs, analog outputs
Connections • 74
in the block diagram of the valve/pump electronics • 66
on connector X1 • 69
2–10 V • 73
4–20 mA • 73
overview of connections • 70
Outputs, digital outputs
on connector X1
Valve standby • 74
overview of connections • 74
Outputs, spool position signal
signal type identification in the type designation • 41
overlap • 35, 38
zero overlap • 35, 38
P
Packaging
disposal • 9
storing original packaging • 53
Part numbers
accessories • 222
PC (Personal Computer)
PE
protective conductor contact of connector X1 • 69
PELV power pack
Ordering information D67X • 222
Permanent magnets of the linear force motor
in the representative depiction • 19
Pilot flow
D671 series • 166
D672 series • 177
D673 series • 188
D674 series • 199
D675 series • 210
Pilot identification in the type designation • 37
Pilot identification in the type designation • 37
Pilot pressure port X • 37
diameter
D671 series • 165
D672 series • 176
D673 series • 187
D674 series • 198
D675 series • 209
position in the holes in the mounting surface
D671 series • 165
D672 series • 176
D673 series • 187
D674 series • 198
D675 series • 209
14 Keyword index P…P
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 239
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
pilot pressure p
X
approximation formula for calculation • 17
D671 series • 166
D672 series • 177
D673 series • 188
D674 series • 199
D675 series • 210
drop in the pilot pressure as fail-safe event • 29
restarting afterwards • 31
on the nameplate • 154–155
Pilot valve connector X11
in the block diagram of the valve/pump electronics • 66
pin assignment • 86
Pilot valve D633
in the representative depiction of the valve • 18
Technical Data D671 • 166
Technical Data D672 • 177
Technical Data D675 • 210
Pilot valve in the type designation • 158
pin assignment
X1 (connector)
6+PE-pin • 69
X2 (digital signal interface)
SSI transducer • 76
X3 and X4 (fieldbus interface)
CAN bus • 78
EtherCAT • 82
Profibus-DP • 80
X5…X7 (analog input connectors) • 83
X10 (service connector) • 86
X11 (pilot valve connector) • 86
Ports
Diameter of ports
D671 series • 166
D672 series • 177
D673 series • 188
D674 series • 199
D675 series • 210
on the nameplate • 154–155
ports
O-ring checking and replacement • 146
troubleshooting in event of leaks • 147
Position transducer (LVDT)
in the block diagram of the valve electronics • 20
in the block diagram of the valve/pump electronics • 66
Potentially explosive environment • 152
Power supply
failure of the supply voltage • 29
restarting the valve afterwards • 31
Supply voltage
failure of the supply voltage • 29
in the block diagram of the valve electronics • 20
power supply
connection via connector X1 •
69
PELV power pack
Ordering information D67X • 222
Power supply
D671 series • 167
D672 series • 178
D673 series • 189
D674 series • 200
D675 series • 211
on the nameplate • 154–155
Power supply cord, order information D67X • 222
requirements of supply voltage • 70
SELV power pack
D671 series • 167
D672 series • 178
D673 series • 189
D674 series • 200
D675 series • 211
Power supply cord, order information D67X • 222
Pressure difference ∆p • 50
pressure limitation • 16–17, 125
Pressure port P
diameter
D671 series • 165
D672 series • 176
D673 series • 187
D674 series • 198
D675 series • 209
position in the holes in the mounting surface
D671 series • 165
D672 series • 176
D673 series • 187
D674 series • 198
D675 series • 209
Pressure transducer, internal
in the block diagram of the valve electronics • 20
Pressure p
operating pressure p
P
maximum operating pressure
D671 series • 166
D672 series • 177
D673 series • 188
D674 series • 199
D675 series • 210
Maximum operating pressure on the nameplate •
154–155
pilot pressure p
X
approximation formula for calculation • 17
D671 series • 166
D672 series • 177
D673 series • 188
D674 series • 199
D675 series • 210
drop in the pilot pressure • 29
restarting afterwards • 31
on the nameplate • 154–155
Procedure for electrically connecting valves/pumps • 89
Profibus
literature, additional, Profibus fundamentals • 250
Profibus-DP
maximum number of bus nodes • 79
pin assignment • 80
Technical data • 79
14 Keyword index Q…S
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 240
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
Profibus-DP interface
general information • 78
Profibus-DP networks
cable cross section • 112
cable length • 112
module address • 113
suitable cables • 113
transmission rate • 113
Wiring • 111–113
Procedure • 111
wiring diagram • 112
Prohibition to duplicate - user manual • A
Prohibition to reproduce - user manual • A
protection type
D671 series • 167
D672 series • 178
D673 series • 189
D674 series • 200
D675 series • 211
protective conductor
deficient equipotential bonding • 94
ground loops • 93
maximum potential difference (7 V) • 92
procedure for connecting • 92
required cross section • 92
Protective conductor contact PE of connector X1 • 69
Protective grounding • 90–97
of connector X1 • 69
of machines • 91
performance • 92
Protective grounding, electromagnetic compatibility
(EMC) • 163
Pulse width modulation (PWM)
in the block diagram of the valve electronics • 20
PWM (Pulse Width Modulation)
in the block diagram of the valve electronics • 20
Q
Q
max
maximum flow D671 • 166
maximum flow D672 • 177
maximum flow D673 • 188
maximum flow D674 • 199
maximum flow D675 • 210
Q
L
leakage flow
D671 series • 166
D672 series • 177
D673 series • 188
D674 series • 199
D675 series • 210
Q
N
Rated flow
D671 series • 166
D672 series • 177
D673 series • 188
D674 series • 199
D675 series • 210
Rated flow, type designation • 157
q
typ
typical cross section • 98
Qualification, requirements of the user • 7
Quality class, required for installation screws • 58
R
ρ
Cu
resistivity of copper • 98
R
L
load impedance R
L
of the analog actual value outputs • 104
R
typ
typical resistance • 98
R
a
average permissible roughness R
a
for mounting surface • 57
Rated flow in the type designation • 157
Rated flow Q
N
D671 series • 166
D672 series • 177
D673 series • 188
D674 series • 199
D675 series • 210
Nameplate • 157
Rated pressure difference ∆p
N
• 50
reference temperature of the valve electronics
D671 series • 166
D672 series • 177
D673 series • 188
D674 series • 199
D675 series • 210
Release date of the user manual • 2
Removal of the valves (service), procedure • 145
Removal (service) • 140
Removing • 145
Removing of the valves • 143
Repair (service) • 140, 150
Representative depictions
linear force motor • 19
Two-stage proportional valve with pilot valve D633 • 18
Responsibilities • 10
Responsibility of the manufacturer and the operator of the
machine • 10
restarting the valve • 31
Roughness R
a
, average, permissible for mounting surface • 57
S
Safe distances for cardiac pacemakers and similar devices due
to magnetic fields • 15
14 Keyword index S…S
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 241
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
Safety instructions
general safety instructions • 16
analog command inputs • 42, 44
attachment elements for the shipping plate • 59
attachment elements for the shipping plate (removal) • 145
cleaning the valve connecting surface, mounting surface
and O-rings • 60
configuration of the valves • 128
connection to the hydraulic system • 56, 59
delivery of repaired valves and replacement valves with
factory settings • 150
Design of the valve with respect to flow • 32
diesel effect • 133
disposal • 9
electrical and hydraulic zero positions • 38
electrical properties • 62
equipotential bonding • 63
ESD • 16
failure of the supply voltage • 29
flushing the hydraulic system • 132
handling in accordance with safety requirements • 14, 61
Holes in mounting surface
D671 series • 165
Holes in the mounting surface
D672 series • 176
D673 series • 187
D674 series • 198
D675 series • 209
hydraulic connection • 56, 59
Hydraulic fluid • 16, 56
hydraulic fluid • 123
diesel effect • 133
initial start-up • 61
connection to fieldbus • 62
installation •
14–15, 22, 62–63, 65–66, 90, 106, 110–111, 113–114
,
116, 121–122, 142, 222
Intended operation • 5
isolation from the mains system • 62
Leak on the linear motor screw plug (service) • 148
Linear force motor screw plug (service) • 148
maintenance •
14–15, 22, 62–63, 65–66, 90, 106, 110–111, 113–114,
116, 121–122, 142, 222
Maintenance (service) • 140
Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software •
65, 121–122
mounting • 56, 59
occupational safety and health • 15
safe distances for cardiac pacemakers and similar
devices due to magnetic fields • 15
sound insulation measures • 15
open connectors • 124
operation • 134
power pack • 62
pressure limitation • 16–17, 125
protective conductor system • 63
Removal (service) • 140, 145
repair •
14–15, 22, 62–63
, 65–66, 90, 106, 110–111, 113–114,
116, 121–122, 142, 222
Repair (service) • 140, 150
restarting the valve after the valve has adopted the fail-safe
state • 31
safety-critical applications • 25
selection and qualification of personnel • 7
service • 140
Service (service) • 140, 150
Shipping plate (removal) • 145
shutting down the valve • 138
sound insulation measures • 9
start-up • 123–125
structural modifications • 8
Supply voltage
failure of the supply voltage • 29
symbols, used • 3
Technical Data • 16
Technical data • 152
Troubleshooting "No hydraulic response by the valves" •
148
Troubleshooting (service) • 140, 148
troubleshootingSafety instructions
removing •
14–15, 22, 62–63, 65–66, 90, 106, 110–111, 113–1
14, 116
, 121–122, 142, 222
typographical conventions • 3
use, intended • 5
valve software • 47, 128
valve status 'NOT READY' • 21, 28, 30
zero positions, electrical and hydraulic • 38
safety notes, operation
configuration of the valves • 136
valve software • 136
Safety notes, service
Hydraulic fluid • 140
Safety-critical applications • 25
Scope of delivery • 54
Screw plug on the linear force motor
in the representative depiction • 19
troubleshooting in event of a leak • 148
Seal material in the type designation • 160
selection and qualification of personnel • 7
qualified users • 7
SELV power pack
D671 series • 167
D672 series • 178
D673 series • 189
D674 series • 200
D675 series • 211
SensorSup
supply voltage to the SSI transducer • 76
Serial number on the nameplate • 154–155
service • 140–151
Service connector X10, configuration of the valves • 130
Service connector X10
general information • 86
in the block diagram of the valve/pump electronics • 66
pin assignment • 86
service connector X10 • 23–24
adapter • 130
dust protection cap • 124
in the block diagram of the valve electronics • 20
in the connector overview • 67
Service interface • 22
configuration of the valves via the service interface • 130
in the block diagram of the valve electronics • 20
Service sealing set, ordering information D671 • 225
Service sealing set, ordering information D672 • 226
Service sealing set, ordering information D673, D674 • 226
Service sealing set, ordering information D675 • 227
14 Keyword index S…S
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 242
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
shipping plate • 52, 126
Attachment screws • 59
Tightening torque (removal) • 145
width across flats • 58
Attachment screws (removal) • 145
mounting • 145
removal • 60
Shock protection
D671 series • 166
D672 series • 177
D673 series • 188
D674 series • 199
D675 series • 210
shutting down the valve • 138
Signal cables
cable length • 102
calculation
limit frequency • 101
typical capacitance C
typ
• 98
typical resistance R
typ
• 98
dimensioning • 98
influence of capacitance per unit length • 101
influence of resistance • 101
limit frequency • 101
permissible lengths • 98–102
recommendations • 101
Signal interface, digital signal interface X2
in the block diagram of the valve/pump electronics • 66
SSI transducer • 76
Signal interfaces • 22–23
Signal type identification in the type designation • 41
Signal types for analog command inputs
on the nameplate • 154–155
Signal zero of connector X1 • 69
Signal, differential signal
evaluation • 89
Software
Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software • 48
ordering information D67X • 222
Moog Valve and Pump Configuration Software,
configuration • 128
valve software • 47
configuration of the valves • 47, 128
via the fieldbus interface • 128
via the service interface • 130
factory setting • 131
Microprocessor control • 20
for storing parameters • 131
sound insulation measures • 9, 15
Spool
defined spring-determined position of the spool in the
mechanical fail-safe state • 27
overlap • 35, 38
Step response time for 0–100 % spool stroke
D671 series • 167
D672 series • 178
D673 series • 189
D674 series • 200
D675 series • 211
zero overlap • 35, 38
zero position (electrical and hydraulic) • 38
Spool position based on enable signal in the type
designation • 162
Spool position controller
in the Q-control block diagram • 33
Spool type in the type designation • 156
Spool version in the type designation • 158
SSI transducer
cable break monitoring • 75
connection to valve/pump • 105
pin assignment • 76
power supply • 76
recommended cable types • 75
signals between valve/pump • 105
supported transducer types • 75
Wiring • 105
wiring diagram • 105
Standards
overview of quoted standards • 250–253
CiA DSP • 248, 250
DIN • 251
DINEN• 252
DINENISO• 253
IEC • 251
IEEE • 251
ISO • 253
ISO/DIS • 251
ISO/IEC • 251
overview of quoted standards • ??–251
Start-up
EMC requirements • 120
Hydraulic system • 133
hydraulic system • 132–133
restarting the valve • 31
valve • 123–131
Static and dynamic data
D671 series • 167
D672 series • 178
D673 series • 189
D674 series • 200
D675 series • 211
Step response time for 0–100 % spool stroke
D671 series • 167
D672 series • 178
D673 series • 189
D674 series • 200
D675 series • 211
Storage
storage location for user manual • 2
user manual • 2
storage • 52, 55
ambient conditions, permissible
D671 series • 166
D672 series • 177
D673 series • 188
D674 series • 199
D675 series • 210
embrittlement of gaskets • 55
gumming of hydraulic fluid • 55
original packaging • 53
Structural modifications • 8
styles/spelling, used • 3
Subject to change without notice - user manual • A, 2
Supplementing documents • 5
catalog • 5
technical notes (TNs) • 5
14 Keyword index T…T
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 243
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
Supply cables
calculation
maximum length • 99
typical capacitance C
typ
• 98
typical resistance R
typ
• 98
voltage drop per unit length • 99
dimensioning • 98
permissible lengths • 98–102
Supply current I
supply
• 103
supply voltage
in the block diagram of the valve/pump electronics • 66
Supply voltage in the type designation • 161
Supply zero of connector X1 • 69
Symbols
list of symbols • 247
β
x
(filter fineness)
∆p (pressure difference)
∆p
N
(rated pressure difference)
i
comm
(current command signal)
i
in
(input current)
i
out
(output current)
i
supply
(supply current)
l (length)
ν (viscosity)
P
max
(power consumption at maximum flow)
P
min
(power consumption for motor in neutral position)
p (pressure)
p
N
(rated pressure)
p
P
(operating pressure)
p
X
(pilot pressure)
Q (flow)
Q (flow rate of a pump)
Q
L
(leakage flow)
Q
max
(maximum flow)
Q
N
(rated flow)
R
a
(average roughness)
R
in
(input resistance)
r
L
(load impedance)
T (Temperature)
t (time)
U
cable
(voltage drop on the cable)
u
comm
(input voltage command signal)
u
in
(input voltage)
u
out
(output voltage)
V (volume)
symbols, used • 3
T
t (symbol for time)
Table of contents • ii
Tank port T
diameter
D671 series • 165
D672 series • 176
D673 series • 187
D674 series • 198
D675 series • 209
position in the holes in the mounting surface
D671 series • 165
D672 series • 176
D673 series • 187
D674 series • 198
D675 series • 209
Technical Data
D671 series
With pilot valve D633 • 166
D672 series
With pilot valve D633 • 177
D673 series
With pilot valve D633 • 188
D674 series
With pilot valve D633 • 199
D675 series
With pilot valve D633 • 210
General technical data D671 • 166
General technical data D672 • 177
General technical data D673 • 188
General technical data D674 • 199
General technical data D675 • 210
hydraulic data
D671 series • 166
D672 series • 177
D673 series • 188
D674 series • 199
D675 series • 210
Technical data
Overview • 152
Temperature T
permissible ambient temperature
D671 series • 166
D672 series • 177
D673 series • 188
D674 series • 199
D675 series • 210
permissible temperature range for hydraulic fluid
D671 series • 166
D672 series • 177
D673 series • 188
D674 series • 199
D675 series • 210
reference temperature of the valve electronics
D671 series • 166
D672 series • 177
D673 series • 188
D674 series • 199
D675 series • 210
Threshold
D671 series • 167
D672 series • 178
D673 series • 189
D674 series • 200
D675 series • 211
Throttle valve • 17
14 Keyword index U…V
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 244
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
Tightening torques
attachment screws for the shipping plate (removal) • 145
Installation screws • 58
TNs • 5
Tools
required for wiring valves/pumps • 88
transducer connectors X2, X5…X7
in the block diagram of the valve electronics • 20
Transducer interface
in the block diagram of the valve electronics • 20
transportation • 52
ambient conditions, permissible
D671 series • 166
D672 series • 177
D673 series • 188
D674 series • 199
D675 series • 210
transportation damage • 53
Troubleshooting • 147
overview of possible faults • 147
instabilities of the control loop
external control loop • 149
internal valve control loops • 149
instability of the external control loop • 149
leak at the linear force motor screw plug • 148
Leak at the valve connecting surface • 147
no hydraulic response by the valve • 148
Troubleshooting (service) • 140
TÜV (Technischer Überwachungsverein)
Type designation
Command signals for 100 % spool stroke • 161
Electrical supply • 161
fail-safe identification • 159
Fieldbus connectors X3 and X4 • 162
Gasket material • 160
Hydraulic intake/drain • 160
on the nameplate • 154–155
Operating pressure • 157
pilot identification • 37
Pilot valve • 158
Rated flow • 157
signal type identification • 41
Spool position based on enable signal • 162
Spool type • 156
Spool version • 158
Type designation (function key) • 156
Type designation, model number • 156
typographical conventions • 3
U
U
Cable
voltage drop on the cable • 103
U
Command
command signal of input voltage • 103
U
dr_max
maximum voltage drop on the cable • 99
U
min
minimum supply voltage • 99
U
out
output voltage • 104
U
in
input voltage • 103
USB start-up module • 130
Ordering information D67X • 222
use, intended • 5
User manual
ordering information • 223
Ordering manual D67X • 222
prohibition to duplicate • A
prohibition to reproduce • A
release date • 2
storage location • 2
styles/spelling, used • 3
subject to change without notice • A, 2
symbols, used • 3
typographical conventions • 3
version number • 2
User manual M3000
®
and MSC-R
copyright • A
duplication prohibition • A
reproduction prohibition • A
Users, qualified • 7
V
V (symbol for volume)
Valve configurations • 34–36
2-way operation • 34
2x2-way operation • 34
hydraulic symbols
2-way operation • 34
2x2-way operation • 34
3-way operation • 36
4-way operation • 35–36
Technical Data
D671 series • 166
D672 series • 177
D673 series • 188
D674 series • 199
D675 series • 210
Connectors X3 and X4
in the block diagram of the valve/pump electronics • 66
pin assignment • 78, 80, 82
wiring CAN networks • 106–110
cable length and cable cross section • 109
interference immunity • 107
Procedure • 106
wiring diagram • 107
wiring EtherCAT networks • 114–116
Procedure • 114
wiring diagram • 115
wiring Profibus-DP networks • 111–113
cable length and cable cross section • 112
Procedure • 111
wiring diagram • 112
Connectors X5…X7
in the block diagram of the valve/pump electronics • 66
pin assignment • 83
14 Keyword index W…X
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 245
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
Connector X1
in the block diagram of the valve/pump electronics • 66
pin assignment • 69
6+PE-pin connector • 69
versions • 69
Wiring
6+PE-pin connector • 102
11+PE-pin connector • 102
Connector X2
in the block diagram of the valve/pump electronics • 66
pin assignment • 76
wiring CAN networks • 106–110
cable length and cable cross section • 109
interference immunity • 107
Procedure • 106
wiring diagram • 107
wiring SSI transducers • 105
Connector X8
in the block diagram of the valve/pump electronics • 66
Connector X9
in the block diagram of the valve/pump electronics • 66
Valve connector
in the block diagram of the valve/pump electronics • 66
list of interfaces • 68
Valve design
D671 series • 166
D672 series • 177
D673 series • 188
D674 series • 199
D675 series • 210
valve electronics • 20
block diagram • 20
Microprocessor control • 20
for storing the valve software parameters • 131
reference temperature
D671 series • 166
D672 series • 177
D673 series • 188
D674 series • 199
D675 series • 210
valve software • 47
configuration of the valves • 47
via the fieldbus interface • 128
via the service interface • 130
factory setting of the valves • 131
Microprocessor control • 20
for storing the valve software parameters • 131
Valve status
'ACTIVE' • 21, 31–
32
'DISABLED' • 21, 28, 30, 32, 139
'FAULT DISABLED' • 21, 28, 30, 32
'FAULT HOLD' • 21, 25, 28, 30, 32
'HOLD' • 21, 25, 28, 30, 32
'INIT' • 21, 28, 30, 32, 139
'NOT READY' • 21, 28, 30
overview of the valve status • 21
Valve/pump electronics, block diagram • 66
VDE (Verband der Elektrotechnik Elektronik
Informationstechnik e. V.)
VDI (Verein Deutscher Ingenieure e. V.)
venting
Hydraulic system • 133
Version number of the user manual • 2
Vibration resistance
D671 series • 166
D672 series • 177
D673 series • 188
D674 series • 199
D675 series • 210
Viscosity ν of the hydraulic fluid
D671 series • 166
D672 series • 177
D673 series • 188
D674 series • 199
D675 series • 210
Voltage drop U
Cable
on the cable • 103
W
WAF
widths across flats
attachment screws for the shipping plate • 58, 143
Installation screws • 58, 143
widths across flats
attachment screws for the shipping plate • 58, 143
Installation screws • 58, 143
Wiring
tools and materials required • 88
X1
6+PE-pin connector • 102
11+PE-pin connector • 102
X2
CAN network • 106
SSI transducer • 105
X3 and X4
CAN network • 106
EtherCAT network • 114
Profibus-DP network • 111
X5…X7 • 117
2-wire transducer • 118
3-wire transducer • 118
4-wire transducer • 118
X
X: pilot pressure port • 37
diameter
D671 series • 165
D672 series • 176
D673 series • 187
D674 series • 198
D675 series • 209
position in the holes in the mounting surface
D671 series • 165
D672 series • 176
D673 series • 187
D674 series • 198
D675 series • 209
X: Ports
in the representative depiction of the valve • 18
14 Keyword index Y…Z
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 246
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
Y
Y: leakage port • 37
Z
zero overlap • 35, 38
Zero position of the spool
electrical zero position • 38
hydraulic zero position • 38
Zero shift
D671 series • 167
D672 series • 178
D673 series • 189
D674 series • 200
D675 series • 211
15 Appendix Abbreviations, symbols and identification letters
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 247
15 Appendix
15.1 Abbreviations, symbols and identification letters
Fig. Explanation
β
x
Symbol for filter fineness
∆p Symbol for pressure difference
∆p
N
Symbol for rated pressure difference
ν Symbol for viscosity
A Valve port (consumer port)
A Pin of the 6+PE-pin connector X1
A/D Analog-Digital converter
ACV Axis Control Valve (valve with axis control function)
B Valve port (consumer port)
B Pin of the 6+PE-pin connector X1
C Pin of the 6+PE-pin connector X1
CAN Controller Area Network
CANopen Standardized communication profile
CiA CAN in Automation e. V.
(International Manufacturers' and Users' Organization for CAN Users;
http://www.can-cia.org)
DDifferential (e. g.: in PID controller)
D Fail-safe function D of valve
D Pin of the 6+PE-pin connector X1
D/A Digital-Analog converter
DDV Direct Drive Valve
DIN Deutsches Institut für Normung e. V.
(German Institute for Standardization)(http://www.din.de)
DSP Draft Standard Proposal
E Pin of the 6+PE-pin connector X1
EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility
EN Europa-Norm (European standard)
ESD Electrostatic D
ischarge
EU European Union
F Fail-safe function F of valve
F Pin of the 6+PE-pin connector X1
F
1
…F
4
Bore for installation screws or attachment screws for the shipping plate in
the holes of the valve mounting surface
FKM fluorocarbon rubber (material for gaskets, such as O-rings)
G Bore for positioning pin in the holes of the valve mounting surface
GND Ground
HNBR Hydrogenated Nitrile Butadiene Rubber
(material for gaskets, such as O-rings)
HNBR Hydrogenated Nitrile Butadiene Rubber
(material for gaskets, such as O-rings)
IIntegral (e.g. in PID controller)
I
in
Symbol for input current
I
out
Symbol for output current
I
Command
Symbol for current command signal
I
Supply
Symbol for supply current
Tab. 47: Abbreviations, symbols and identification letters (part 1 of 3)
Tab. 47: Abbreviations,
symbols, and
identification letters
15 Appendix Abbreviations, symbols and identification letters
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 248
ID Identifier
ID Inner Diameter (e.g. on O-rings)
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission (http://www.iec.ch)
IP International Protection
(IP code; degree of protection type by enclosure as per EN 60529)
ISM Industrial, scientific and medical
(industrial, scientific, and medical, e. g. for ISM devices)
ISO International Organization for Standardization (http://www.iso.org)
LED Light Emitting Diode
LSS Layer Setting Services as per CiA DSP 305 (LSS offers the option of setting the
node parameters, such as module address or transmission rate, of a CAN node
via the CAN bus)
LVDT Linear Variable Differential Transformer
(position transducer; senses the position of the spool in the valve)
M Fail-safe function M of valve
NBR Nitrile Butadiene Rubber (material for gaskets, such as O-rings)
NBR Nitrile Butadiene Rubber (material for gaskets, such as O-rings)
NG Nominal size of the valve, e.g. 610
PProportional (e.g. in PID controller)
P Valve port (pressure port)
P
1
Valve port (pressure port)
P
max
Symbol for power consumption at maximum flow
P
min
Symbol for power consumption with motor in neutral position
P Symbol for pressure (Pressure)
p
N
Symbol for rated pressure
p
P
Symbol for operating pressure
p
X
Symbol for pilot pressure
PC Personal Computer
PE Protective Earth
PE Pin of the 6 or 11+PE-pin connector X1
PE Pin of the 11+PE-pin valve connector X1
PELV Protective Extra Low Voltage
PID Proportional Integral Differential (e. g. in PID controller)
PWM Pulse Width Modulation
Q Symbol for flow
Q Symbol for flow rate of a pump
Q
L
Symbol for leakage flow
Q
max
Symbol for maximum flow
Q
N
Symbol for rated flow
R
a
Symbol for average roughness
R
In
Symbol for input resistance
R
L
Symbol for load impedance
SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage (low voltage)
WAF Width Across Flats for wrenches
T Symbol for temperature
T Valve port (tank port)
T
1
Valve port (tank port)
T Symbol for time
TN Technical Note
Fig. Explanation
Tab. 47: Abbreviations, symbols and identification letters (part 2 of 3)
Tab. 47: Abbreviations,
symbols, and
identification letters
15 Appendix Additional literature
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 249
15.2 Additional literature
15.2.1 Fundamentals of hydraulics
Additional literature:
fundamentals of
hydraulics
Findeisen, Dietmar und Findeisen, Franz:
Ölhydraulik; Springer-Verlag
Murrenhoff, Univ.-Prof. Dr.-Ing. Hubertus:
Grundlagen der Fluidtechnik-- Teil 1: Hydraulik (Vorlesungsumdruck des
IFAS der RWTH Aachen)
http://www.rwth-aachen.de/ifas
Murrenhoff, Univ.-Prof. Dr.-Ing. Hubertus:
Servohydraulik (Vorlesungsumdruck des IFAS der RWTH Aachen)
http://www.rwth-aachen.de/ifas
Murrenhoff, Univ.-Prof. Dr.-Ing. Hubertus:
Steuerungs- und Schaltungstechnik-II (Vorlesungsumdruck des IFAS der
RWTH Aachen)
http://www.rwth-aachen.de/ifas
Schäfer, Dr. Klaus D.:
Stetighydraulik-- Grundlagen, Ventiltechnik, Regelkreise; Die Bibliothek
der Technik, Band 215; Verlag Moderne Industrie
TÜV Technischer Überwachungsverein (German Technical Inspection Agency)
U
in
Symbol for input voltage
U
out
Symbol for output voltage
U
comm
Symbol for input voltage command signal
U
cable
Symbol for voltage drop on the cable
USB Universal Serial Bus
UV Ultraviolet
V Symbol for volume (such as tank capacity)
VDE Verband der Elektrotechnik Elektronik Informationstechnik e. V.
(German Association of Electrical Engineering, Electronics and Information
Technology)
(http://www.vde.de)
VDI Verein Deutscher Ingenieure e. V. (Association of German Engineers)
(http://www.vdi.de)
W Fail-safe function W of valve
X Valve port (pilot pressure port)
X1…X10 Designations for the valve connectors
Y Valve port (leakage port)
Fig. Explanation
Tab. 47: Abbreviations, symbols and identification letters (part 3 of 3)
Tab. 47: Abbreviations,
symbols, and
identification letters
15 Appendix Quoted standards
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 250
15.2.2 CAN fundamentals
Additional literature:
CAN fundamentals
CAN in Automation e. V.:
http://www.can-cia.org
Etschberger, Konrad (editor):
CAN-- Controller-Area-Network-- Grundlagen, Protokolle, Bausteine,
Anwendungen; Carl Hanser Verlag
Lawrenz, Wolfhard (editor):
CAN-- Controller Area Network-- Grundlagen und Praxis; Hüthig Verlag
15.2.3 Profibus fundamentals
Additional literature:
Profibus fundamentals
PROFIBUS Users' Organization:
http://www.profibus.com
Popp, Manfred:
PROFIBUS-DP/DPV1-- Grundlagen, Tipps und Tricks für Anwender;
Hüthig Verlag
15.2.4 EtherCAT fundamentals
Additional literature:
EtherCAT fundamentals
EtherCAT Technology Group:
http://www.ethercat.org
15.2.5 Moog publications
Additional literature:
Publications by our
company
Press releases:
http://www.moog.com/industrial/news
Newsletters:
http://www.moog.com/industrial/newsletter
Articles in technical journals:
http://www.moog.com/industrial/articles
Presentations and scientific publications:
http://www.moog.com/industrial/papers
User manuals, TNs, catalogs, and similar:
http://www.moog.com/industrial/literature
15.3 Quoted standards
15.3.1 CiA DSP
Quoted standards:
CiA DSP
CiA DSP 305
CiA Draft Standard Proposal: CANopen Layer Setting Services and Protocol
(LSS)
15 Appendix Quoted standards
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 251
15.3.2 TIA/EIA
Quoted standards:
TIA/EIA
ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1
Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Part 1: General
Requirements
EIA 422
Electrical Characteristics of Balanced Voltage Digital Interface Circuits
TIA/EIA-485-A
Electrical Characteristics of Generators and Receivers for Use in Balanced
Digital Multipoint Systems
15.3.3 IEC
Quoted standards: IEC IEC 62407
Real-time Ethernet control automation technology (EtherCATTM)
15.3.4 IEEE
Quoted standardsIEEE 802.3
Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD)
Access Method and Physical Layer
15.3.5 ISO, ISO/IEC
Quoted standards: ISO,
ISO/IEC
ISO 11898
Road vehicles-– CAN protocol
ISO/IEC 8802-3
Information technology-- Telecommunications and information exchange
between systems-- Local and metropolitan area networks, specific require-
ments-- Part 3: Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection
(CSMA/CD) access method and physical layer specifications
15.3.6 DIN
Quoted standards: DIN DIN 51524-1
Pressure fluids; Hydraulic oils-Part 1: HL hydraulic oils; Minimum require-
ments
DIN 51524-2
Pressure fluids; Hydraulic oils-Part 2: HLP hydraulic oils; Minimum
requirements
DIN 51524-3
Pressure fluids; Hydraulic oils-Part 3: HVLP hydraulic oils; Minimum
requirements
DIN 24340-2
Hydraulic valves; mounting surfaces and connecting plates for directional
control valves
15 Appendix Quoted standards
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 252
15.3.7 EN
Quoted standards: EN EN 563
Safety of machinery-– Temperatures of touchable surfaces-– Ergonomics
data to establish temperature limit values for hot surfaces
EN 982
Safety of machinery-– Safety requirements for fluid power systems and
their components-– Hydraulics
EN 55011
Industrial, Scientific And Medical Equipment (ISM devices) - –Radio-
frequency Disturbance Characteristics - –Limits And Methods Of
Measurement
EN 60068-2-6
Environmental tests-– Part 2: Tests; test-Fc: vibration, sinus-shaped
(IEC 60068-2-6:1995 + Corrigendum 1995)
EN 60068-2-27
Environmental tests-– Part 2: Tests; test-Ea and guidelines: shocks
(IEC 60068-2-27:1987)
EN 60079-0
Explosive atmospheres. Equipment. General requirements - Part 0: Oper-
ating materials - general requirements
EN 60079-1
Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres - Part 1: Flameproof
enclosures 'd'
EN 60079-7
Explosive atmospheres - Part 7: Equipment protection by increased
safety "e"
EN 60204
Safety of machinery – Electrical equipment of machines
EN 60529
Protection types provided by enclosures (IP code)
EN 61000-6-2
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-– Part 6-2: Generic standards - –
Immunity to interference for industrial environments
EN 61000-6-3
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-– Part 6-3: Generic standards-–
Emitted interference for residential, commercial and light-industrial
environments
EN 61000-6-4
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-– Part 6-4: Generic standards - –
Emitted interference for industrial environments
EN 61076-2-101
Connectors for electronic equipment-- Part 2-101: circular connectors--
type specification for circular connector M8 with screw or snap locking and
M12 with screw locking for low-voltage applications
EN 61558-1
Safety of power transformers, power supplies, reactors and similar products-–
Part 1: General requirements and tests
15 Appendix Quoted directives
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 253
EN 61158-2
Digital data communication in instrumentation and control-– Fieldbus for
industrial control systems
EN 61558-2-6
Safety of transformers, reactors, power supply units and similar products
for supply voltages up to 1100 V-– Part 2-6: Special requirements and
tests for safety transformers and power supplies that contain safety trans-
formers
DIN EN 175201-804
Type specification - –Circular connectors -– Round contacts, size diame-
ter 1.6 mm - –threaded coupling
15.3.8 EN ISO
Quoted standards: EN ISO EN ISO 1302
Geometrical Product Specifications (GPS) - Indication of surface texture in
technical product documentation
EN ISO 4762
Hexagon socket head cap screws
EN ISO 12100
Safety of machinery-– Basic concepts, general principles for design
EN ISO 13849-1
Safety of machinery – Safety-related parts of control systems – Part 1:
General design principles
EN ISO 13849
Safety of machinery – Safety-related parts of control systems
15.3.9 ISO
Quoted standards: ISO ISO 4401
Hydraulic fluid power-– 4-port directional control valves-– Mounting sur-
faces
ISO 4406
Hydraulic fluid power-– Fluids-– Method for coding level of contamination
by solid particles
ISO11158
Lubricants, industrial oils and related products (class L) -- Family H
(hydraulic systems) -- Specifications for categories HH, HL, HM, HV
and HG
15.4 Quoted directives
Quoted directives2006/42/EC
Directive 2006/42/EG of the European Parliament and Council for align-
ment of the legal and administrative provisions of the Member States for
machinery
2004/108/EC
Directive 2004/108/EC concerning electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
94/9/EG
ATEX product guideline
15 Appendix Explosion-proof connectors
© Moog GmbH User manual type series D67XK (CDS29588-en; Rev. -, May 2012) 255
15.5 Explosion-proof connectors
Instructions from the company Cooper Crouse-Hinds GmbH
Safety instructions
Before opening the pressure screw on
the plug and coupler, ensure that it
has been isolated from the supply.
The assembly instructions must be
used in conjunction with the detailed
operating instructions
„GHG5707001P0001”
(available from www.ceag.de).
The user information for „MOOG-
Ventile“ must to be observed
(www.Moog.com/industrial).
The configuration of plug and socket
systems shall only be carried out by
qualified personnel.
Plug and socket systems of the type
eXLink are not suited for use in Zone
0 or 20 areas. In order to guarantee
the explosion protection, only inlets
and flange sockets made of metal
may be fitted in the boreholes of
flameproof enclosures.
The metal flang sockets and inlets
shall be incorporated in the earth
potential eyualization.
When opened, the live plug and
socket system components shall be
sealed immediately after
disconnection using the protective
cap.
Here it is necessary to ensure that it
is closed correctly, otherwise the
minimum degree of protection and
the explosion protection are no
longer guaranteed.
Sicherheitshinweise
Vor dem Öffnen der Druckschraube
am Stecker und Kupplung, ist die
Spannungsfreiheit sicherzustellen.
Die Montageanleitung darf nur
zusammen mit der ausführlichen
Betriebsanleitung
„GHG5707001P0001“
(unter www.ceag.de erhältlich)
verwendet werden.
Die Benutzerinformationen für
„MOOG-Ventile“ sind zu beachten
(www.Moog.com/industrial).
Das Konfektionieren der Steck-
verbinder darf nur durch Fachkräfte
erfolgen.
Die Steckverbindungen eXLink sind
nicht für den Einsatz in der Zone 0
oder 20 geeignet. Zur Sicherstellung
des Explosionsschutzes dürfen in die
Bohrungen von druckfesten
Gehäusen nur Gerätestecker und
Flansch-steckdosen aus Metall
eingesetzt werden.
Gerätestecker und Flanschsteck-
dosen aus Metall sind durch
geeignete Maßnahmen in das
Erdpotential der Gehäuse bzw.
Geräte mit einzubeziehen.
Die unter Spannung stehenden
Steckverbindungskomponenten
müssen sofort nach dem Trennen
mit der Schutzkappe verschlossen
werden, damit die Schutzart und
damit der Explosionsschutz
sichergestellt wird.
Technische Angaben
Gerätekennzeichnung nach 94/9/EG und Norm:
II 2 G Ex de IIC T6
II 2 G Ex ia/ib IICT6
II 2 D Ex tD A21 IP 66 T80°C
nach CSA Class I, Zone 1 Ex de IIC T6
Class I, Div 2; Gr. A,B,C,D
EG-Baumusterprüfbescheinigung:
PTB 03 ATEX 1016 X
Zulässige Umgebungs-
temperatur: -25°C/-55°C bis +40°C
1)
Bemessungsspannung: bis 250 V, 50/60 Hz
Bemessungsstrom: max. 10 A
Leitungseinführung ø: Standard Optional
Stecker, Kupplung ø 4-7,5 mm ø7,5-11mm
Anschlussquerschnitt: 1x0,75-1,5mm²/2,5mm²
Anschlussleitung Draka ToughCat 7
LSHF-FR 4x2/0,27 MUD
Vibrationsfestigkeit nach
EN 60068-2-6 10-150 Hz: 2g / 30 min
2)
Prüfdrehmomente:
Arretierungsschraube 1,0 Nm
Überwurfmutter 2,5 Nm
Druckschraube -ø 4-7,5mm 3,5 Nm
Druckschraube -ø7,5-11mm 3,5 Nm
1) die besonderen Bedingungen gemäß Prüfschein
PTB 03 ATEX 1016 X sind zu beachten.
2) Die Hinweise im Kapitel „Montage“ beachten!
Technical Data
Apparatus marking acc. to 94/9/EC & directive
II 2 G Ex de IIC T6
II 2 G Ex ia/ib IICT6
II 2 D Ex tD A21 IP 66 T80°C
acc. CSA Class I, Zone 1 Ex de IIC T6
Class I, Div 2; Gr. A,B,C,D
EC type examination certificate:
PTB 03 ATEX 1016 X
Permissible ambient
temperature: -25°C/-55°C to +40 °C
1)
Rated voltage: up to 250 V, 50/60 Hz
Rated current: max. 10 A
Cable entry ø: Standard Optional
Plug, coupler ø 4-7.5 mm ø7.5-11mm
Terminal cross section: 1x0.75-1.5mm²/2.5mm²
Cable: Draka ToughCat 7
LSHF-FR 4x2/0.27 MUD
Vibration resistance acc.
EN 60068-2-6 10-150 Hz: 2g / 30 min
2)
Test torques:
Locking screw 1.0 Nm
Coupling nut 2.5 Nm
Pressure screw -ø 4-7,5mm 3.5 Nm
Pressure screw -ø7,5-11mm 3.5 Nm
1) observe special requirements accd. certifcation
PTB 03 ATEX 1016 X.
2) Follow the instructions in the chapter ´Installation!
Caractéristiques techniques
Marquage de l’appareil selon 94/9/CE & directive
II 2 G Ex de IIC T6
II 2 G Ex ia/ib IICT6
II 2 D Ex tD A21 IP 66 T80°C
en fonction de CSA Class I, Zone 1 Ex de IIC T6
Class I, Div 2; Gr. A,B,C,D
Attestation d’examen CE de type:
PTB 03 ATEX 1016 X
Température ambiante
admissible: -25°C/-55°C à +40°C
1)
Tension nominale: jusqu’à 250 V, 50/60 Hz
Courant nominal: max. 10 A
Entrée de câble ø: Standard Optional
Fiche, Prolongateur ø 4-7,5 mm ø7,5-11mm
Section raccordement: 1x0,75-1,5mm²/2,5mm²
Cable: Draka ToughCat 7
LSHF-FR 4x2/0,27 MUD
Résistance aux vibrations selon
EN 60068-2-6 10-150 Hz: 2g / 30 min
2)
Couples de serrage testés:
Vis d´arrêt 1,0 Nm
Collerette de fixation 2,5 Nm
Vis de serrage ø 4-7,5mm 3,5 Nm
Vis de serrage ø7,5-11mm 3,5 Nm
1) Respecter les précautions particulières selon
l'attestation d'examen CE de type PTB 03 ATEX 1016 X
2) Suivre les instructions du chapitre ´Montage!
Instructions de sécurité
Avant de relâcher la vis de pression
sur la prise et le prolongateur,
vérifiez l’absence de tension.
Utilisez la notice de montage
uniquement en association avec les
instructions détaillées de service
“GHG5707001P0001” (disponibles
sur le site www.ceag.de ).
Les informations utilisateur pour
les „MOOG-Ventile“ doivent être
respectées
(www.Moog.com/industrial).
Seul un personnel qualifié est
autorisé à effectuer le branchement
électrique des connecteurs mâles-
femelles.
Les connecteurs mâles-femelles
eXLink ne conviennent pas pour une
utilisation en zone 0 et 20. Afin de
garantir une protection
antidéflagrante, seuls des socles
connecteurs et des prises de courant
à bride métalliques doivent être
montés dans les évidements des
boîtiers à l’épreuve de la pression.
Les prises à bride aux métal et les
sockles connecteur aux métal
doivent être reliés au même
potentiel.
Après déconnexion, les éléments de
connexion encore sous tension
doivent immédiatement être
protégés à l’aide d’obturateurs.
GHG 570 7001 P0101 D/E/F (a)/Auflage/38.11/Str
eXLink 4-polig Stecker, Kupplung/
4-pole plug, coupler/
4 pôles fiche, prolongateur
CUS
Ausführung 4-polig (3+PE)
= ohne PE-Bügel
Version 4-pole (3+PE)
= without PE-clamp
Version 4 pôles (3+PE)
= sans l’étrier de PE
Stecker
Plug
Fiche
Kupplung
Coupler
Prolongateur
4
3
2
1
4
3
5
5
2
6
D D
D D
D
A A
A A
A
Montageanleitung / Mounting instructions / Mode d’emploi
Anschlussquerschnitt 0,75 - 1,5mm² oder 2,5mm²
Cross section 0.75 - 1.5mm² or 2.5mm²
Section de raccordement 0,75 - 1,5mm² ou 2,5mm²
ohne PE-Bügel mit PE-Bügel
without PE-shackle with PE-shackle
sans étrier de PE avec étrier de PE
C C
C C
C
6
(PE)
(PE)
(PE -Bügel, nur 4+1)
(PE-clamp, only with 4+1)
(étrier de PE, seulment 4+1)
6h
6h
B B
B B
B
E E
E E
E
B B
B B
B
E E
E E
E
D D
D D
D
C C
C C
C
H H
H H
H
G G
G G
G
F F
F F
F
(PE -Bügel, nur 4+1)
(PE-clamp, only with 4+1)
(étrier de PE, seulment 4+1)
1
6 h
95
28
5 h
10 h6 h
1 h
96
28
Stecker/Kupplung öffnenStecker/Kupplung öffnen
Stecker/Kupplung öffnenStecker/Kupplung öffnen
Stecker/Kupplung öffnen
1. Eventuell vorhandene Schutzkappe
abschrauben.
2. Arretierschraube lösen.
3. Druckstück aus Hülse herausdrehen.
4. Einsatz von vorne aus der Hülse
herausdrücken.
5. Dabei Zugentlastung, Dichtung,
Druckscheibe, Isolierhülse aus Hülse
nach hinten heraus nehmen.
6. Farbring zur Kennzeichnung auf
Hülseaufziehen.
Plug openPlug open
Plug openPlug open
Plug open
1. Screw down possible excisting
protective cap. .
2. Loosen locking screw.
3. Screw out pressure piece of plug
sleeve.
4. Press out from front plug insert out of
plug sleeve.
5. At the same time, remove the strain
relief, seal, thrust washer and
insulating sleeve from the plug sleeve
from the back.
6. Fit coloured ring used for marking on to
the plug sleeve.
Ouverture de la ficheOuverture de la fiche
Ouverture de la ficheOuverture de la fiche
Ouverture de la fiche
1. Dévisser le capuchon (si monté) de la
fiche.
2. Dévisser la vis d’arrêt.
3. Sortir en la tournant la pièce de
pression de la douille de fiche.
4. Extraire par l’avant le bloc de fiche de la
douille de fiche.
5. Retirer pendant cette opération par
l’arrière la décharge de tension, le joint,
la rondelle de pression, la douille
isolante de la douille de fiche.
6. Monter la bague en couleur comme
repère sur la douille de fiche.
Leiter mit Stiften / BuchsenLeiter mit Stiften / Buchsen
Leiter mit Stiften / BuchsenLeiter mit Stiften / Buchsen
Leiter mit Stiften / Buchsen
verbindenverbinden
verbindenverbinden
verbinden
Die Isolation des Leiters muss bis an
die Stifte / Buchsen heranreichen. Der
Leiter darf nicht beschädigt sein.
1. Kabel ca. 30 mm abmanteln.(Fig.1)
2. Leiter des Kabels ca. 8 mm ab-
isolieren.
Stifte / Buchsen anschließenStifte / Buchsen anschließen
Stifte / Buchsen anschließenStifte / Buchsen anschließen
Stifte / Buchsen anschließen
1. Leiter in die Anschlussöffnung der
Stifte / Buchsen stecken.
2. Alle Leiter mit der Crimpzange
(o Zubehör) ancrimpen (Fig.A).
oder
Alle Leiter mit Stiften/Buchsen
verlöten und
Schrumpfschlauch über jede Lötstelle
ziehen.
Stecker/Kupplung montierenStecker/Kupplung montieren
Stecker/Kupplung montierenStecker/Kupplung montieren
Stecker/Kupplung montieren
Auch Stifte/Buchsen montieren, die
nicht angeschlossen sind.
Die Stifte/Buchsen sind nach dem
Eindrücken in den Einsatz nicht mehr
demontierbar.
1. Druckstück, Zugentlastung, Dichtung
und Druckscheibe auf Kabel
aufschieben.
2. Der Stift/die Buchse der Position 4 hat
einen größeren Durchmesser. Diesen
zuerst in seine Halterung stecken.
Alle Stifte / Buchsen bis zum
hörbaren Einrasten in die Sechskant-
führung des Einsatzes drücken.
3. Isolierhülse auf Einsatz schieben.
4. Einsatz mit Führungsnase in die
Führungs-nut der Hülse stecken
(Fig.G).
5. Druckscheibe, Dichtung, Zug-
entlastung montieren.
6. Druckstück (2) festschrauben
(Drehmoment -> Technische Daten).
7. Arretierschraube festschrauben (Fig. H).
Connecting conductors to pinsConnecting conductors to pins
Connecting conductors to pinsConnecting conductors to pins
Connecting conductors to pins
The insulation of the conductor shall
reach up to the pins. The conductor
must not be damaged.
1. Strip off ca. 30 mm of cable
insulation.(Fig.1)
2. Strip off ca. 8 mm of insulation from
cable conductors.
Crimp plugs/contactsCrimp plugs/contacts
Crimp plugs/contactsCrimp plugs/contacts
Crimp plugs/contacts
1. Insert conductor into the connection
opening of the plug/contact pin.
2. Crimp on all conductors using
crimping tool (oAccessories) [Fig.$@
or
solder all conductors to plug pins/
contact and pull shrink-on sleeve
over each solder ring point.
Assembling plugs/couplerAssembling plugs/coupler
Assembling plugs/couplerAssembling plugs/coupler
Assembling plugs/coupler
Also assemble plug/coupler pins that Also assemble plug/coupler pins that
Also assemble plug/coupler pins that Also assemble plug/coupler pins that
Also assemble plug/coupler pins that
are not connectedare not connected
are not connectedare not connected
are not connected
.
Once they have been pressed into
the plug/coupler insert, the plug pins
cannot be disassembled
.
1. Push pressure piece, strain relief,
seal and thrust washer on to cable.
2. The plug/contact pin, Item 4, is larger
in diameter. To avoid mistakes, put
this into the holder first. Push all the
plug pins into the hexa gonal
keyways of the plug/coupler insert
until they engage.
3. Push the insulating sleeve on to the
plug insert.
4. Insert the plug insert with guide lug
into the keyway of the plug sleeve
(Fig.G).
5. Fit thrust washer, seal and strain
relief.
6. Screw pressure piece tight
[torque -> Technical Data]
7. Tighten locking screw (Fig. H).
Raccordement des conducteursRaccordement des conducteurs
Raccordement des conducteursRaccordement des conducteurs
Raccordement des conducteurs
aux contacts mâles/aux contacts mâles/
aux contacts mâles/aux contacts mâles/
aux contacts mâles/
femellesfemelles
femellesfemelles
femelles
L’isolation du conducteur doit arriver
jusqu’aux contacts . Le conducteur ne doit
pas être endommagé.
1. Dénuder le câble sur env. 30 mm.(Fig.1)
2. Dénuder les conducteurs du câble sur
env. 8 mm.
Présertir Fiche/ProlongateurPrésertir Fiche/Prolongateur
Présertir Fiche/ProlongateurPrésertir Fiche/Prolongateur
Présertir Fiche/Prolongateur
1. Enficher le conducteur dans l’ouverture
du contact mâle/femelle.
2. Pré-sertir tous les conducteurs avec
la pince à sertir (o accessoire) (Fig.A).
ou
braser tous les conducteurs avec les
contacts mâles/femelles et enfiler la
gaine thermorétractable sur chaque
brasure.
Montage de la fiche/duMontage de la fiche/du
Montage de la fiche/duMontage de la fiche/du
Montage de la fiche/du
prolongateurprolongateur
prolongateurprolongateur
prolongateur
Monter aussi les contacts mâles/
femelles non raccordés.
Les contacts mâles/femelles ne
peuvent plus être démontés après avoir
été pressés dans le bloc de fiche.
1. Monter la pièce de pression, la décharge
de tension.
2. Le contact mâle/femelle de la position 4
a un plus gros diamètre. Pour éviter
toute confusion, enficher celui-ci en
premier dans son support.
Enfoncer tous les contacts
mâlesfemelles jusqu’à l’enclenchement
dans le guidage hexagonal du bloc de
fiche.
3. Monter la douille isolante sur le bloc de
fiche.
4. Engager le bloc de fiche avec l’ergot de
guidage dans la rainure de guidage de la
douille de fiche (Fig.G).
5. Monter la rondelle de pression, le joint,
la décharge de tension.
6. Visser la pièce de pression (couple ->
Caractéristiques techniques).
7. Visser la vis d’arrêt (Fig. H).
Manoeuvre
A/A1 Introduisez la fiche en
positionnant correctement
l’ergot de guidage dans la
rainure de guidage
correspondante du prolongateur
jusqu’à la 1
ère
butée (B).
B 1 Ensuite, tournez la fiche
d’environ 30° vers la droite
jusqu’en butée de limitation.
C Assemblez la fiche et le
prolongateur jusqu’en butée.
D Vissez à fond la collerette de
fixation sur le connecteur
enfiché.
Handling
A/A1 Insert the plug into the
coupler until they reach the 1
st
stop. Ensure that the position of
the key on the plug corresponds
to that of the keyway on the
coupler (B).
B1 Then turn the plug to the right
through ca. 30° until it reaches
the stop.
C Insert plug into coupler until it
reaches the final stop.
D Tighten the coupling nut on the
connected plug and socket.
Handhabung
A/A1 Den Stecker mit der
Führungsnase lagerichtig in die
entsprechende Führungsnut der
Kupplung bis zum 1. Anschlag
einstecken (B).
B1 Danach den Stecker um ca.
30° nach rechts bis zum
Begrenzungsanschlag drehen.
C Stecker bis zum Endanschlag
mit der Kupplung zusammen-
stecken.
D Überwurfmutter „handfest“ an
der gesteckten Steck-
verbindung.
AA
AA
A
CC
CC
C
A1A1
A1A1
A1
DD
DD
D
B B
B B
B
B1B1
B1B1
B1
1
1
2
4
5
3
Conformity with standards
The plug and socket system is
conform to the standards specified
in the EC-Declaration of conformity
and additional conform to the
comparable IEC Standards
IEC 60079-0, IEC 60079-1,
IEC 60079-7, IEC 61241-0,
IEC 61241-1.
CAN/CSA C22.2 E60079-0-02
CAN/CSA C22.2 E60079-1-02
CAN/CSA C22.2 E60079-7-2003
CAN/CSA C22.2 No 213
CAN/CSA C22.2 No 182.3 M1987
CAN/CSA C22.2 No 94.1-07
94/9 EC: Equipment and
protective systems intended for
use in potentially explosive
atmospheres.
It has been designed, manu-
factured and tested according to
the state of the art and to
DIN EN ISO 9001.
Normenkonformität
Das Steckverbindungssystem
entspricht den in der Konformitäts-
erklärung aufgeführten Normen
und den vergleichbaren
IEC Standards
IEC 60079-0, IEC 60079-1,
IEC 60079-7, IEC 61241-0,
IEC 61241-1.
CAN/CSA C22.2 E60079-0-02
CAN/CSA C22.2 E60079-1-02
CAN/CSA C22.2 E60079-7-2003
CAN/CSA C22.2 No 213
CAN/CSA C22.2 No 182.3 M1987
CAN/CSA C22.2 No 94.1-07
94/9 EG: Geräte und Schutz-
systeme zur bestimmungs-
gemäßen Verwendung in
explosionsgefährdeten Bereichen.
Das Steckverbindungssystem ist
gemäß DIN EN ISO 9001 entwi-
ckelt, gefertigt und geprüft worden.
Conformité avec les
normes
Les boîtes à bornes sont
conformes aux normes reprises
dans la déclaration de conformité
et supplémentaires conformes à la
comparables aux IEC Standards
IEC 60079-0, IEC 60079-1, I
EC 60079-7, IEC 61241-0,
IEC 61241-1.
CAN/CSA C22.2 E60079-0-02
CAN/CSA C22.2 E60079-1-02
CAN/CSA C22.2 E60079-7-2003
CAN/CSA C22.2 No 213
CAN/CSA C22.2 No 182.3 M1987
CAN/CSA C22.2 No 94.1-07
94/9 CE: Appareils et systèmes
de protection destinés à être
utilisés en atmosphère explosible.
Les boîtes à bornes ont été
conçues, fabriquées et contrôlées
suivant DIN EN ISO 9001.
Cooper Crouse-Hinds GmbHCooper Crouse-Hinds GmbH
Cooper Crouse-Hinds GmbHCooper Crouse-Hinds GmbH
Cooper Crouse-Hinds GmbH
Neuer Weg-Nord 49
D-69412 Eberbach
Phone +49 (0) 6271/806-500
Fax +49 (0) 6271/806-476
Internet: www.CEAG.de
E-Mail: info-ex@ceag.de
Instructions de sécurité
Avant de relâcher la vis de pression sur
la prise et le prolongateur, vérifiez
l’absence de tension.
Utilisez la notice de montage uniquement
en association avec les instructions
détaillées de service
“GHG5707001P0001” (disponibles sur le
site www.ceag.de ).
Les informations utilisateur pour les
„MOOG-Ventile“
doivent être respectées.
(www.Moog.com/industrial).
Seul un personnel qualifié est autorisé à
effectuer le branchement électrique des
connecteurs mâles-femelles.
Les alésages filetés du boîtier de
protection ou appareil à encastrer
résistant à la pression doivent satisfaire
aux exigences minima de la norme
EN 60079-1.
Les connecteurs mâles-femelles eXLink ne
conviennent pas pour une utilisation en
zone 0 et 20.
Afin de garantir une protection
antidéflagrante, seuls des socles
connecteurs et des prises de courant à
bride métalliques doivent être montés
dans les évidements des boîtiers à
l’épreuve de la pression.
Les prises à bride aux métal et les
sockles connecteur aux métal doivent
être reliés au même potentiel.
N’utilisez les prises de courant à bride et
socles connecteurs qu’avec les fiches et
prolongateurs correspondants et en
parfait état.
Après déconnexion, les éléments de
connexion encore sous tension doivent
immédiatement être protégés à l’aide
d’obturateurs.
Safety instructions
Before opening the pressure screw on
the plug and coupler, ensure that it has
been isolated from the supply.
The assembly instructions must be used
in conjunction with the detailed operating
instructions “GHG5707001P0001”
(available from www.ceag.de).
The user information for
„MOOG-Ventile“
must to be observed.
(www.Moog.com/industrial).
The connection of plug and socket
systems shall only be carried out by
qualified personnel.
The threaded holes in the flameproof
enclosure shall fulfil the minimum
requirements of EN 60079-1.
Plug and socket systems of the type
eXLink are not suited for use in
zone 0 or 20 areas.
In order to guarantee the explosion
protection, only inlets and flange sockets
made of metal may be fitted in the
boreholes of flameproof enclosures.
The metal flang sockets and inlets shall
be incorporated in the earth potential
eyualization.
They shall be used for their intended
purpose and shall be in an undamaged
and perfect state.
When opened, the live plug and socket
system components shall be sealed
immediately after disconnection using the
protective cap.
Here it is necessary to ensure that it is
closed correctly, otherwise the minimum
degree of protection and the explosion
protection are no longer guaranteed.
Sicherheitshinweise
Vor dem Öffnen der Druckschraube am
Stecker und Kupplung, ist die
Spannungsfreiheit sicherzustellen.
Die Montageanleitung darf nur zusam-
men mit der ausführlichen Betriebsan-
leitung „GHG5707001P0001“ (unter
www.ceag.de erhältlich) verwendet
werden.
Die Benutzerinformationen für „MOOG-
Ventile“ sind zu beachten
(www.Moog.com/industrial).
Das Konfektionieren der Steckverbinder
darf nur durch Fachkräfte erfolgen.
Die Gewindebohrungen im druckfesten
Schutzgehäuse oder Einbaugeräten,
müssen den Mindestanforderungen der
EN 60079-1, entsprechen.
Die Steckverbindungen eXLink sind nicht
für den Einsatz in der Zone 0 oder 20
geeignet.
Zur Sicherstellung des Explosions-
schutzes dürfen in die Bohrungen von
druckfesten Gehäusen nur Geräte-
stecker und Flanschsteckdosen aus
Metall eingesetzt werden.
Gerätestecker und Flanschsteckdosen
aus Metall sind durch geeignete
Maßnahmen in das Erdpotential der
Gehäuse bzw. Geräte mit einzubeziehen.
Steckverbindung nur in technisch
einwandfreiem Zustand sowie
bestimmungsgemäß, sicherheits- und
gefahrenbewusst unter Beachtung dieser
Montage- und Betriebsanleitung
montieren und betreiben.
Die unter Spannung stehenden Steck-
verbindungskomponenten müssen sofort
nach dem Trennen mit der Schutzkappe
verschlossen werden, damit die
Schutzart und damit der Explosions-
schutz sichergestellt wird.
Technische Angaben
Gerätekennzeichnung
nach 94/9/EG:
II 2G Ex de IIC T6/
II 2G Ex ia/ib IIC T6
II 2D tD A21 IP66 T80°C
nach CSA
Class I, Zone 1 Ex de IIC T6
Class I, Div 2; Gr. A,B,C,D
Zulässige Umgebungs-
temperatur: -25°C/-55°C bis +40°C
1)
EG-Baumusterprüf-
bescheinigung: PTB 03 ATEX 1016 X
Bemessungsspannung: bis 250 V, 50/60 Hz
Bemessungsstrom: max. 10 A
Anschlussquerschnitt: AWG 22, AWG 26
Anschlussleitung: AWG 22/26 Metrofunk
Vibrationsfestigkeit nach
EN 60068-2-6 10-150 Hz: 2g / 30 min
2)
Prüfdrehmomente
Arretierungsschraube: 1,0 Nm
Einschraubgewinde Steck-
dose, Gerätestecker: 30 Nm
Überwurfmutter: 2,5 Nm (handfest)
1) die besonderen Bedingungen gemäß Prüfschein
PTB 03 ATEX 1016 X sind zu beachten.
2) Die Hinweise im Kapitel „Montage“ beachten!
Technical Data
Apparatus marking
acc. to 94/9/EC:
II 2G Ex de IIC T6/
II 2G Ex ia/ib IIC T6
II 2D tD A21 IP66 T80°C
acc. CSA
Class I, Zone 1 Ex de IIC T6
Class I, Div 2; Gr. A,B,C,D
Permissible ambient
temperature: -25°C/-55°C to +40 °C
1)
EC type examination
certificate: PTB 03 ATEX 1016 X
Rated voltage: up to 250 V, 50/60 Hz
Rated current: max. 10 A
Terminal cross section: AWG 22, AWG 26
Cable: AWG 22/26 Metrofunk
Vibration resistance acc.
EN 60068-2-6 10-150 Hz: 2g / 30 min
2)
Test torques
Locking screw: 1.0 Nm
Screw-in thread - flange
socket, inlet: 30 Nm
coupling nut: 2,5 Nm (by hand)
1) observe special requirements accd. certifcation
PTB 03 ATEX 1016 X.
2) Follow the instructions in the chapter ´Installation!
Caractéristiques techniques
Marquage de l’appareil
selon 94/9/CE:
II 2G Ex de IIC T6/
II 2G Ex ia/ib IIC T6
II 2D tD A21 IP66 T80°C
en fonction de CSA
Class I, Zone 1 Ex de IIC T6
Class I, Div 2; Gr. A,B,C,D
Température ambiante
admissible: -25°C/-55°C à +40°C
1)
Attestation d’examen CE
de type: PTB 03 ATEX 1016 X
Tension nominale: jusqu’à 250 V, 50/60 Hz
Courant nominal: max. 10 A
Section raccordement: AWG 22, AWG 26
Cable: AWG 22/26 Metrofunk
Résistance aux vibrations selon
EN 60068-2-6 10-150 Hz: 2g / 30 min
2)
Couples de serrage testés
Vis d´ arrêt: 1,0 Nm
Filets de vis de prise à
pride, connecteur: 30 Nm
Ecrou(Bien serrer à la main): 2,5 Nm
1)
Respecter les précautions particulières selon
l'attestation d'examen CE de type PTB 03 ATEX 1016 X
2) Suivre les instructions du chapitre ´Montage!
eXLink 4-polig Gerätestecker, Flanschsteckdose/
4-pole Inlet, Flange/
4 la prise et le prolongateur
GHG 570 7001 P0102
(
F
)
/Aufla
g
e in tsd./38.11/Str.
CUS
A1A1
A1A1
A1
B B
B B
B
B1B1
B1B1
B1
1
1
2
3
4
5
Handhabung
A/A1 Den Stecker mit der Führungs-
nase lagerichtig in die entsprechende
Führungsnut der Kupplung bis zum 1.
Anschlag einstecken (B).
B1 Danach den Stecker um ca. 30° nach
rechts bis zum Begrenzungsanschlag
drehen.
C Stecker bis zum Endanschlag mit der
Kupplung zusammenstecken.
D Die Überwurfmutter des Steckers über
die Kupplung schieben und handfest
festschrauben.
Handling
A/A1 Insert the plug into the coupler
until they reach the 1
st
stop. Ensure
that the position of the key on the
plug corresponds to that of the
keyway on the coupler (B).
B1 Then turn the plug to the right
through ca. 30° until it reaches the
stop.
C Insert plug into coupler until it reaches
the final stop.
D Slide the coupling nut of the plug over
the coupler and tighten well by hand
Manoeuvre
A/A1 Introduisez la fiche en
positionnant correctement l’ergot de
guidage dans la rainure de guidage
correspondante du prolongateur
jusqu’à la 1
ère
butée (B).
B 1 Ensuite, tournez la fiche d’environ 30°
vers la droite jusqu’en butée de
limitation.
C Assemblez la fiche et le prolongateur
jusqu’en butée.
D Enfiler l´écrou de la prise sur le
prolongateur et bien serrer à la main.
DD
DD
D
CC
CC
C
AA
AA
A
Montage / Mounting / Montage
Verdrehungsschutz - optional
Anti-torsion protection - optionally
Protection anti-torsion - facultatifement
Flanschsteckdosen, oder Gerätestecker müssen durch
geeignete Maßnahmen (z.B. Einkleben, Kontern (Prüfdrehmoment 30 Nm) oder
Arretieren mit einem Verdrehungsschutz gegen Verdrehen
oder Selbstlockern gesichert werden.
Suitable measures shall be applied (e.g. adhesive, locking (Test torques 30 Nm) and
retaining with anti-torsion protection) to safeguard screwed-in
flange sockets, inlets or angle pieces against twisting or
self-loosening.
Une fois vissés, les prises à brides ou socles connecteurs
doivent être bloqués par un moyen approprié (par ex. collage,
contre-écrou (Couples de serrage testés 30 Nm) et blocage par protection anti-torsion)
pour les empêcher de tourner ou de se dévisser.
Das Gehäusevolumen bei der Auswahl
des Gerätesteckers berücksichtigen.
Observe the flameproof enclosure
volume when flange-socket selecting.
Observez le volume de l'enceinte
antidéflagrante lors socle
connecteuravec sélection.
Flanschsteckdose mit Anschlussleitung
Flange socket with connection leads
Prise à bride avec lignes de raccordement
Gerätestecker mit Anschlussleitung
Inlet with connection leads
Socle connecteuravec lignes de raccordement
1
6 h
1 h
5 h
10 h
13 60
SW 25
M20
28
9 63,5
SW 25
M20
28
13 74
SW 25
M20
28
V < 2000 cm³ V > 2000 cm³
Conformity with standards
The plug and socket system is conform to the
standards specified in the EC-Declaration of
conformity and additional conform to the
comparable IEC Standards
IEC 60079-0, IEC 60079-1, IEC 60079-7,
IEC 61241-0, IEC 61241-1.
CAN/CSA C22.2 E60079-0-02
CAN/CSA C22.2 E60079-1-02
CAN/CSA C22.2 E60079-7-2003
CAN/CSA C22.2 No 213
CAN/CSA C22.2 No 182.3 M1987
CAN/CSA C22.2 No 94.1-07
94/9 EC: Equipment and protective systems
intended for use in potentially explosive
atmospheres.
It has been designed, manufactured and tested
according to the state of the art and to
DIN EN ISO 9001.
Normenkonformität
Das Steckverbindungssystem entspricht den in
der Konformitätserklärung aufgeführten Normen
und den vergleichbaren IEC Standards
IEC 60079-0, IEC 60079-1, IEC 60079-7,
IEC 61241-0, IEC 61241-1.
CAN/CSA C22.2 E60079-0-02
CAN/CSA C22.2 E60079-1-02
CAN/CSA C22.2 E60079-7-2003
CAN/CSA C22.2 No 213
CAN/CSA C22.2 No 182.3 M1987
CAN/CSA C22.2 No 94.1-07
94/9 EG: Geräte und Schutzsysteme zur
bestimmungsgemäßen Verwendung in
explosionsgefährdeten Bereichen.
Das Steckverbindungssystem ist gemäß
DIN EN ISO 9001 entwickelt, gefertigt und geprüft
worden.
Conformité avec les
normes
Les boîtes à bornes sont conformes aux normes
reprises dans la déclaration de conformité et
supplémentaires conformes à la
comparables aux IEC Standards
IEC 60079-0, IEC 60079-1, IEC 60079-7,
IEC 61241-0, IEC 61241-1.
CAN/CSA C22.2 E60079-0-02
CAN/CSA C22.2 E60079-1-02
CAN/CSA C22.2 E60079-7-2003
CAN/CSA C22.2 No 213
CAN/CSA C22.2 No 182.3 M1987
CAN/CSA C22.2 No 94.1-07
94/9 CE: Appareils et systèmes de protection
destinés à être utilisés en atmosphère
explosible.
Les boîtes à bornes ont été conçues, fabriquées
et contrôlées suivant DIN EN ISO 9001.
Cooper Crouse-Hinds GmbHCooper Crouse-Hinds GmbH
Cooper Crouse-Hinds GmbHCooper Crouse-Hinds GmbH
Cooper Crouse-Hinds GmbH
Neuer Weg-Nord 49
D-69412 Eberbach
Phone +49 (0) 6271/806-500
Fax +49 (0) 6271/806-476
Internet: www.CEAG.de
E-Mail: info-ex@ceag.de
Technische Angaben
Gerätekennzeichnung
nach 94/9/EG:
II 2 G Ex de IIC T6
II 2 G Ex ia/ib IIC T6
nach CSA
Class I, Zone 1 Ex de IIC T6
Class I, Div 2; Gr. A,B,C,D
EG-Baumusterprüf-
bescheinigung: PTB 06 ATEX 1031 X
Zulässige Umgebungs-
temperatur: -25°C/-55°C bis 40°C
1)
Bemessungsspannung: bis 400 V, 50/60 Hz
Bemessungsstrom: max. 16 A
Leitungseinführung ø: Standard Optional
Stecker, Kupplung ø7-11mm ø11-15mm
Anschlussleitung: LEONI 7x0,75mm²,
MUD
Anschlussquerschnitt: 1x0,75-1,5mm²/
2,5mm²
Vibrationsfestigkeit nach
EN 60068-2-6 10-150 Hz:2g / 30 min
2)
Prüfdrehmomente: Metall
Arretierungsschraube 1,0 Nm
Einschraubgewinde Steck-
dose, Gerätestecker 3,5 Nm
Druckschraube 3,5 Nm
Druckschraube 3,5 Nm
1) die besonderen Bedingungen gemäß Prüfschein
PTB 03 ATEX 1016 X sind zu beachten.
2) Die Hinweise im Kapitel „Montage“ beachten!
Technical Data
Apparatus marking
acc. to 94/9/EC:
II 2 G Ex de IIC T6
II 2 G Ex ia/ib IIC T6
acc. CSA Class I, Zone 1 Ex de IIC T6
Class I, Div 2; Gr. A,B,C,D
EC type examination
certificate: PTB 06 ATEX 1031 X
Permissible ambient
temperature: -25°C/-55°C to +40 °C
1)
Rated voltage: up to 400 V, 50/60 Hz
Rated current: max. 16 A
Cable entry ø: Standard Optional
Plug, coupler ø7-11mm ø11-15mm
Cable: LEONI 7x0,75mm²,
MUD
Terminal cross section: 1x0,75-1,5mm²/
2,5mm²
Vibration resistance acc.
EN 60068-2-6 10-150 Hz: 2g / 30 min
2)
Test torques:
Locking screw 1.0 Nm
Screw-in thread - flange
socket, inlet 3.5 Nm
Pressure screw 3.5 Nm
Pressure screw 3.5 Nm
1) observe special requirements accd. certifcation
PTB 03 ATEX 1016 X.
2) Follow the instructions in the chapter ´Installation
Caractéristiques techniques
Marquage de l’appareil
selon 94/9/CE:
II 2 G Ex de IIC T6
II 2 G Ex ia/ib IIC T6
en fonction de CSA
Class I, Zone 1 Ex de IIC T6
Class I, Div 2; Gr. A,B,C,D
Attestation d’examen CE
de type: PTB 06 ATEX 1031 X
Température ambiante
admissible: -25°C/-55°C à +40°C
1)
Tension nominale: jusqu’à 400 V, 50/60 Hz
Courant nominal: max. 16 A
Entrée de câble ø: Standard Optional
Fiche, Prolongateur ø7-11mm ø11-15mm
Cable: LEONI 7x0,75mm²,
MUD
Section raccordement: 1x0,75-1,5mm²/
2,5mm²
Résistance aux vibrations selon
EN 60068-2-6 10-150 Hz: 2g / 30 min
2)
Couples de serrage testés:
Vis d´arrêt 1,0 Nm
Filets de vis de prise à
pride, connecteur 3,5 Nm
Vis de serrage 3,5 Nm
Vis de serrage 3,5 Nm
1)
Respecter les précautions particulières selon
l'attestation d'examen CE de type PTB 03 ATEX 1016 X
2) Suivre les instructions du chapitre ´Montage!
GHG 570 7005 P0101 D/E/F (a)/Auflage/38.11/Str.
Sicherheitshinweise
Zielgruppen dieser Anleitung sind
Elektrofachkräfte und unterwiesene
Personen in Anlehnung an die IEC 60079-14.
Die Montageanleitung nur zusammen mit der
ausführlichen Betriebsanleitung
„GHG5707005P0001“ (unter www.ceag.de
erhältlich) verwenden.
Die Benutzerinformationen für
„MOOG-Ventile“ sind zu beachten
(www.Moog.com/industrial).
Die auf den Geräten angegebene
Temperaturklasse und Zündschutzart ist zu
beachten.
Die Steckverbindung ist nicht für den Einsatz
im explosionsgefährdeten Bereich der Zone
0 und Zone 20, 21, 22 gemäß EN 60079-10
geeignet.
Steckverbinder unter Last nur mit den
Werten der Technischen Daten betreiben.
Trennen unter Belastung maximal bis
230 V / 400 V , 10 A möglich.
Steckverbindung nur in technisch
einwandfreiem Zustand sowie bestimmungs-
gemäß, sicherheits- und gefahrenbewusst
unter Beachtung dieser Montage- und
Betriebsanleitung montieren und betreiben.
Beachten Sie die nationalen Sicherheits-
und Unfallverhütungsvorschriften und die
nachfolgenden Sicherheitshinweise in
dieser Betriebsanleitung, die wie dieser Text
in Kursivschrift gefasst sind!
Safety instructions
Operations shall be carried out by
electricians and suitably personnel trained
in hazardous area with knowledge of
increased safety explosion protection in
accordance with IEC 60079-14.
The assembly instructions must be used in
conjunction with the detailed operating
instructions “GHG5707005P0001” (available from
www.ceag.de).
The user information for „MOOG-Ventile“
must to be observed
(www.Moog.com/industrial).
The temperature class and explosion group
marked on the terminal boxes have to be
observed.
The plug and socket system is not suitable
for Zone 0 and tone 20, 21, 22 hazardous
areas accordance with IEC 60079-10.
The plug and socket system may only be
connected or disconnected under load acc.
to technical data. ( 230 V / 400 V max. 10 A)
These assembly and operating instructions
shall be observed when installing and
operating the plug and socket connector
system. It shall only be used in a technically
perfect state and in accordance with the
intended purpose while paying attention to
the particular safety and hazard aspects.
The national safety rules and regulations for
the prevention of accidents, as well as the
safety instructions included in these
operating instructions, that, like this text,
are set in italics, shall be observed!
Consignes de sécurité
Ce mode d’emploi s’adresse aux électriciens
et personnes initiées sur base de la norme
CEI 60079-14.
Utilisez la notice de montage uniquement en
association avec les instructions détaillées de
service “GHG5707005P0001” (disponibles sur le
site www.ceag.de ).
Les informations utilisateur pour les
„MOOG-Ventile“ doivent être respectées
(www.Moog.com/industrial).
Le groupe d’explosion et la classe de
température marqués sur les appareils
devront être respectés.
Le connecteur n’est pas conçu pour être
utilisé dans les atmosphères explosibles des
zones 0 et 20, 21, 22 conformément à
CEI 60079-10.
Respecter impérativement les valeurs
indiquées dans les caractéristiques
techniques pour les connecteurs sous
charge. Ne séparer qu'à 230 V / 400 V 10 A
Monter et utiliser le connecteur seulement
s’il présente un état technique parfait,
conformément à sa destination, en étant
conscient des risques et des mesures de
sécurité à appliquer dans le respect d es
présentes instructions de montage et de
service.
Tenir compte des prescriptions nationales
en matière de sécurité et de prévention des
accidents ainsi que des consignes de
sécurité indiquées dans ce mode d’emploi,
écrites en italiques comme ce texte !
eXLink 6+1-polig Stecker, Kupplung/
6+1-pole plug, coupler /
6+1 la fiche, prolongateur
CUS
Verwendung/Eigenschaften
Die auf den Steckverbindern angegebene
Temperaturklasse und Zündschutzart
beachten.
Steckverbindung unter Last nur mit den Werten
der Technischen Daten betreiben und trennen.
Die Verantwortung hinsichtlich bestimmungs-
gemäßer Verwendung der Steckverbindung unter
Bezugnahme der in dieser Montage- und
Betriebsanleitung vorhandenen Rahmen-
bedingungen (Technischen Daten) liegt allein
beim Betreiber.
Keine Veränderungen bzw. Umbauten an der
Steckverbindung vornehmen.
Jede andere Verwendung ist nicht bestimmungs-
gemäß.
COOPER Crouse-Hinds übernimmt keine
Haftung für Schäden, die aus nicht bestimmungs-
gemäßer Verwendung entstehen.
Steckverbindung
stecken/trennen
Die Flanschsteckdosen und Geräte-
stecker nur mit den zugehörigen
unbeschädigten Steckern und Kupplungen
betreiben.
Auf gleiche Codierung (Uhrzeit) der
Steckverbindung achten.
i
Der Winkel zwischen Führungsnase und PE
Stift (mit größerem Durchmesser) ergibt die
Uhrzeit. (Fig. A)
Steckverbindung stecken
1. Der Stecker bzw. Gerätestecker mit der
Führungsnase lagerichtig in die entsprechende
Führungsnute der Kupplung bzw. Flanschsteck-
dose stecken. (Fig. B)
2. Bis zum 1. Anschlag zusammenstecken.(Fig. C)
3. Stecker bzw. Gerätestecker gegen Kupplung
bzw. Flanschsteckdose ca. 30° gegeneinander
bis zum Anschlag verdrehen. (Fig. D)
4. Steckverbindung vollständig zusammen-
stecken.(Fig. E)
i
Die elektrische Verbindung des Stecksystems
ist jetzt hergestellt.
5. Überwurfmutter des Steckers andrücken und
festschrauben.
IP Schutz und die mechanische Verbindung
hergestellt.
(Fig. F)
Steckverbindung trennen
1. Steckverbindung in umgekehrter Reihenfolge
zum Stecken trennen.
Bei nicht korrektem Stecken der
Steckverbindungskomponenten ist der
Explosionsschutz nicht mehr gewährleistet.
Fig. A Fig. B Fig. C
Fig. D Fig. E
1h
6h
Fig. F
„klick“
30°
Utilisation / PropriétésUtilisation / Propriétés
Utilisation / PropriétésUtilisation / Propriétés
Utilisation / Propriétés
Observez la classe de température et le type
de protection indiqués sur les appareils.
Respecter impérativement les valeurs indiquées
dans les caractéristiques techniques lors de
l’utilisation et du débranchement du connecteur.
En cas d’utilisation non conforme de ce
dispositif de connexion, par référence aux
conditions de base du présent mode d’emploi
(caractéristiques techniques), l’exploitant en
supporterait seul la responsabilité.
Contrôler le connecteur avant la mise en service
conformément aux instructions mentionnées
dans la section 6.
Ne pas modifier ou transformer le connecteur.
Utiliser exclusivement des pièces d’origine du
fabricant pour les remplacements et réparations.
Toute autre utilisation s’avère non conforme.
COOPER Crouse Hinds décline toute
responsabilité pour des dommag
Branchement/Débranchement
du connecteur
N’utiliser les prises de courant à bride
et les socles connecteurs qu’avec des
fiches et prolongateurs compatibles
intacts.
Veiller à un codage identique (heure) du
connecteur.
i
L’angle entre l’ergot de guidage et le
contact mâle PE (d’un plus grand diamètre)
donne l’heure. (Fig. A)
Branchement du connecteur
1. Engager dans la bonne position la fiche/le
socle connecteur avec l’ergot de guidage dans
la rainure de guidage correspondante du
prolongateur/de la prise de courant à bride
. (Fig. B)
2. Brancher les deux éléments jusqu’à la butée 1
3.
Tourner dans des sens contraires, d’env. 30°,
la fiche/le socle connecteur et le prolongateur/la
prise de courant à bride jusqu’en butée.
(Fig. D)
4. Le connecteur mâle-femelle boucher tout à
fait. (Fig. E)
i
Le branchement électrique du système de
connexion est maintenant réalisé.
5. Appuyer l’écrou-raccord de la fiche et le visser.
Le vissage de l’écrou-raccord a pour effet
d’établir la protection IP et la liaison
mécanique.(Fig. F)
Débranchement du connecteur
1. Débrancher le connecteur dans l’ordre
inverse du branchement.
Les éléments de connexion
conducteurs de tension à l’état ouvert
doivent être fermés avec le capuchon dès
le débranchement .
Use / PropertiesUse / Properties
Use / PropertiesUse / Properties
Use / Properties
The temperature class and type of protection
stated on the apparatus shall be observed.
The plug and socket system may only be
operated and disconnected under load acc. to
the technical data.
The sole responsibility with respect to the
suitability and proper use of the plug and socket
systems with regard to the basic requirements
of these instructions (see Technical Data) lies
with the operator.
Plug and socket systems shall be checked in
accordance with Section 6 of the named
instructions, before being put into use.
Modifications or changes to the design of the
plug and socket systems are not permitted.
Applications other than described are not
permitted without COOPER CROUSE-HINDS´s
prior written consent.
CCH takes no responsibility for damages
causedby incorrect use.
Connection/disconnection of
plug and socket
The flange sockets and inlets shall only
be operated with the associated,
undamaged plugs and couplers.
Attention shall be paid that the coding
(time setting) of the plugs and sockets is the
same.
i
The time of day is the angle between the
guide lug and the PE pin (larger in diameter).
(Fig. A)
Connecting plug and socketConnecting plug and socket
Connecting plug and socketConnecting plug and socket
Connecting plug and socket
11
11
1. Insert the plug or inlet with the guide lug in the
correct position into the respective keyway of
the coupler or flange socket.(Fig. B)
2. Insert until 1
st
stop is reached.(Fig. C)
3. Turn plug or inlet through ca. 30° in relation
to the coupler or flange socket until the stop is
reached.(Fig. D)
4. Join plug and socket completely.(Fig. E)
i
The electrical connection has now been
made.
5. Press the coupling nut of the plug on and
screw it tight.
The IP degree of protection and the
mechanical connection are established by
tightening the coupling nut.(Fig. F)
Disconnecting plug and socketDisconnecting plug and socket
Disconnecting plug and socketDisconnecting plug and socket
Disconnecting plug and socket
1. To disconnect plug and socket, carry out the
above actions in the reverse order.
When opened, the live plug and socket
system components shall be sealed
immediately after disconnection using the
protective cap.
Stecker/Kupplung öffnenStecker/Kupplung öffnen
Stecker/Kupplung öffnenStecker/Kupplung öffnen
Stecker/Kupplung öffnen
1. Eventuell vorhandene Schutzkappe
abschrauben.
2. Arretierschraube (1) lösen.
3. Druckstück (2) aus Hülse (9) heraus-
drehen.
4. Einsatz (8) von vorne aus der Hülse (9)
herausdrücken.
5. Dabei Zugentlastung (3), Dichtung (4),
Druckscheibe (5), Isolierhülse (6) aus
Hülse (9) nach hinten heraus nehmen.
6. Farbring zur Kennzeichnung auf Hülse
(9) aufziehen.
1 Arretierschraube
2 Druckstück
3 Zugentlastung
4 Dichtung
5 Druckscheibe
5a Druckscheibe mt PE
6 geteilte Isolierhülse
7 Stift / Buchse
8 Einsatz
9 Hülse
10 Überwurfmutter
1
2
2
1
3
3
4
4
5
6
7
5
6
8
11
9
10
7
8
9
7
8
9
11
9
7
8
10
Plug open Plug open
Plug open Plug open
Plug open (Fig. 7.1)
1. Screw down possible excisting
protective cap. .
2. Loosen locking screw (1).
3. Screw out pressure piece (2) of plug
sleeve (9).
4. Press out from front plug insert (8) out
of plug sleeve (9).
5. At the same time, remove the strain
relief (3), seal (4), thrust washer (5)
and insulating sleeve (6) from the
plug sleeve (9) from the back.
6. Fit coloured ring used for marking on
to the plug sleeve (9).
Ouverture de la ficheOuverture de la fiche
Ouverture de la ficheOuverture de la fiche
Ouverture de la fiche
1. Dévisser le capuchon (si monté) de la
fiche.
2. Dévisser la vis d’arrêt (1).
3. Sortir en la tournant la pièce de
pression (2) de la douille de fiche (9).
4. Extraire par l’avant le bloc de fiche (8)
de la douille de fiche (9).
5. Retirer pendant cette opération par
l’arrière la décharge de tension (3), le
joint (4), la rondelle de pression (5), la
douille isolante (6) de la douille de
fiche (9).
6. Monter la bague en couleur comme
repère sur la douille de fiche (9).
5 a
1 Locking screw
2 Pressure piece
3 Strain relief
4 Seal
5 Thrust washer
5a Thrust washer with PE
6 Insulating sleeve divisible
7 Plug pins / contact sockets
8 Plug/Coupler insert
9 Plug/Coupler sleeve
10 Coupling nut
1 Vis d’arrêt
2 Pièce de pression
3 Décharge de tension
4 Joint
5
Rondelle de pression
5a Rondelle de pression avec un pe
6 Douille isolante
7 Contact mâle/femelle
8 Bloc de fiche/prolongateur à insérer
9 Douille de fiche/prolongateur
10 Ecrou-raccord
111
36
105
36
Stecker
Plug
Fiche
Kupplung
Coupler
Prolongateur
8 h
12 h
Leiter mit Stiften / BuchsenLeiter mit Stiften / Buchsen
Leiter mit Stiften / BuchsenLeiter mit Stiften / Buchsen
Leiter mit Stiften / Buchsen
verbindenverbinden
verbindenverbinden
verbinden
Die Isolation des Leiters muss bis an die
Stifte / Buchsen heranreichen. Der Leiter
und die Isolation dürfen nicht beschädigt
sein.
1. Kabel ca. 30 mm abmanteln.(Fig.1)
2. Leiter des Kabels ca. 8 mm ab-
isolieren.
Stifte / Buchsen anschließenStifte / Buchsen anschließen
Stifte / Buchsen anschließenStifte / Buchsen anschließen
Stifte / Buchsen anschließen
1. Leiter in die Anschlussöffnung der
Stifte / Buchsen (7) stecken.
2. Alle Leiter mit der Crimpzange
(o Zubehör) ancrimpen (Fig.2).
oder
Alle Leiter mit Stiften/Buchsen
verlöten und
Schrumpfschlauch über jede Lötstelle
ziehen.
Stecker/Kupplung montierenStecker/Kupplung montieren
Stecker/Kupplung montierenStecker/Kupplung montieren
Stecker/Kupplung montieren
Auch Stifte/Buchsen montie-
ren, die nicht angeschlossen
sind.
Die Stifte/Buchsen sind nach
dem Eindrücken in den Einsatz
nicht mehr demontierbar.
Connecting conductors to pinsConnecting conductors to pins
Connecting conductors to pinsConnecting conductors to pins
Connecting conductors to pins
The insulation of the conductor shall
reach up to the pins. The conductor and the
isolation must not be damaged.
1. Strip off ca. 30 mm of cable
insulation.(Fig.1)
2. Strip off ca. 8 mm of insulation from
cable conductors.
Crimp plugs/contactsCrimp plugs/contacts
Crimp plugs/contactsCrimp plugs/contacts
Crimp plugs/contacts
1. Insert conductor into the connection
opening of the plug/contact pin (7).
2. Crimp on all conductors using
crimping tool (oAccessories) [Fig.@
or
solder all conductors to plug pins/
contact and pull shrink-on sleeve
over each solder ring point.
Assembling plugs/couplerAssembling plugs/coupler
Assembling plugs/couplerAssembling plugs/coupler
Assembling plugs/coupler
Also assemble plug/couplerAlso assemble plug/coupler
Also assemble plug/couplerAlso assemble plug/coupler
Also assemble plug/coupler
pins that are not connectedpins that are not connected
pins that are not connectedpins that are not connected
pins that are not connected
.
Once they have been pressed
into the plug/coupler insert, the
plug pins cannot be
disassembled.
Raccordement des conducteursRaccordement des conducteurs
Raccordement des conducteursRaccordement des conducteurs
Raccordement des conducteurs
aux contacts mâles/aux contacts mâles/
aux contacts mâles/aux contacts mâles/
aux contacts mâles/
femellesfemelles
femellesfemelles
femelles
L’isolation du conducteur doit arriver
jusqu’aux contacts . Le conducteur et
isolementne doit pas être endommagé.
1. Dénuder le câble sur env. 30
mm.(Fig.1)
2. Dénuder les conducteurs du câble sur
env. 8 mm.
Présertir Fiche/Prolongateur
1. Enficher le conducteur dans
l’ouverture
du contact mâle/femelle (7).
2. Pré-sertir tous les conducteurs avec
la pince à sertir (o accessoire) (Fig.2).
ou
braser tous les conducteurs avec les
contacts mâles/femelles et enfiler la
gaine thermorétractable sur chaque
brasure.
Montage de la fiche/duMontage de la fiche/du
Montage de la fiche/duMontage de la fiche/du
Montage de la fiche/du
prolongateurprolongateur
prolongateurprolongateur
prolongateur
Monter aussi les contacts
mâles/femelles non raccordés.
Les contacts mâles/femelles ne
peuvent plus être démontés
après avoir été pressés dans le
bloc de fiche.
Kon
830
Fig. 1 abisolieren Fig. 2 crimpen Fig. 3 einsetzen Fig. 4 zusammensetzen Fig. 5 Einsatz in Hülse
Fig. 6 festschrauben
1. Druckstück (2), Zugentlastung
(3), Dichtung (4) und Druck-
scheibe (5) auf Kabel
aufschieben.
2. Der Stift/die Buchse der Position
7 hat einen größeren Durch-
messer. Diesen zuerst in seine
Halterung stecken.
Alle Stifte / Buchsen (7) bis zum
hörbaren Einrasten in die
Sechskantführung des Einsat-
zes (8) drücken (Fig.3).
3. Isolierhülse (6) auseinander
ziehen und um die Leiter bis
zum Einrasten wieder zusam-
mendrücken (Fig.3).
4. Isolierhülse (6) auf Einsatz (8)
schieben.
5. Einsatz (8) mit Führungsnase in
die Führungs-nut der Hülse (10)
stecken (Fig.4).
6. Druckscheibe (5), Dichtung (4),
Zugentlastung (3) montieren.
7. Druckstück (2) festschrauben
(Drehmoment -> Technische
Daten).
8. Arretierschraube (1)
festschrauben.
Normenkonformität
Das Steckverbindungssystem
entspricht den in der Konformitäts-
erklärung aufgeführten Normen
und den vergleichbaren
IEC Standards
IEC 60079-0, IEC 60079-1,
IEC 60079-7, IEC 61241-0,
IEC 61241-1.
CAN/CSA C22.2 E60079-0-02
CAN/CSA C22.2 E60079-1-02
CAN/CSA C22.2 E60079-7-2003
CAN/CSA C22.2 No 213
CAN/CSA C22.2 No 182.3 M1987
CAN/CSA C22.2 No 94.1-07
94/9 EG: Geräte und Schutz-
systeme zur bestimmungs-
gemäßen Verwendung in
explosionsgefährdeten Bereichen.
Das Steckverbindungssystem ist
gemäß DIN EN ISO 9001 entwi-
ckelt, gefertigt und geprüft worden.
1. Push pressure piece (2), strain
relief (3), seal (4) and thrust
washer (5) on to cable.
2. The plug/contact pin, Item 7, is
larger in diameter. To avoid
mistakes, put this into the
holder first. Push all the plug
pins (7) into the hexa gonal
keyways of the plug/coupler
insert until they engage [Fig.3].
3. Pull the insulating sleeve (6)
apart and press the
conductors together again until
they engage [Fig.3].
4. Push the insulating sleeve (6) on
to the plug insert (8).
5. Insert the plug insert (8) with
guide lug into the keyway of the
plug sleeve (9) [Fig.4].
6. Fit thrust washer (5), seal (4)
and strain relief (3).
7. Screw pressure piece (2) tight
[torque -> Technical Data]
8. Tighten locking screw (1).
Conformity with standards
The plug and socket system is
conform to the standards specified
in the EC-Declaration of conformity
and additional conform to the
comparable IEC Standards
IEC 60079-0, IEC 60079-1,
IEC 60079-7, IEC 61241-0,
IEC 61241-1.
CAN/CSA C22.2 E60079-0-02
CAN/CSA C22.2 E60079-1-02
CAN/CSA C22.2 E60079-7-2003
CAN/CSA C22.2 No 213
CAN/CSA C22.2 No 182.3 M1987
CAN/CSA C22.2 No 94.1-07
94/9 EC: Equipment and protective
systems intended for use in
potentially explosive atmospheres.
It has been designed, manu-
factured and tested according to
the state of the art and to
DIN EN ISO 9001
1. Monter la pièce de pression (2),
la décharge de tension (3),
2. Le contact mâle/femelle de la
position 7 a un plus gros
diamètre. Pour éviter toute
confusion, enficher celui-ci en
premier dans son support.
Enfoncer tous les contacts
mâlesfemelles (7) jusqu’à
l’enclenchement dans le
guidage hexagonal du bloc de
fiche (8) (Fig.3).
3. Ecarter la douille isolante (6) puis
la comprimer autour des
conducteurs jusqu’à
l’enclenchement (Fig.3).
4. Monter la douille isolante (6) sur le
bloc de fiche (8).
5. Engager le bloc de fiche (8) avec
l’ergot de guidage dans la
rainure de guidage (10) de la
douille de fiche (Fig.4).
6. Monter la rondelle de pression
(5), le joint (4), la décharge de
tension (3).
7. Visser la pièce de pression (2)
(couple -> Caractéristiques
techniques).
8. Visser la vis d’arrêt (1).
Conformité avec les
normes
Les boîtes à bornes sont
conformes aux normes reprises
dans la déclaration de conformité
et supplémentaires conformes à la
comparables aux IEC Standards
IEC 60079-0, IEC 60079-1, I
EC 60079-7, IEC 61241-0,
IEC 61241-1.
CAN/CSA C22.2 E60079-0-02
CAN/CSA C22.2 E60079-1-02
CAN/CSA C22.2 E60079-7-2003
CAN/CSA C22.2 No 213
CAN/CSA C22.2 No 182.3 M1987
CAN/CSA C22.2 No 94.1-07
94/9 CE: Appareils et systèmes de
protection destinés à être utilisés
en atmosphère explosible.
Les boîtes à bornes ont été
conçues, fabriquées et contrôlées
suivant DIN EN ISO 9001.
Wir / we / nous Cooper Crouse-Hinds GmbH
Neuer Weg-Nord 49
D-69412 Eberbach
erklären in alleiniger Verantwortung, dass die Mehrfachsteckverbindung eXLink 6-/7-polig
hereby declare in our sole responsibility, that the multiple plug and socket systems eXLink, 6-/7-pole
déclarons de notre seule responsabilité, que le multiple fiches et prises eXlLink, à 6-/7-pôles
II 2 G Ex de IIC T6 // II 2 G Ex ia/ib IIC T6 Typ GHG 57.
auf die sich diese Erklärung bezieht, mit den folgenden Normen oder normativen Dokumenten übereinstimmen.
which are the subject of this declaration, are in conformity with the following standards or normative documents.
auquel cette déclaration se rapporte, est conforme aux normes ou aux documents normatifs suivants.
Bestimmungen der Richtlinie
Terms of the directive
Prescription de la directive
Titel und / oder Nr. sowie Ausgabedatum der Norm.
Title and / or No. and date of issue of the standard.
Titre et / ou No. ainsi que date d‘émission des
normes.
94/9/EG: Geräte und Schutzsysteme zur bestimmungs-
gemäßen Verwendung in explosionsgefährdeten
Bereichen.
94/9/EC: Equipment and protective systems intended for
use in potentially explosive atmospheres.
94/9/CE: Appareils et systèmes de protection destinés à
être utilisés en atmosphère explosibles.
EN 60 079-0: 2004
EN 60 079-1: 2004
EN 60 079-7: 2004
EN 60 079-11: 2007
EN 60 529: 1991 + A1: 2000
EN 61 984: 2001
EN 60 999-1: 2000
2004/108 EG: Elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit
2004/108 EC: Electromagnetic compatibility
2004/108 CE: Compatibilité électromagnétique
EN 60 947-1: 2007
Eberbach, den 17.09.09
i.A. R. Brandel i.V. H. Huter
Ort und Datum Leiter Labor Leiter Approbation
Place and date Head of Laboratory Head of Approval office
Lieu et date Chef du dépt. Laboratoire Chef du dépt. approbation
PTB 96 ATEX Q 1 - 5
Zertifizierungsstelle
Notified Body of the certification
Organes Notifié et Compétent
Physikalisch-Technische Bundesanstalt (0102)
Bundesallee 100
D-38116 Braunschweig
Konformitätsbewertungsstelle
Notified Body to quality evaluation
Organes d’attestation de conformité
Physikalisch-Technische Bundesanstalt (0102)
Bundesallee 100
D-38116 Braunschweig
Für den Sicheren Betrieb des Betriebsmittels sind die Angaben der zugehörigen Betriebsanleitung zu beachten.
For the safe use of this apparatus, the informations given in the accompanying operating instructions must be followed.
Afin d’assurer le bon fonctionnement de nos appareils, priére de respecter les directives du mode d’emploi correspondent à ceux-ci.
EG-Konformitätserklärung
EC-Declaration of conformity
CE-Déclaration de conformité
PTB 06 ATEX 1031 X
GHG 900 1000 P0048 B
Cooper Crouse-Hinds GmbHCooper Crouse-Hinds GmbH
Cooper Crouse-Hinds GmbHCooper Crouse-Hinds GmbH
Cooper Crouse-Hinds GmbH
Neuer Weg-Nord 49
D-69412 Eberbach
Phone +49 (0) 6271/806-500
Fax +49 (0) 6271/806-476
Internet: www.CEAG.de
E-Mail: info-ex@ceag.de
Technische Angaben
Gerätekennzeichnung
nach 94/9/EG:
II 2G Ex de IIC T6/
II 2G Ex ia/ib IIC T6
nach CSA Class I, Zone 1 Ex de IIC T6
Class I, Div 2; Gr. A,B,C,D
EG-Baumusterprüf-
bescheinigung: PTB 06 ATEX 1031 X
Zulässige Umgebungs-
temperatur: -25°C/-55°C bis +40°C
1)
Bemessungsspannung: bis 400 V, 50/60 Hz
Bemessungsstrom: max. 16 A
Anschlussleitung: AWG22 Metrofunk
AWG26 Metrofunk
Anschlussquerschnitt: AWG22, AWG26
Vibrationsfestigkeit nach
EN 60068-2-6 10-150 Hz: 2g / 30 min
2)
Prüfdrehmomente:
Arretierungsschraube: 1,0 Nm
Einschraubgewinde Steck-
dose, Gerätestecker 30 Nm
Überwurfmutter: 2,5 Nm (handfest)
1) die besonderen Bedingungen gemäß Prüfschein
PTB 03 ATEX 1016 X sind zu beachten.
2) Die Hinweise im Kapitel „Montage“ beachten!
Technical Data
Apparatus marking
acc. to 94/9/EC:
II 2G Ex de IIC T6/
II 2G Ex ia/ib IIC T6
acc. CSA Class I, Zone 1 Ex de IIC T6
Class I, Div 2; Gr. A,B,C,D
EC type examination
certificate: PTB 06 ATEX 1031 X
Permissible ambient
temperature: -25°C/-55°C to +40 °C
1)
Rated voltage: up to 400 V, 50/60 Hz
Rated current: max. 16 A
Cable: AWG22 Metrofunk
AWG26 Metrofunk
Terminal cross section: AWG22, AWG26
Vibration resistance acc.
EN 60068-2-6 10-150 Hz: 2g / 30 min
2)
Test torques
Locking screw: 1.0 Nm
Screw-in thread - flange
socket, inlet: 30 Nm
coupling nut: 2,5 Nm (by hand)
1) observe special requirements accd. certifcation
PTB 03 ATEX 1016 X.
2) Follow the instructions in the chapter ´Installation
Caractéristiques techniques
Marquage de l’appareil
selon 94/9/CE:
II 2G Ex de IIC T6/
II 2G Ex ia/ib IIC T6
en fonction de CSA Class I, Zone 1 Ex de IIC T6
Class I, Div 2; Gr. A,B,C,D
Attestation d’examen CE
de type: PTB 06 ATEX 1031 X
Température ambiante
admissible: -25°C/-55°C à +40°C
1)
Tension nominale: jusqu’à 400 V, 50/60 Hz
Courant nominal: max. 16 A
Cable: AWG22 Metrofunk
AWG26 Metrofunk
Section raccordement: AWG22, AWG26
Résistance aux vibrations selon
EN 60068-2-6 10-150 Hz: 2g / 30 min
2)
Couples de serrage testés
Vis d´ arrêt: 1,0 Nm
Filets de vis de prise à
pride, connecteur: 30 Nm
Ecrou(Bien serrer à la main): 2,5 Nm
1)
Respecter les précautions particulières selon
l'attestation d'examen CE de type PTB 03 ATEX 1016 X
2) Suivre les instructions du chapitre ´Montage!
GHG 570 7005 P0102 D/E/F (b)/Auflage/38.11/Ziegler
Sicherheitshinweise
Zielgruppen dieser Anleitung sind
Elektrofachkräfte und unterwiesene
Personen in Anlehnung an die
EN/IEC 60079-14.
Die Montageanleitung nur zusammen mit
der ausführlichen Betriebsanleitung
„GHG5707005P0001“ (unter
www.ceag.de erhältlich) verwenden.
Die Benutzerinformationen für
„MOOG-Ventile“ sind zu beachten
(www.Moog.com/industrial).
Das Konfektionieren der Steckverbinder
darf nur durch Fachkräfte erfolgen.
Die auf den Geräten angegebene
Temperaturklasse und Zündschutzart ist
zu beachten.
Die Steckverbindung ist nicht für den
Einsatz im explosionsgefährdeten
Bereich der Zone 0 und Zone 20, 21, 22
gemäß EN60079-10 geeignet.
Steckverbinder unter Last nur mit den
Werten der Technischen Daten betreiben.
Trennen unter Belastung maximal bis
230 V / 400 V , 10 A möglich.
Gerätestecker und Flanschsteckdosen
aus Metall sind durch geeignete
Maßnahmen in das Erdpotential der
Gehäuse bzw. Geräte mit einzubeziehen.
Steckverbindung nur in technisch
einwandfreiem Zustand sowie
bestimmungsgemäß, sicherheits- und
gefahrenbewusst unter Beachtung dieser
Montage- und Betriebsanleitung
montieren und betreiben.
Die unter Spannung stehenden Steck-
verbindungskomponenten müssen sofort
nach dem Trennen mit der Schutzkappe
verschlossen werden, damit die
Schutzart und damit der Explosions-
schutz sichergestellt wird.
Safety instructions
Operations shall be carried out by
electricians and suitably personnel trained
in hazardous area with knowledge of
increased safety explosion protection in
accordance with IEC 60079-14.
The assembly instructions must be used in
conjunction with the detailed operating
instructions “GHG5707005P0001”
(available from www.ceag.de).
The user information for „MOOG-Ventile“
must to be observed.
The connection of plug and socket systems
shall only be carried out by qualified
personnel.
The temperature class and explosion group
marked on the terminal boxes have to be
observed.
The plug and socket system is not suitable
for Zone 0 and tone 20, 21, 22 hazardous
areas accordance with EN 60079-10.
The plug and socket system may only be
connected or disconnected under load acc.
to technical data. (230 V / 400 V max. 10 A).
The metal flang sockets and inlets shall be
incorporated in the earth potential
eyualization.
These assembly and operating instructions
shall be observed when installing and
operating the plug and socket connector
system. It shall only be used in a technically
perfect state and in accordance with the
intended purpose while paying attention to
the particular safety and hazard aspects.
The national safety rules and regulations for
the prevention of accidents, as well as the
safety instructions included in these
operating instructions, that, like this text,
are set in italics, shall be observed!
Here it is necessary to ensure that it is
closed correctly, otherwise the minimum
degree of protection and the explosion
protection are no longer guaranteed.
Consignes de sécurité
Ce mode d’emploi s’adresse aux électriciens
et personnes initiées sur base de la norme
CEI 60079-14.
Utilisez la notice de montage uniquement en
association avec les instructions détaillées de
service “GHG5707005P0001”
(disponibles sur le site www.ceag.de ).
Les informations utilisateur pour les
„MOOG-Ventile“ doivent être respectées.
Seul un personnel qualifié est autorisé à
effectuer le branchement électrique des
connecteurs mâles-femelles.
Le groupe d’explosion et la classe de
température marqués sur les appareils
devront être respectés.
Le connecteur n’est pas conçu pour être
utilisé dans les atmosphères explosibles des
zones 0 et 20, 21, 22 conformément à
CEI 60079-10.
Respecter impérativement les valeurs
indiquées dans les caractéristiques
techniques pour les connecteurs sous
charge. Ne séparer qu'à 230 V / 400 V 10 A.
Les prises à bride aux métal et les sockles
connecteur aux métal doivent être reliés au
même potentiel.
Monter et utiliser le connecteur seulement
s’il présente un état technique parfait,
conformément à sa destination, en étant
conscient des risques et des mesures de
sécurité à appliquer dans le respect d es
présentes instructions de montage et de
service.
Tenir compte des prescriptions nationales
en matière de sécurité et de prévention des
accidents ainsi que des consignes de
sécurité indiquées dans ce mode d’emploi,
écrites en italiques comme ce texte!
Après déconnexion, les éléments de
connexion encore sous tension doivent
immédiatement être protégés à l’aide
d’obturateurs.
eXLink 6+1-polig Gerätestecker, Flanschsteckdose/
6+1-pole Inlet, Flange/
6+1 la prise et le prolongateur
CUS
Préparation conducteurs de
raccordement
du socle connecteur / de la prise
de courant à bride
Utiliser les câbles et les conducteurs
conformément aux Caractéristiques techniques.
Avec des conducteurs multifilaires ou à fils
fins, traiter les extrémités conformément aux
directives nationales et internationales (par ex.
en utilisant des embouts).
Raccorder les conducteurs correctement isolés
du câble en respectant les directives
correspondantes.
Effectuer le raccordement du conducteur avec
beaucoup de soin pour garantir la protection
contre les explosions.
Prepare connection conductors
of inlet / flange socket
Only use cables and conductors specified in the
Technical Data.
With multi-wire or fine-wire connection leads,
the ends of the wires shall be treated in
accordance with the valid national or international
regulations (e.g. the use of wire-end ferrules).
The insulation of the conductor shall reach up to
the plug pins. The conductor must not be
damaged
The relevant regulations shall be observed to
ensure that the conductors of the cable are
stripped off correctly.
The conductors shall be connected with due care
to ensure that the degree of protection is
maintained.
Steckverbindung
stecken/trennen
Die Flanschsteckdosen und Geräte-
stecker nur mit den zugehörigen
unbeschädigten Steckern und Kupplungen
betreiben.
Auf gleiche Codierung (Uhrzeit) der
Steckverbindung achten.
i
Der Winkel zwischen Führungsnase und PE
Stift (mit größerem Durchmesser) ergibt die
Uhrzeit. (Fig. A)
Steckverbindung stecken
1. Der Stecker bzw. Gerätestecker mit der
Führungsnase lagerichtig in die entsprechende
Führungsnute der Kupplung bzw. Flanschsteck-
dose stecken. (Fig. B)
2. Bis zum 1. Anschlag zusammenstecken.(Fig. C)
3. Stecker bzw. Gerätestecker gegen Kupplung
bzw. Flanschsteckdose ca. 30° gegeneinander
bis zum Anschlag verdrehen. (Fig. D)
4. Steckverbindung vollständig zusammen-
stecken.(Fig. E)
i
Die elektrische Verbindung des Stecksystems
ist jetzt hergestellt.
5. Überwurfmutter des Steckers andrücken und
handfest festschrauben.
IP Schutz und die mechanische Verbindung
hergestellt.
(Fig. F)
Steckverbindung trennen
1. Steckverbindung in umgekehrter Reihenfolge
zum Stecken trennen.
Bei nicht korrektem Stecken der
Steckverbindungskomponenten ist der
Explosionsschutz nicht mehr gewährleistet.
Fig. A Fig. B Fig. C
Fig. D Fig. E
1h
6h
Fig. F
„klick“
30°
Branchement/Débranchement
du connecteur
N’utiliser les prises de courant à bride
et les socles connecteurs qu’avec des
fiches et prolongateurs compatibles
intacts.
Veiller à un codage identique (heure) du
connecteur.
i
L’angle entre l’ergot de guidage et le
contact mâle PE (d’un plus grand diamètre)
donne l’heure. (Fig. A)
Branchement du connecteur
1. Engager dans la bonne position la fiche/le
socle connecteur avec l’ergot de guidage dans
la rainure de guidage correspondante du
prolongateur/de la prise de courant à bride
. (Fig. B)
2. Brancher les deux éléments jusqu’à la butée 1
3.
Tourner dans des sens contraires, d’env. 30°,
la fiche/le socle connecteur et le prolongateur/la
prise de courant à bride jusqu’en butée.
(Fig. D)
4. Le connecteur mâle-femelle boucher tout à
fait.(Fig. E)
i
Le branchement électrique du système de
connexion est maintenant réalisé.
5. Appuyer l’écrou-raccord de la fiche et le visser.
(Bien serrer à la main).
Le vissage de l’écrou-raccord a pour effet
d’établir la protection IP et la liaison
mécanique.(Fig. F)
Débranchement du connecteur
1. Débrancher le connecteur dans l’ordre
inverse du branchement.
Les éléments de connexion
conducteurs de tension à l’état ouvert
doivent être fermés avec le capuchon dès
le débranchement .
Connection/disconnection of
plug and socket
The flange sockets and inlets shall only
be operated with the associated,
undamaged plugs and couplers.
Attention shall be paid that the coding
(time setting) of the plugs and sockets is the
same.
i
The time of day is the angle between the
guide lug and the PE pin (larger in diameter).
(Fig. A)
Connecting plug and socketConnecting plug and socket
Connecting plug and socketConnecting plug and socket
Connecting plug and socket
1. Insert the plug or inlet with the guide lug in the
correct position into the respective keyway of
the coupler or flange socket.(Fig. B)
2. Insert until 1
st
stop is reached.(Fig. C)
3. Turn plug or inlet through ca. 30° in relation
to the coupler or flange socket until the stop is
reached.(Fig. D)
4. Join plug and socket completely.(Fig. E)
i
The electrical connection has now been
made.
5. Press the coupling nut of the plug on and
screw it tight by hand.
The IP degree of protection and the
mechanical connection are established by
tightening the coupling nut.(Fig. F)
Disconnecting plug and socketDisconnecting plug and socket
Disconnecting plug and socketDisconnecting plug and socket
Disconnecting plug and socket
1. To disconnect plug and socket, carry out the
above actions in the reverse order.
When opened, the live plug and socket
system components shall be sealed
immediately after disconnection using the
protective cap.
Anschlussleiter von
Gerätestecker/Flanschsteckdose
vorbereiten
Kabel und Leiter entsprechend den Technischen
Daten verwenden.
Bei mehr- oder feindrähtigen Leitern die Enden
entsprechend den geltenden nationalen und
internationalen Vorschriften behandeln (z.B.
Verwenden von Aderendhülsen).
Die ordnungsgemäß abisolierten Leiter des
Kabels unter Berücksichtigung einschlägiger
Vorschriften anschließen.
Leiteranschluss zur Aufrechterhaltung der
Zündschutzart mit besonderer Sorgfalt
durchführen.
Gerätestecker / FlanschsteckdoseGerätestecker / Flanschsteckdose
Gerätestecker / FlanschsteckdoseGerätestecker / Flanschsteckdose
Gerätestecker / Flanschsteckdose
einschraubeneinschrauben
einschraubeneinschrauben
einschrauben
Gerätestecker bzw. Flanschsteckdose nur in die
dafür vorgesehene Gehäuse einbauen.
Das Gehäusevolumen bei der Auswahl des
Gerätesteckers berücksichtigen.
Die Gewindebohrungen im druckfesten
Schutzgehäuse oder Einbaugeräten,
müssen den Mindestanforderungen der
EN 60079-1, entsprechen.
Zur Sicherstellung des Explosions-
schutzes in die Bohrungen von druckfesten
Gehäusen nur Gerätestecker und
Flanschsteckdosen aus Metall mit der
geeigneten Zündschutzart verwenden.
Die Einschraubgewinde dürfen nicht verschmutz oder
beschädigt sein.
Nur die im Gerätestecker bzw. in der Flanschsteck-
dose vorhandenen Dichteinsätze verwenden.
Beim Einschrauben der Gerätestecker bzw. der
Flanschsteckdosen auf die angeschlossenen
Leitungen bzw. Adern achten, damit keine
Beschädigung der Isolation durch das
Einschrauben entsteht.
Die Einschraubkomponenten sind so
fest einzuschrauben, dass eine korrekte
Dichtwirkung gewährleistet ist. (Prüf-
drehmoment siehe Technische Daten).
Die Gerätestecker und Flanschsteckdosen aus
Metall in das Erdpotential mit einbeziehen.
Vor dem Stecken sicherstellen, dass Gerätestecker
und Flanschsteckdosen nicht beschädigt sind.
1. Gerätestecker bzw. Flanschsteckdose mit
Verdrehschutz einschrauben (Prüf-
drehmoment -> Technische Daten).
2. Verdrehschutzschraube festdrehen.
3. Gerätestecker bzw. Flanschsteckdosen durch
kontern sichern.
Den Gerätestecker nicht durch verkleben
gegen Lösen sichern, da sonst Funktionsstö-
rungen auftreten können.
Vissage du connecteur / de la prise deVissage du connecteur / de la prise de
Vissage du connecteur / de la prise deVissage du connecteur / de la prise de
Vissage du connecteur / de la prise de
courant à bridecourant à bride
courant à bridecourant à bride
courant à bride
Ne monter le socle connecteur ou la prise de
courant à bride que dans les boîtiers prévus à cet
effet.Observez le volume de l'enceinte
antidéflagrante lors socle connecteuravec
sélection.
Les alésages filetés du boîtier de
protection ou appareil à encastrer résistant
à la pression doivent satisfaire aux
exigences minima de la norme EN 60079-1.
Pour garantir la protection contre les
explosions, n’utiliser dans les orifices des
boîtiers résistant à la pression que des
socles connecteurs et des prises de courant
à bride en métal, présentant le type de
protection contre les explosions approprié.
Les filetages ne doivent pas être sales ou
endommagés.
N’utiliser que les éléments d’étanchéité disponibles
dans le socle connecteur ou la prise de courant
à bride.
En vissant le socle connecteur ou la prise de courant
à bride sur le câble ou le fil connecté, veiller à
ne pas endommager l’isolation.
Les éléments de vissage doivent être
vissés avec un couple assurant une bonne
étanchéité. (Couples de contrôle voir les
Caractéristiques techniques)
Intégrer les socles connecteurs et les prises de
courant à bride en métal dans le potentiel terrestre.
Avant la connexion, s’assurer que les socles
connecteurs et les prises de courant à bride
sont en bon état.
1. Visser le socle connecteur ou la prise de courant à
bride avec la protection antitorsion (Couples de
contrôle -> Caractéristiques techniques).
2. Serrer à fond la vis de protection antitorsion.
3. Bloquer le socle connecteur ou la prise de
courant à bride par contre-écrou.
Ne pas coller le socle connecteur pour
l’empêcher de se desserrer, cela risquerait
d’entraîner des dysfonctionnements.
Screw in inlet / flange socketScrew in inlet / flange socket
Screw in inlet / flange socketScrew in inlet / flange socket
Screw in inlet / flange socket
Inlets or flange sockets shall only be built into
enclosures intended for this purpose.
Observe the flameproof enclosure volume when
flange-socket selecting.
The threaded holes in the flameproof
enclosure shall fulfil the minimum
requirements of EN 60079-1.
To ensure the explosion protection, only
fit inlets and flange sockets made of metal
in the appropriate type of protection into
the threaded holes of flameproof
enclosures.
The screw-in thread must not be dirty or damaged.
Only use the seal inserts provided in the inlet or
flange socket.
When screwing in
the inlet or flange socket, pay
attention to the connected conductors to ensure
that the insulation is not damaged in the
process.
The screw-in components shall be
tightened down in such a way that they are
properly sealed (see Technical Data for test
torque).
The inlets and flange sockets shall be
incorporated in the earth potential.
Before use, ensure that inlets and flange sockets are
not damaged.
1 Fit inlet or flange socket with anti-twist
protection, (test torque -> Technical Data).
2. Tighten anti-twist screw.
3. Fit inlet or flange socket with anti-twist
protection (7), (test torque -> Technical Data).
1 Überwurfmutter 4 Gerätestecker-Einsatz
Ecrou-raccord Bloc de socle connecteur
Ecrou-raccord Bloc de socle connecteur
2 Gerätestecker-Hülse 5 Flanschsteckdosen Hülse
Douille du socle connecteur Douille de la prise de courant à bride
Douille du socle connecteur Douille de la prise de courant à bride
3 Anschlusskabel 6 Flanschsteckdosen-Einsatz
Câble de raccordement Bloc de prise de courant à bride
Câble de raccordement Bloc de prise de courant à bride
66
Flanschsteckdose mit Anschlussleitung
Flange socket with connection leads
Prise à bride avec lignes de raccordement
Gerätestecker mit Anschlussleitung
Inlet with connection leads
Socle connecteuravec lignes de raccordement
V < 2000 cm³ V > 2000 cm³
76
SW 32
M25
36
36
36
SW 32
M25
SW 32
M25
67
12,5
12,5
12,5
Das Gehäusevolumen bei der Auswahl
des Gerätesteckers berücksichtigen.
Observe the flameproof enclosure
volume when flange-socket selecting.
Observez le volume de l'enceinte
antidéflagrante lors socle
connecteuravec sélection.
8 h
12 h
Wir / we / nous Cooper Crouse-Hinds GmbH
Neuer Weg-Nord 49
D-69412 Eberbach
erklären in alleiniger Verantwortung, dass die Mehrfachsteckverbindung eXLink 6-/7-polig
hereby declare in our sole responsibility, that the multiple plug and socket systems eXLink, 6-/7-pole
déclarons de notre seule responsabilité, que le multiple fiches et prises eXlLink, à 6-/7-pôles
II 2 G Ex de IIC T6 // II 2 G Ex ia/ib IIC T6 Typ GHG 57.
auf die sich diese Erklärung bezieht, mit den folgenden Normen oder normativen Dokumenten übereinstimmen.
which are the subject of this declaration, are in conformity with the following standards or normative documents.
auquel cette déclaration se rapporte, est conforme aux normes ou aux documents normatifs suivants.
Bestimmungen der Richtlinie
Terms of the directive
Prescription de la directive
Titel und / oder Nr. sowie Ausgabedatum der Norm.
Title and / or No. and date of issue of the standard.
Titre et / ou No. ainsi que date d‘émission des
normes.
94/9/EG: Geräte und Schutzsysteme zur bestimmungs-
gemäßen Verwendung in explosionsgefährdeten
Bereichen.
94/9/EC: Equipment and protective systems intended for
use in potentially explosive atmospheres.
94/9/CE: Appareils et systèmes de protection destinés à
être utilisés en atmosphère explosibles.
EN 60 079-0: 2004
EN 60 079-1: 2004
EN 60 079-7: 2004
EN 60 079-11: 2007
EN 60 529: 1991 + A1: 2000
EN 61 984: 2001
EN 60 999-1: 2000
2004/108 EG: Elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit
2004/108 EC: Electromagnetic compatibility
2004/108 CE: Compatibilité électromagnétique
EN 60 947-1: 2007
Eberbach, den 17.09.09
i.A. R. Brandel i.V. H. Huter
Ort und Datum Leiter Labor Leiter Approbation
Place and date Head of Laboratory Head of Approval office
Lieu et date Chef du dépt. Laboratoire Chef du dépt. approbation
PTB 96 ATEX Q 1 - 5
Zertifizierungsstelle
Notified Body of the certification
Organes Notifié et Compétent
Physikalisch-Technische Bundesanstalt (0102)
Bundesallee 100
D-38116 Braunschweig
Konformitätsbewertungsstelle
Notified Body to quality evaluation
Organes d’attestation de conformité
Physikalisch-Technische Bundesanstalt (0102)
Bundesallee 100
D-38116 Braunschweig
Für den Sicheren Betrieb des Betriebsmittels sind die Angaben der zugehörigen Betriebsanleitung zu beachten.
For the safe use of this apparatus, the informations given in the accompanying operating instructions must be followed.
Afin d’assurer le bon fonctionnement de nos appareils, priére de respecter les directives du mode d’emploi correspondent à ceux-ci.
EG-Konformitätserklärung
EC-Declaration of conformity
CE-Déclaration de conformité
PTB 06 ATEX 1031 X
GHG 900 1000 P0048 B
Conformity with standards
The plug and socket system is conform to the
standards specified in the EC-Declaration of
conformity and additional conform to the
comparable IEC Standards
IEC 60079-0, IEC 60079-1, IEC 60079-7,
IEC 61241-0, IEC 61241-1.
CAN/CSA C22.2 E60079-0-02
CAN/CSA C22.2 E60079-1-02
CAN/CSA C22.2 E60079-7-2003
CAN/CSA C22.2 No 213
CAN/CSA C22.2 No 182.3 M1987
CAN/CSA C22.2 No 94.1-07
94/9 EC: Equipment and protective systems
intended for use in potentially explosive
atmospheres.
It has been designed, manufactured and tested
according to the state of the art and to
DIN EN ISO 9001.
Normenkonformität
Das Steckverbindungssystem entspricht den in
der Konformitätserklärung aufgeführten Normen
und den vergleichbaren IEC Standards
IEC 60079-0, IEC 60079-1, IEC 60079-7,
IEC 61241-0, IEC 61241-1.
CAN/CSA C22.2 E60079-0-02
CAN/CSA C22.2 E60079-1-02
CAN/CSA C22.2 E60079-7-2003
CAN/CSA C22.2 No 213
CAN/CSA C22.2 No 182.3 M1987
CAN/CSA C22.2 No 94.1-07
94/9 EG: Geräte und Schutzsysteme zur
bestimmungsgemäßen Verwendung in
explosionsgefährdeten Bereichen.
Das Steckverbindungssystem ist gemäß
DIN EN ISO 9001 entwickelt, gefertigt und
geprüft worden.
Conformité avec les
normes
Les boîtes à bornes sont conformes aux normes
reprises dans la déclaration de conformité et
supplémentaires conformes à la
comparables aux IEC Standards
IEC 60079-0, IEC 60079-1, IEC 60079-7,
IEC 61241-0, IEC 61241-1.
CAN/CSA C22.2 E60079-0-02
CAN/CSA C22.2 E60079-1-02
CAN/CSA C22.2 E60079-7-2003
CAN/CSA C22.2 No 213
CAN/CSA C22.2 No 182.3 M1987
CAN/CSA C22.2 No 94.1-07
94/9 CE: Appareils et systèmes de protection
destinés à être utilisés en atmosphère
explosible.
Les boîtes à bornes ont été conçues, fabriquées
et contrôlées suivant DIN EN ISO 9001.
Cooper Crouse-Hinds GmbHCooper Crouse-Hinds GmbH
Cooper Crouse-Hinds GmbHCooper Crouse-Hinds GmbH
Cooper Crouse-Hinds GmbH
Neuer Weg-Nord 49
D-69412 Eberbach
Phone +49 (0) 6271/806-500
Fax +49 (0) 6271/806-476
Internet: www.CEAG.de
E-Mail: info-ex@ceag.de
www.moog.com/industrial
Moog is a registered trademark of Moog Inc. and its subsidiaries. All trademarks as indicated herein are
the property of Moog Inc. and its subsidiaries.
© 2012 Moog GmbH. All rights reserved. All changes reserved.
Pilot-operated proportional valves D67xK
reinisch/Rev. -, May 2012, CDS29588-en
WHAT MOVES YOUR WORLD
TAKE A CLOSER LOOK.
Moog designs a range of products that complement the performance of those featured in
this document. Visit our website for more information and the Moog facility nearest you.
Argentina
+54 11 4326 5916
info.argentina@moog.com
India
+91 80 4057 6605
info.india@moog.com
Singapore
+65 677 36238
info.singapore@moog.com
Australia
+61 3 9561 6044
info.australia@moog.com
Ireland
+353 21 451 9000
info.ireland@moog.com
South Africa
+27 12 653 6768
info.southafrica@moog.com
Brazil
+55 11 3572 0400
info.brazil@moog.com
Italy
+39 0332 421 111
info.italy@moog.com
Spain
+34 902 133 240
info.spain@moog.com
Canada
+1 716 652 2000
info.canada@moog.com
Japan
+81 46 355 3767
info.japan@moog.com
Sweden
+46 31 680 060
info.sweden@moog.com
China
+86 21 2893 1600
info.china@moog.com
Korea
+82 31 764 6711
info.korea@moog.com
Switzerland
+41 71 394 5010
info.switzerland@moog.com
Finland
+358 10 422 1840
info.finland@moog.com
Luxembourg
+352 40 46 401
info.luxembourg@moog.com
United Kingdom
+44 168 429 6600
info.uk@moog.com
France
+33 1 4560 7000
info.france@moog.com
Netherlands
+31 252 462 000
info.thenetherlands@moog.com
USA
+1 716 652 2000
info.usa@moog.com
Germany
+49 7031 622 0
info.germany@moog.com
Norway
+47 6494 1948
info.norway@moog.com
Hong Kong
+852 2 635 3200
info.hongkong@moog.com
Russia
+7 8 31 713 1811
info.russia@moog.com
